ÙetLe keâe@efcheefšMeve šeFcme

DRDO
Electronics
Engineering
(Electronics & Communication or Electronics
and Telecommunication Engineering)
TIER-II
PRACTICE BOOK Chief Editor
Mr. Anand Mahajan
Editor
Adv. Abhishek Singh
Compiled & Edited by
Engg. Anil Kumar Yadav
Computer Graphics by
Balkrishna, Charan Singh & Ashish Giri
Editorial Office
Youth Competition Times
12, Church Lane Prayagraj-211002
Mob. : 9415650134
Email : [email protected]
website : www.yctbooks.com
Publisher Declaration
Edited and Published by A.K. Mahajan for YCT Publications Pvt. Ltd.
and printed by Om Sai Offset, Prayagraj.
In order to Publish the book, full care has been taken by the Editor and the
Publisher, still your suggestions and queries are welcomed. Rs. : 195/-
In the event of any dispute, the Judicial area will be Prayagraj.
 CONTENTS
PRACTICE SETS
PRACTICE SET-1 ........................................................................................................... 3-16

PRACTICE SET-2 ......................................................................................................... 17-30

PRACTICE SET-3 ......................................................................................................... 31-43

PRACTICE SET-4 ......................................................................................................... 44-58

PRACTICE SET-5 ......................................................................................................... 59-73

PRACTICE SET-6 ......................................................................................................... 74-88

PRACTICE SET-7 ....................................................................................................... 89-102

PRACTICE SET-8 ..................................................................................................... 103-116

PRACTICE SET-9 ..................................................................................................... 117-130

PRACTICE SET-10 ................................................................................................... 131-144

Pattern of Examination
(For the Post of 'STA-B')
Tier Mode/Type of Scope of Examination No. of Maximum Duration of
Examination Questions Marks Exam. (Mins.)

I CBT For Test common to all post-codes : 120 120 90

Screening Quantitative ability, General
intelligence & Reasoning ability,
General awareness, English
Language (basic knowledge),
General science

II CBT For Test specific to subject of post-code 100 100 90

Provisional
Selection

2
 PRACTICE SET - 1
1. Doping of Boron in Silicon results in 11. Which one of the following noises arises in
(a) An intrinsic Si semiconductor electronic devices such as diodes and
(b) A p - type extrinsic semiconductor transistors because of the discrete nature
(c) An n-type extrinsic semiconductor nature of current flow?
(d) An intrinsic B semiconductor (a) Shot noise (b) Thermal noise
2. In a centre-tap full wave rectifier, Vm is the
(c) Gaussian noise (d) Random noise
peak voltage between the centre-tap and one of
the secondary. The maximum voltage across 12. Why TCP traffic is elastic traffic?
the reverse biased diode is (a) TCP sends traffic at a constant rate.
(a) Vm (b) 2 Vm (b) TCP adjusts traffic rate based on congestion.
(c) Vm/2 (d) 3 Vm (c) TCP maintains end-to-end flow control.
3. A land line tele-metering system is suitable for (d) None of the above
distance up to about 13. The number of address bits that are present in
(a) 1 Km only (b) 10 Km only Microprocessor 8085 are .
(c) 100 km only (d) any of the above (a) 64 (b) 32
4. BCD code of decimal number 15 is (c) 16 (d) 8
(a) 0000 1111 (b) 1111 14. Which of the following modulation scheme is
(c) 1000 0101 (d) 0001 0101 most bandwidth efficient?
5. One form of NMOS circuit logic that minimizes (a) AM (b) FM
power dissipation and maximizes device
density is called (c) PM (d) SSB-SC
(a) pass transistor logic 15. The solar cell is based on the principle of
(b) sequential logic circuit (a) Photo emissive effect
(c) NMOS SRAM cell (b) Photo conductive effect
(d) NMOS transmission gate (c) MOSFET
6. DC choppers belong to the category of, (d) Photo voltaic effect
(a) DC – DC converter 16. The atomic packing factor of a simple cubic
(b) AC – DC converter structure is
(c) Inverter
(a) 0.42 (b) 0.62
(d) AC – AC converter
(c) 0.52 (d) 0.72
7. The ac motor used in servo applications is a
(a) Single-phase induction motor 17. From the given expression, calculate the eigen
(b) 2–φ induction motor values of A.
(c) 3–φ induction motor 4 1 
A= 
(d) Synchronous motor. 1 4 
8. A periodic signal is represented by (a) 4, 4 (b) 3, 5
(a) x(t) = x(t + T) (b) x(t) = x(t/T) (c) 6, 2 (d) –3, –5
(c) x(t) = x(tT) (d) x(t) = x(2T)
18. When microwave signals follow the curvature
9. A TDM system is to be designed to multiplex
of the earth, this is known as-
the following two signals
(a) Faraday effect
x1 = 5cos(2000πt) (b) Ducting
x2 = 2cos(2000πt)cos(3000πt) (c) Tropospheric scatter
The minimum sampling rate is (d) Ionospheric reflection
(a) 4 kHz (b) 5 kHz 19. Match List-I (Current) with List-II (Variation)
(c) 10 kHz (d) 6 kHz and select the correct answer using the code
10. A series RLC circuit has a resonance frequency given below the lists:
of 1 kHz and a quality factor Q = 100. If each List-I List-II
of R, L and C is doubled from its original A. Hole diffusion current 1. n.E
value, the new Q of the circuit B. Electron drift current 2. p.E
(a) 200 (b) 100 C. Hole drift current 3. –dp/dx
(c) 25 (d) 50 D. Electron diffusion current 4. dn/dx
Practice Set-1 3 YCT
 Codes: 30. The trigonometric Fourier series of an even
A B C D function of time does not have
(a) 2 1 3 4 (a) the dc term
(b) 3 4 2 1 (b) cosine terms
(c) 2 4 3 1 (c) sine terms
(d) 3 1 2 4 (d) odd harmonic terms
20. For a diode in a reverse bias region, we have 31. Determine the equivalent resistance between
_____ capacitance, while in the forward bias terminal A and B in the following circuit -
region, we have ______capacitance.
(a) Transition, Diffusion
(b) Diffusion, Depletion
(c) Transition, Depletion
(d) Diffusion, Storage
21. The configuration of cascode amplifier is (a) 6.4Ω (b) 8.4Ω
(a) CE – CC (b) CE – CB (c) 10.5Ω (d) 9.6Ω
(c) CC – CB (d) CC – CC 32. What is product of form factor and peak
22. If 3 amplifiers are connected in cascade and fL factor?
of each is 120 Hz, then fL of cascaded amplifiers max.value max.value
(a) (b)
is: rms value avg.value
(a) 59.98 Hz (b) 253.43 Hz rms value avg.value
(c) 235.37 Hz (d) 254.33 Hz (c) (d)
avg.value rms value
23. The difference between the indicated value and
true value of a quantity is known as 33. P = 2i - 3j,Q = −3i + 4j - 2k,and R are in
(a) Relative error equilibrium, if R is
(b) Absolute error (a) −i − j + 2k (b) i − j + 2k
(c) Gross error
(c) i + j + 2k (d) i − j − 2k
(d) Dynamic error
24. The most common method used for damping in 34. A random process obeys Poisson's distribution.
measuring instruments is It is given that the mean of the process is 5.
(a) Air friction damping Then the variance of the process is
(b) Eddy current damping (a) 5 (b) 0.5
(c) Electromagnetic braking (c) 25 (d) 0
(d) Fluid friction damping 35. A random process is called ergodic process if-
25. The gray code of (1001)2 is: (a) Ensemble average is half of the time average.
(a) 1101 (b) 0110 (b) Time average is half of the ensemble average.
(c) 1100 (d) 1001 (c) Time average is equal to ensemble average.
26. Minimum number of gates required to (d) Time average is more than ensemble average.
implement the Boolean expression XY + X(X + 36. Identify the advantages of 2G from below
Z) + Y(X + Z) after simplification is (a) Calling was included
(a) 1 (b) 3 (b) The increase of overhead in signaling paved
(c) 2 (d) 4 way for capacity enhancement.
27. Power diode are used with (c) Higher bit rate voice coding enabled more
(a) heat sinks (b) reverse bias users getting the services simultaneously.
(c) forward bias (d) at room temperature (d) New services such as SMS were included
28. In thyristor, holding current is 37. In 8085 microprocessor CMA, RLC, RRC
(a) More than latching current instructions are examples of which addressing
(b) Less than latching current mode?
(c) Equal to latching current (a) Implicit addressing mode
(d) Very small (b) Direct addressing mode
29. Negative feedback in a closed-loop control (c) Indirect addressing mode
system does not (d) Immediate addressing mode
(a) reduce the overall gain 38. Which of the following computer memories is
(b) reduce bandwidth fastest?
(c) improve disturbance rejection (a) cache (b) primary
(d) reduce sensitivity to parameter variation (c) mass storage (d) backup memories
Practice Set-1 4 YCT
39. The eddy current loss is proportional to the
(a) frequency
(b) square of the frequency
(c) cube of the frequency
(d) square root of the frequency
40. The Electrical susceptibility and relative
permittivity are related as :
(a) χ = εr–1
(b) χ = εr + 1 RaRc R C
(a) L x = ,Rx = a b
(c) χ = εr ε0 Cb Cc
(d) χ =1 +ε0εr (b) Lx = RaRcCb, Rx = RxCbCc
41. The differential equation representing the heat R R R C
(c) L x = a c , R x = a c
equation is Cb Cb
(a) ∇ 2f = 0 (b) ut=kuxx R a Cb
(c) u tt = k∇ 2 u (d) None of the above (d) L x = R a R c C b , R x =
Cc
42. In a waveguide with perfectly conducting flat, 48. The circuit shown in figure is equivalent to :
wall, the angle of reflection is equal to the angle
of
(a) Diffraction
(b) Incidence
(c) Refraction
(d) Penetration
43. The phenomenon known as 'Early effect' in a (a)
bipolar transistor refers to a reduction of the
effective base-width caused by
(a) Electron-hole recombination at the base
(b) The reverse-biasing of the base-collector
(b)
junction
(c) The forward-biasing of the emitter-base
junction
(d) The early removal of stored base charge
during saturation to cut off switching (c)
44. A FET is better chopper than a BJT because it
has
(a) Lower off-set voltage
(b) Higher series ON resistance (d)
(c) Lower input current
(d) Higher input impedance
45. Which one of the following gain equations is
correct for a MOSFET common-source 49. Subtractors are designed using ______ ICs.
amplifier? (gm is mutual conductance, and RD (a) digital (b) analog
is load resistance at the drain) (c) subtractor (d) adder
(a) AV = gm/RD 50. If a zero is added in a forward path of a second
(b) AV = gmRD order system:
(c) AV = gm/(1 + RD) (a) rise time will decrease
(d) AV = RD/gm (b) rise time will increase
46. An amplifier power level is changed from 8 (c) bandwidth will decrease
watts to 16 watts, equivalent dB gains is (d) system will be less stable
(a) 2 dB (b) 3 dB 51. A system has a single pole at origin. Its impulse
(c) 6 dB (d) 5 dB response will be:
47. The figure shows 'Owen bridge' arranged to (a) constant
measure incremental inductance of the (b) ramp
unknown inductance Lx, Rx. At balance, what (c) decaying exponential
are the values of Lx and Rx ? (d) oscillatory

Practice Set-1 5 YCT

52. If L[f(t)] = F(s), then L[f(t – T)] is equal to 62. Which one of the following is the correct
sT − sT statements?
(a) e F(s) (b) e F(s)
A rectangular coaxial line can support
F(s) F(s)
(c) (d) (a) only TEM modes of propagation
1+ e sT
1 − e −sT (b) both TEM and TE modes of propagation
53. Which one of the following theorems becomes (c) either TE or TM mode of propagation
important if the circuit has sources operating (d) TEM, TE and TM modes of propagation
at different frequencies? 63. If RA = 10k, RB = 10k and capacitance = 10µF
(a) Norton theorem the total time period of the a stable
(b) Thevenin theorem multivibrator 555 is:
(c) Superposition theorem (a) 0.207 s (b) 0.5 s
(d) Maximum power transfer theorem (c) 0.138 s (d) 0.069 s
54. Gauss law relate the electric field intensity 64. The Darlington pair is mainly used for
E with the volume charge density ‘ρ’ at a point (a) Reducing distortion
as- (b) Power amplification
ρ (c) Wideband voltage amplification
(a) ∇ × E =∈0 ρ (b) ∇ × E =
∈0 (d) Impedance matching
ρ 65. In sample and hold circuit, op-amp is
(c) ∇.E =∈0 ρ (d) ∇.E = connected as :
∈0
(a) Unity gain inverting voltage amplifier
55. In a superheterodyne receiver, the IF is 455 (b) Unity gain non inverting voltage amplifier
kHz, if it is tuned to 1200 kHz, the image (c) Unity gain inverting current amplifier
frequency will be
(d) Unity gain non inverting current amplifier
(a) 1655 kHz (b) 745 kHz
66. Out of an ammeter, a milli ammeter, a
(c) 2110 kHz (d) 910 kHz
voltmeter and a milli voltmeter, which pair of
56. Which is NOT a Wireless Technology? the instruments have maximum and minimum
(a) Blue Tooth resistance respectively?
(b) A conventional telephone (a) Voltmeter; Milli ammeter
(c) Wi-fi (b) Voltmeter; Ammeter
(d) Wi-Max (c) Milli voltmeter; Ammeter
57. In IC 8085 Microprocessor TRAP interrupt
(d) Milli voltmeter; Milli ammeter
ISR is at which memory address?
67. The characteristic equation of the T-flip-flop is
(a) 50H (b) FEH
given by
(c) 24H (d) 34H
58. A dynamic RAM consists of (a) Q n +1 = TQ n (b) Q n +1 = TQ n + Q n T
(a) 3 transistors (c) Q n +1 = TQ n (d) Q n +1 = TQ n
(b) 1 transistor and 1 capacitor 68. A receiver has poor IF selectivity. It will
(c) 2 transistor and 3 capacitors therefore also have poor-
(d) 2 transistors (a) blocking (b) double-spotting
59. A dc voltage supply provides 60 V when the (c) diversity reception (d) sensitivity
output is unloaded. When connected to a load,
69. The 4-point discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
the output drops to 56 V. The value of voltage
of a discrete time sequence {1, 0, 2, 3} is
regulation is,
(a) 40% (b) 6.6% (a) (0, – 2 +2j, 2, –2 –2j)
(c) 93.3% (d) 7.1% (b) (2, 2 +2j, 6, 2 –2j)
60. Metallic copper is a (c) (6, 1 – 3j, 2, 1 +3j)
(a) Paramagnetic substance (d) (6, –1 + 3j, 0, –1 –3j)
(b) Diamagnetic substance 70. Find h-parameter of a transformer with turns
(c) Ferromagnetic substance ratio n:1 ______.
(d) Ferrimagnetic substance n 0 
n 0
61. Fourier transform of sgn(t) is (a)   (b)  
0 1  n 0
jπ  n 
(a) jπω (b)
ω  1
 0 n 0 − 
2 2ω (c)   (d)  n
(c) (d)
−n 0   
jω jω  n 0 
Practice Set-1 6 YCT
71. Which one of the following is NOT correct 78. In a OPAMP differential mode gain is 20,000
(symbols have their usual meaning)? CMRR is 40dB common mode gain is
∂B (a) 200 (b) 0
(a) ∇ × E = −
∂t (c) 300 (d) 400
∂E 79. A vibration galvanometer is tunded:
(b) ∇ × H = J + (a) By changing its damping constant
∂t
(b) By attaching weight to the vibrating coil
(c) ∇.D = ρv (c) By changing the length and tension of
(d) ∇.B = 0 vibrating coil
72. Which one of the following statements is (d) All of the above
correct? 80. Which of the following flip-flop cannot be
In a ratio detector, converted to D-type (delay) flip-flop
(a) linearity is worse than that of a phase (a) S–R flip-flop
discriminator (b) J–K flip-flop
(b) stabilization is provided against signal (c) Master slave flip–flop
strength variations
(d) None of the above
(c) the output is twice of that obtainable from a
similar phase discriminator 81. For the circuit in figure, identify the Boolean
(d) the circuit is same as that in a discriminator, function implemented
except that the diode connections are reversed
73. Modulation index in an FM signal
(a) Varies inversely as the frequency deviation
(b) Varies directly as the frequency deviation and
inversely as the modulating frequency
(c) Varies directly as the modulating frequency
(d) none of these
74. For an antenna, Radiation Intensity is defined
as
(a) the time-averaged power per unit solid angle
(b) the peak radiated power per unit solid angle
(a) y = ( A + B + C ) D
(c) the peak radiated power per unit area
(d) the time-averaged radiated power per unit area (b) y = A.B.C + D
75. The time interval between the time at which a
(c) y = ABC + D
read/write command is given to the memory
and the time when next such instruction can be (d) y = (A + B + C) D
issued to the memory is called: 82. The characteristics impedance of quarter wave
(a) Access time (b) Cycle time transformer with load and input impedances
(c) Write time (d) Seek time given by 30 and 75 respectively is-
76. Manganin, an allow of copper and manganese, (a) 47.43
is used in (b) 37.34
(a) Soldering material (b) Heating elements (c) 73.23
(c) Ballast resistors (d) Standard resistances (d) 67.45
77. The field configuration in two different view of 83. A DSB-SC signal can be demodulated using:
waves propagating in a rectangular waveguide,
(a) a synchronous detector
as shown in the given figure represents the
mode (b) a phase shift discriminator
(c) a low pass filter
(d) an envelope detector
84. Conveniently information I(x) is expressed as:
(a) (–) log10 p(x) Hartleys
(b) log10 p(x) Hartleys
(c) log2 p(x) Hartleys
(a) TM11 (b) TE11 1
(d) 2 log10 Hartleys
(c) TE21 (d) TE10 p(x)
Practice Set-1 7 YCT
85. The uplink and downlink frequencies are made 93. In optical communication, the maximum angle
different in satellite links in order to in which external light rays may strike the
(a) reduce transmitter power air/glass interface and still propagate down the
(b) increase the isolation between transmitter and fiber is called as
receiver (a) critical angle
(c) reduce antenna size (b) numerical aperture
(d) increase bandwidth (c) angle of refraction
86. What is the address space of 8086 CPU? (d) acceptance angle
(a) One megabyte (b) 256 kilobyte 94. The sound signal, in a T.V. broadcast, is
(c) 1K Megabyte (d) 64 Kilobytes modulated in
87. A turnstile junction is a (a) AM
(a) Three-port junction (b) Four-port junction (b) VSB
(c) Five-port junction (d) Six-port junction
(c) FM
88. Klystron operation is based on the principle of
(a) Velocity modulation (d) SSB
(b) Amplitude modulation 95. Which option represents the correct full form
(c) Frequency modulation of FPGA?
(d) Phase modulation (a) Field programmable gate array
89. Match List-I (Type of N-bit ADC) with List-II (b) Field programmable generating array
(Characteristics) and select the correct answer (c) Finite programmable gate array
using the codes given below the lists: (d) Finite programmable gate assessment
List-I List-II 96. The current, i(t), through a 10Ω resistor in
A. Flash 1. Integrating series with an inductance, is given by
Converter Type i(t) =3 + 4 sin(100t + 450) + 4 sin(300 t + 600)
amperes the RMS value of the current and the
B. Successive 2. Fastest
power dissipated in the circuit are :
Approximation converter
C. Counter 3. Maximum (a) 41A 410 W, respectively
ramp conversion (b) 35A , 350 W, respectively
time=N bits (c) 5A, 250 W, respectively
D. Dual slope 4. Uses a DAC in (d) 11A, 1210W, respectively
its feedback 97. UNIX is a ______________
path (a) Real -time operating system
Codes: (b) Single-user operating system
A B C D A B C D (c) Multi-tasking operating system
(a) 1 4 3 2 (b) 1 3 4 2 (d) Distributed operating system
(c) 2 4 3 1 (d) 2 3 4 1
98. OTDR is the acronym for:
90. What is the addition of the binary numbers
(a) Optical time domain reflectometry
11011011010 and 010100101?
(b) Optical transmission and detection ratio
(a) 0111001000
(b) 1100110110 (c) Optical time deflection region
(c) 11101111111 (d) Optimum transmission and detection ratio.
(d) 10011010011 99. Inverters find applications in
91. A communication channel with Additive white (a) UPS
Gaussian Noise, has a bandwidth of 4 kHz and (b) DC drives
SNR of 31 dB. Its channel capacity is (c) HVAC transmission
(a) 1.6 kbps (d) rectifiers
(b) 20 kbps 100. The intersection of asymptotes of root-loci of a
(c) 32 kbps system with open-loop transfer function
(d) 256 kbps K
G(s)H(s) =
92. Frequency shift keying is used mostly in s(s + 1)(s + 3)
(a) radio transmission (a) 1.44
(b) telegraphy (b) 1.33
(c) telephony (c) – 1.44
(d) none of these (d) – 1.33
Practice Set-1 8 YCT
 Answer Key
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (d)
11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (b) 25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (b) 30. (c)
31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (c) 36. (d) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (b) 44. (a) 45. (b) 46. (b) 47. (d) 48. (a) 49. (d) 50. (a)
51. (a) 52. (b) 53.(c) 54. (d) 55. (c) 56. (b) 57. (c) 58. (b) 59. (d) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (d) 65. (b) 66. (d) 67. (b) 68.(a) 69. (d) 70.(c)
71. (b) 72. (a) 73. (b) 74. (a) 75. (a) 76. (d) 77. (c) 78. (a) 79. (c) 80. (d)
81. (a) 82. (a) 83. (a) 84. (a) 85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (c) 88. (a) 89. (d) 90. (c)
91. (b) 92. (b) 93. (d) 94. (c) 95. (a) 96. (c) 97. (c) 98. (a) 99. (a) 100. (d)

Solution
1. (b) Parameter Half Centre Bridge
There are 4 valence electrons in silicon while 3 valence wave wave
electrons in boron. When silicon is doped with boron, Average voltage Vm 2Vm 2Vm
the three electrons of boron bonded with the three
electrons of silicon and one valence electron of silicon π π π
remains free. To bond this one free electron of silicon RMS voltage Vm Vm Vm
the neighbouring silicon atom is taken thus a hole is 2 2 2
created there i.e. the deficiency of one electron is called
PIV Vm 2Vm Vm
as positive hole and this extra positive hole is called as
p-type extrinsic semiconductor. No. of diode 1 2 4
2. (b) 3. (a)
A land line tele-metering system in suitable for low
distance. Hence land line tele-metering system is
suitable for distance 1km only.
4. (d)
BCD code at decimal number is
1 5
00010101
Peak inverse voltage :- It is a voltage across the diode BCD code are in 4 bit
when it is reversed biased. 5. (a)
for +ve half cycle. One form of NMOS circuit logic that minimizes power
D1 → F.B. dissipation and maximizes device density is called Pass
D 2 → R.B. transistor logic (PTL). The basic element of pass
networks is MOS transistors with signals provided to
Apply KVL in loop-1
gate as variable and source as a 'pass variable' and it
V0 = Vm ...........(i) passes logic value from input to output when device is
on and goes to high impedance state in DFF stock.
6. (a)
A chopper is a high speed on/off semiconductor switch.
Chopper is a static device that converts fixed D.C input
voltage to a variable D.C output voltage directly.
7. (b)
Now, apply KVL in loop-2 2 − φ induction motor is used in servo application and
V2 = Vm + V0 .......... (ii) low power rating devices. The phase angle between two
Putting the value of V0 from equation (i) in equation starter winding is 900 and the angular phase difference
between each phase winding of a three-phase induction
(ii) V2 = Vm + Vm V2 = 2Vm motor is 120º.

Practice Set-1 9 YCT

8. (a) 15. (d)
If x(t) = x(t+T) A solar cell is based on the principle of photo voltaic
Then x(t) is periodic signal with time period T. effect. A solar cell is an effective source of energy in
example → sint, cost. modern day. The photovoltaic effect is the production
of electricity by a material when it is exposed to the
9. (b)
light.
Given,
16. (c)
x1 = 5cos ( 2000πt ) Atomic packing factor of following crystal systems -
2πf m 1 t = 2000πt Sum of atomic
volume in a unit cell
f m1 = 1000Hz Atomic packing factor =
Volume of a unit cell
x2 = 2 cos ( 2000πt ) cos(3000πt) Properties Crystal system
0.34 Diamond cube (DC)
x2 = cos 5000πt + cos ( −1000πt )
0.52 Simple cube (SC)
x 2 = cos 5000πt + cos1000πt 0.68 Body centered cube (BCC)
2πf m2 t = 5000πt 0.74 Face centered cube (FCC)
f m2 = 2500Hz 17. (b)
4 1
Now, Given A =  
1 4
The minimum sampling rate
Characteristic equation for 2×2 matrix is
(
= 2 × max f m1 , f m2 ) λ − ( trA ) + | A |= 0
= 2 × max (1000, 2500 ) λ2 − 8λ + 15 = 0
= 2×2500 = 5000 Hz = 5kHz i.e. ( λ − 3 )( λ − 5 ) = 0
10. (d) hence eigen values are 3 and 5.
Given that, 18. (b)
ω0 = 1kHz, Q = 100 When microwave signals follow the curvature of earth,
1 L 1 this is known as ducting. The advantage of ducting are
Q= → Q∝ increased radar range, being able to sample storms further
R C R
from radar, and being able to sample lower elevations
After doubling R = 2R, L = 2L, C = 2C within storms further from radar.
1 2L 1 L 19. (d)
QD = =
2R 2C 2R C −dp
• Hole diffusion current ∝
Q 100 dx
QD = =
2 2 • Hole drift current ∝ p.E
QD = 50 • Electron drift current ∝ n.E
11. (a) dn
• Electron diffusion current ∝
Shot noise - It arises in electronic devices (Such as dx
diode and transistor) because of the discrete nature of 20. (a)
current flow in the devices. A diode in a reverse bias region, known as ‘transition
12. (b) capacitance’ while in forward bias region known as
TCP adjusts traffic rate based on congestion. ‘diffusion capacitance’.
Diffusion capacitance (CD)- Diffusion capacitance is
So, TCP traffic is elastic traffic.
due to the transfer of minority carriers during the
13. (c) forward bias.
8085 microprocessor has 16 bit address ranging from Transition capacitance (CT)- When a p-n junction is in
A15 – A8 and AD7 – AD0. Address bus is unidirectional. reverse bias then the depletion region acts like a
14. (d) insulator.
SSB-SC (Single side band-suppressed carrier) Note: CD>CT i.e. diffusion capacitance is greater than
modulation scheme is most bandwidth efficient. transition capacitance.
Practice Set-1 10 YCT
21. (b) 28. (b)
The configuration of cascode amplifier = CE –CB The holding current in SCR, is the current which hold
The configuration of cascade amplifier = CE – CC the conduction state of SCR. It is less than the latching
current.
The configuration of Darlington pair = CC – CC
IL ≃ 2IH
• The cascode connection is used to obtain large
output Impedance. 29. (b)
• Darlington connection used to obtain high current Effects of negative feedback in a control system are-
gain. 1. Negative feedback reduces gain.
• The Voltage gain of Amplifier can be increased by  G (s) 
gain = 
using cascading connection of individual stages.  1 + G (s) H (s) 
22. (c) 2. Negative feedback reduces distortion, noise,
Given, N = 3 sensitivity to parameter variation as well as
fL of cascaded amplifier improves bandwidth.
fL 120 3. Gain × Bandwidth = constant. So, gain reduces and
= = Bandwidth increases.
2 −1
1/ N
21/ 3 − 1 4. 30. (c)
120 5. The trigonometric fourier series of an even function
= = 235.37 Hz
0.5098 of time does not have sine terms.
23. (b) 6. The trigonometric fourier series of an even function
Absolute error (δA) = Am–At of time contains only d.c. term and cosine term.
Where Am = measured value 31. (b)
At = true value.
Relative static error is defined as the ratio of absolute
static error to the true value of the quantity under
measurement.
δA
εr =
At R AB = 15 10 + 6 4
24. (b)
R AB = 6 + 2.4
Eddy current damping- This method if damping is
based on the principle that when a conducting, non- R AB = 8.4Ω
magnetic material is moved in a magnetic fields an 32. (b)
e.m.f. is induced in it which causes currents called the We know that,
eddy currents. Due to these eddy currents, a force exists RMS value Max.value
between them and the field. Form factor×Peak factor = ×
Avg.value RMS value
25. (a)
Max.value
=
Avg.value
33. (b)
Given that,
26. (c) P = 2i − 3j
O/p = XY + X (X + Z) + Y(X + Z) Q = −3i + 4j − 2k
= XY + X + XZ + XY + YZ
For equilibrium -
= X ( 1 + Y + Z + Y) + YZ
= X + YZ P+Q+R = 0
2i − 3j − 3i + 4 j − 2k + R = 0

R = i − j + 2k
34. (a)
Minimum two gate required
Given that -
27. (a) mean value = 5
A power diode is a type of diode that is commonly used
Variance = (mean)
in power electronics circuits, due to high ratings. To
control the temperature rise heat sinks are used. variance = 5

Practice Set-1 11 YCT

35. (c) 44. (a)
A random process is said to be ergodic if the time A FET is a better chopper than a BJT because it has
average of the process tend to the appropriate ensemble lower offset voltage.
average. Because of offset voltage, the output is not zero even
36. (d) when the input is zero it is therefore considered as one
of problems when dealing with transistors.
Advantage of 2G-
45. (b)
• Data speed of upto 64 kbps
−g m rd R D
• Use of digital signals instead of analog AV =
rd (1 + R D rd )
• New services such as SMS and MMS
µ = g m rd
• Provide better quality voice calls
• It used a bandwidth of 30 to 200 kHz g m → mutual conductance
37. (a) R D → Load Resistance at drain.
CMA, RLC, RRC are implicit addressing mode. The AV = gmR D
implicit addressing mode does not specify an effective
address explicity for either the destination or the source 46. (b)
or both sometimes. P 
Gain in dB = 10 log  2 
38. (a)  P1 
Cache is the fastest memory out of given options. Cache
 16 
is costly but high speed (About 4 times higher speed G = 10 log  
than DRAM) memory. It is small in size. 8
39. (b) G = 10 log 2
G = 10 × 0.3010
Pe ∝ Bmax
2
.t 2 .f 2 .V watt
G = 3.01 dB
Ph ∝ B1.6
max .f .V watt 47. (d)
Above statement eddy current loss is proportional to the Impedance of Owen bridge–
square of the frequency. 1
Z1 =
40. (a) jωCb
The electrical susceptibility and relative permittivity are 1
Z2 = R c +
related as χ =ε r − 1 jωCc
41. (b) Z3 = Ra
Heat equation is given by- Z4 = Rx + jωLx
∂u ∂2u at balance condition
=k 2 Z1 Z4 = Z2 Z3
∂t ∂x
u t = k.u xx  1   1 
⇒   ( R x + jωL x ) =  R c +  Ra
42. (b)  jωCb   jωCc 
The angle of incidence in equal to the angle of ⇒ Rx Cc + jωLx Cc = jωCc Rc Ra Cb + Ra Cb
reflection. Having comparison of real and imaginary terms-
Cb
R x = Ra and L x = R a R cC b
Cc
48. (a)

43. (b) as we know that

In BJT on base to collector region apply reverse bias
mode then base to collector junction is increased and → A+ B+C
effective base width decreases. The phenomenon known
as early effect.
A.B.C = A. B. C
Practice Set-1 12 YCT
49. (d) 56. (b)
Subtractor are designed using adder ICs. Because the A conventional telephone is not a wireless technology.
substractor can be designed using the same approach as It is largely a means of analog communication which
an adder. As with an adder in the general case of means that the conversation your have over the phone is
calculation on multi-bit number. not recorded at any point the sound is transferred from
50. (a) one point to another in an analog circuit.
If a zero is added in a forward path of a second-order 57. (c)
system rise time will decrease . TRAP also called RST4.5
1 Then, ISR → ( 4.5 ) × 8 = ( 36 )10 → ( 24 )H = ( 0024 )H
Speed ∝ ∝ Bandwidth
Rise time 58. (b)
51. (a) A Dynamic RAM consists of 1 transistor and 1
capacitor.
Let the transfer function-
59. (d)
H(s) =K/s
no load − full load
So, it impulse response R(s) = 1 Voltage regulation =
full load
Y(s) = K/s
60 − 56
take inverse laplace- = × 100
56
y(t) = K u(t)
% V. R. = 7.1 %
Hence the impulse response is constant 60. (b)
52. (b) Mettalic copper is an example of Diamagnetic material.
Given Laplace transform of f(t) = F(s) Another example of diamagnetic material gold (Au),
antimony, Silver, lead, hydrogen and super conductor.
By applying time shifting property, we get →
61. (c)
f ( t − T ) = F ( s ) e − sT 1 t >0

53.(c) sgn ( t ) =  0 t =0
Superposition theorem becomes important if the circuit 
has sources operating at different frequencies. −1 t<0
Thevenin's and Norton's theorem are applicable only for It is not absolutely integrable so it must be defined as
single frequency source. limiting case of exponential function i.e.
54. (d) X ( t ) = sgn ( t ) = lim e − at u ( t ) − eat u ( − t ) 
a →0
We know that-
Taking fourier transform-
∇.D = ρv
 1 1 
X(ω) = lim  −
∇.(ε E) = ρv a → 0 a + jω
 a − jω 
ρv  a − jω − a − jω 
∇. E = = lim  
ε0  a −jω
a →0 2 2 2

ρ −2 jω
Hence, ∇.E = = lim
∈0 a →0 a 2 + ω2
55. (c) −2 j ω
=
We know that- ω2
f si = fs + 2IF −2 j
X(ω) =
Where, ω
fsi – image frequency 2
X(ω) =
fs – signal frequency jω
IF – Intermediate frequency 62. (a)
fsi =1200+2×455 = 1200 +910 A rectangular Co-axial cable can support only TEM
f si = 2110 kHz mode because it has quasi state. It support Microstrip
line, two wire transmission line.
Practice Set-1 13 YCT
63. (a) 69. (d)
Ton = 0.693 (RA+RB).C Given, discrete time sequence = (1,0,2,3)
Toff = 0.693 (RB.C) For 4-point DFT of sequence -
Total time (T0) = Ton +Toff
1 1 1 1  1   (1 + 2 + 3)   6 
= 0.693 (RA+2RB). C 1 − j −1 j   0   1 − 2 + 3j   −1 + 3j
given RA = 10k, RB = 10k, C = 10µF     = ( ) 
= 
1 −1 1 −1  2   (1 + 2 − 3)   0 
To = 0.693 (10k +2 ×10k) ×10×10–6       
= 0.693 ×30 ×103 ×10 ×10–6 1 j −1 − j  3  (1 − 2 − 3j)   −1 − 3j
T0 = 0.207 s ∴ 4 point DFT is (6, –1 + 3j, 0, –1 –3j)
64. (d) 70. (c)
Let us consider a two port network of a transformer is -

From above figure-

V1 = nV2
V1 = 0I1 + nV2 ..........(i)
In Darlington pair the output of the first amplifier is and
connected to the input of the second amplifier collector
I2 = –nI1
of both transistor is common in this circuit.
I2 = –nI1 + 0V2 ............(ii)
The Darlington pair provide high input impedance and
low output impedance so it is used for impedance for h- parameter -
matching. V1 = h11 I1 + h12V2 ...............(iii)
65. (b) I2 = h21I1 + h22V2 ..............(iv)
In sample and hold circuit, op-amp is connected as unity by comparing equation (i) with (iii) & equation (ii) with
gain non-inverting voltage amplifier. (iv) we get
66. (d)  h11 h12   0 n 
The pair of the instrument have maximum and  = 
minimum resistance respectively millivoltmeter and  h 21 h 22   −n 0 
milli ammeter 71. (b)
Millivoltmeter resistance > voltmeter resistance ∂B
Milli ammeter resistance < ammeter resistance (i) ∇ × E = − - Faraday's Law
∂t
67. (b)
∂D
The "T" flip-flop is toggled when the set and reset (ii) ∇ × H = J + - Ampere's Circuital Law
inputs alternatively changed by the incoming trigger. ∂t
(iii) ∇.D = ρv - Gauss's Law
Qn T Q n +1
0 0 0 (iv) ∇.B = 0 - Non isolated magnetic charge
0 1 1 72. (a)
In a ratio detector, Linearity is worse than that of a
1 0 1
phase discriminator.
1 1 0
73. (b)
Application of T-flip-flop- The FM modulation index is equal to the ratio of
1. It is used in counter design. frequency deviation to the modulating frequency.
2. These flip flops are used for constructing binary. Frequency deviation ∆f
3. They are used in frequency divider and shift β= =
Modulation frequency f m
registers.
68. (a) 74. (a)
A receiver has poor IF selectivity. It will therefore also Radiation intensity is defined as the time-averaged
have poor blocking. power per unit solid angle.

Practice Set-1 14 YCT

75. (a)
The time between the issue of a read signal and
completion of it is called memory access time.
76. (d)
Manganin is an alloy of typically 86% copper, 12%
manganese and 2% nickel. It is virtually almost zero
temperature coefficient of resistance, that's why it's
used in potentiometer. It is less sensitive to temperature
variations. These are the reasons manganin is used as 82. (a)
standard resistances.
Given that,
77. (c)
Zin = 75Ω, ZL= 30 Ω
Two circle in X axis and one circle in Y axis.
m=2 n=1 ∴ Characteristic impedance
TE21 mode in a rectangular wave guide. Z0 = Zin × ZL
78. (a)
Z0 = 75 × 30
Given that
A d = 20000 Z0 = 47.43Ω
83. (a)
CMRR = 40dB
DSB-SC signal Can be demodulated using a
Ad synchronous detector.
CMRR = 20log
Ac 84. (a)
20000 Information associated with the event is inversely
40 = 20log
Ac proportional to the probability of occurrence
information constrained in a signal will be high if its
20000
Ac = probability of occurrence will be less.
100
 1 
A c = 200 I = log10   Hartleys
 p(x) 
79. (c)
I = ( − ) log10 [ P(x)] Hartleys
Vibration Galvanometers are widely used as null-point
detectors in a.c. bridges. 85. (b)
A vibration galvanometer tuned The uplink and downlink frequencies are made different
1. by changing the length of suspension in satellite links in order to increase the isolation
between transmitter and reciever.
2. by adjusting tension in the suspension
80. (d) 86. (a)
• SR, JK and T flip can be converted by D flip-flop. Identity of the 8086, A 20-bit external address bus
Above all flip flop can be observe by execution table. provide 1 MB physical address space.
• Master slave flip flop is also implemented using D flip Number of address line is 8086 = 20
flop. Address space : 220 = 1 Megabyte.
• So all flip-flop converted by excitation table. 87. (c)
• Hence, the option (d) is correct. Turnstile junction is a five- port junction widely used in
81. (a) high-capacity telecommunication system.
88. (a)
Klystron is a microwave device that works on principle
of velocity modulation in addition to current
modulation. Reflex klystron is also known as a 'sultan'
klystron. It allow the passage of electron beam through
a single resonant cavity.
89. (d)
• Flash converter is the fastest converter among all, it is
also known as parallel comparator type ADC.

Practice Set-1 15 YCT

• Successive Approximation type converter has 95. (a)
maximum conversion time n × TCLK so the conversion FPGA stands for field programmable gate array which
time depends only upon the number of bits. is an IC that can be programmed to perform a
• Counter ramp ADC has maximum conversion time customized operation for a specific application. They
(2n–1) TCLK. have thousands of gates.
It uses a DAC in its feedback path. 96. (c)
• Dual slope ADC used a integrator so it is used i(t) =3 + 4 sin (100t + 450) + 4 sin (300 t + 600) RMS
integration type ADC, it is slowest ADC. it is most value of the current
accurate ADC therefore mostly used in digital
voltmeter.
90. (c)
IRMS = 32 +
2
(
1 2
)
4 + 42 = 5Amp

1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 If this current passing through a resistance of 10Ω in

+0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 series with an inductance then power dissipated will be:
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 2RMS × R = 25×10 = 250 W.
91. (b) 97. (c)
Given, Unix is a multi-user, multi-tasking operating system.
B = 4 KHz Multiple users may have multiple tasks running
SNR = 31 simultaneously. This is very different from PC
operating system such as MS-DOS or MS-Windows
Channel capacity (C) = B log2 (1 + SNR)
(Which allows multiple tasks to be carried out
= 4 × 103 log2 (1 + 31) simultaneously but not multiple users.)
= 20 × 103 bps 98. (a)
= 20 kbps An optical time-domain reflectometer (OTDR) is an
92. (b) optoelectronic instrument used to characterize an
FSK (Frequency Shift Keying)- optical fiber. An OTDR is the optical equivalent of an
• Binary 1 is represented high frequency carrier signal electronic time domain reflectometer.
and binary 0 is represent with low frequency carrier 99. (a)
signal. An uninterruptible power supply is an electrical
• FSK is used in voice frequency telegraph apparatus that provides emergency power to a load
when the input power source or main power tails.
• FSK is a frequency modulation scheme in which
digital information is transmitted through discrete Inverters find applications in UPS.
frequency changes a carrier signal. 100. (d)
93. (d) Given that,
The maximum angle in which external light rays may K
strike the air/glass interface and still propagate down the G(s) H(s) =
s (s + 1) (s + 3)
fiber it is the figure of merit used measure the
magnitude of the acceptance angle. No open loop zero
Three open loop poles s = 0 , –1 , –3
The intersection point of asymptotes on real axis is
known as centroid of the system.
centroid (σ)
Where, α = Acceptance angle.

Numerical Apperture = NA = sinα = n −n

2 2 =
∑ ( open loop poles ) ∑ ( open loop zeros )
real part of − real part of

1 2 P−Z
94. (c)
(−1 − 3 − 0) − (0)
For TV Broadcasting we use frequency modulation σ= = −4 / 3
3−0
(FM) for Audio signal and Amplitude modulation (AM)
for video transmission. σ = –1.33
Practice Set-1 16 YCT
 PRACTICE SET - 2
1. A semiconductor material is doped with donor 10. A series RLC circuit resonates at 1000 kHz. At
type impurities with 1015 atoms/cm3. If the frequency of 995 kHz, the circuit impedance is
intrinsic carrier concentration is 1010 cm–3, then (a) Resistive (b) minimum
the concentration of holes in the doped (c) Inductive (d) capacitive
semiconductors in equilibrium (in cm–3) will be: 11. White noise is characterized by-
(a) 108 (b) 105 (a) Gaussian probability density function
10
(c) 10 (d) 1012
η
2. The efficiency of half-bridge rectifier under (b) Power spectral density δ (f )
best condition is: 2
(a) 25.5% (b) 35% (c) Autocorrelation function depends
(c) 40.6% (d) 81.2% η
(d) Autocorrelation δ ( τ)
3. The quantization noise depends on 2
(a) Sampling rate 12. Telephone traffic is specified in terms of
(b) Number of quantization levels (a) Average waiting time (b) Peak waiting time
(c) Signal power (c) Grade of service (d) Erlangs
(d) None of these 13. A register of microprocessor which keeps track
4. What is (82)10 in base 5? of the execution of a program and which
(a) (310)5 (b) (311)5 contains the memory address of the next
(c) (312)5 (d) (313)5 instruction to be executed is called
5. When there is no clock signal applied to CMOS (a) Index address register
logic circuits, they are referred to as (b) Memory address register
(a) complex CMOS logic circuits (c) Program counter
(b) static CMOS logic circuits (d) Instruction register
(c) NMOS transmission gates 14. Identify the modulation schemes for the shown
(d) random PMOS logic circuits signal constellation diagram
6. Which of the following is control element in
Silicon Controlled Resistor (SCR)?
(a) Gate
(b) Anode
(c) Cathode
(d) Source (a) ASK (b) MSK
7. The most commonly used input signal (s) in (c) FSK (d) QAM
control system is/are
15. Which of the following is not classified as a
(a) Step function
photoconductive device?
(b) Ramp or velocity function (a) PIN photo diode
(c) Accelerating function (b) A photo transistor
(d) All of the above (c) A light dependent register
8. If a signal f(t) has energy E, the energy of the (d) A photo voltaic cell
signal f(2t) is equal to 16. The co-ordination number of a simple cubic
E structure is
(a) E (b)
2 (a) 2 (b) 4
(c) 2E (d) 4E (c) 6 (d) 8
9. The quantization of a PCM system depends on 17. The order of a matrix is defined as
(a) Number of quantization levels (a) No. of rows-No. of columns
(b) Step-size (b) No. of rows× No. of columns
(c) Both step-size and number of quantization levels (c) No. of rows + No. of columns
(d) Sampling rate (d) No. of rows/No. of columns
Practice Set-2 17 YCT
18. What is the frequency range of VHF 25. Simplify the following Boolean expression
electromagnetic waves? using the De Morgan’s theorem:
(a) 30-300 kHz
F(A,B,C,D,E,F) = ( A + B ) CD + (E + F)
(b) 30-3000 kHz
(c) 30-300 MHz (a) ( A + B + C) ( D + E + F)
(d) 30-3000 MHz
19. Match List-I (Type of Conductor) with List-II (b) AB + CD + EF
(Position of Fermi Level) and select the correct (c) ( AB + C + D) E F
answer using the codes given below the lists:
List-I List-II (d) ABC + DEF
A. n-type semiconductor 1. Middle of band 26. In Boolean Algebra, A+A+A+......+A is the
gap same as :
B. p-type semiconductor 2. Above (a) Zero (b) A
conduction band (c) nA (d) An
C. Intrinsic 3. Near but below 27. SCR can be used in
semiconductor conduction band (a) oscillator
D. Degenerate n-type 4. Near but above (b) regulator
semiconductor valence band (c) amplifier
Codes: (d) Light dimming
A B C D 28. Which of the following devices does not have
(a) 1 2 3 4 negative resistance characteristics
(b) 3 4 1 2 (a) UJT (b) Tunnel diode
(c) 1 4 3 2 (c) SCR (d) FET
(d) 3 2 1 4 29. Feedback control system are basically
20. The voltage required to forward bias a P-N (a) Low pass filters
junction-based on silicon is : (b) High pass filters
(a) 0.15V (c) Band pass filters
(b) 0.32V (d) Band stop filters
(c) 0.55V 30. Any waveform can be expressed in Fourier
(d) 0.70V series if
21. The voltage gain of amplifier stage is lowest in (a) Sampling condition are satisfied
(a) CB (b) Dirichlet's conditions are satisfied
(b) CE (c) Maxwell's conditions are satisfied
(c) CC (d) None of the above condition is required to be
(d) Same in all configurations satisfied
31. Which one of the following represents a single
22. The hybrid-pi model is used for:
element such as a voltage source or a resistor?
(a) analysis of BJT for feedback (a) Branch (b) Node
(b) analysis of BJT for large signal (c) Loop (d) Circuit
(c) analysis of BJT at low frequency 32. Find the Resistance value showing by graph.
(d) analysis of BJT at high frequency
23. Subtracting 437±4 from 462±4 would yield a
result with percentage error of
(a) ±4%
(b) ±16%
(c) ±8%
(d) ±32%
24. Swamping resistor is connected with PMMC
meter in order to: (a) 0.5Ω
(a) Obtain large deflecting torque
(b) 2Ω
(b) Reduce the size of the meter
(c) 0.25Ω
(c) Minimize the effect of stray magnetic fields
(d) 4Ω
(d) Minimize the effect of temperature variation
Practice Set-2 18 YCT
33. Poisson's equation for inhomogeneous medium 42. In microwave system, waveguides have the
is : advantages of
(a) ∇2V = –ρ (b) ∇.(∇V) = –ρ (a) High power-handling capability and low loss
(c) ∇2(V) = –ρ (d) None of these (b) Thin dielectric substrate
34. 13 dBm is equivalent to (c) Low power handling and adequate stability
(d) Positive phase shift
(a) 2 mW (b) 20 W
43.
(c) 20 mW (d) 2 MW
35. The auto-correlation function of an ergodic
random process is given by :
T
1
x ( t ) x ( t − τ ) dt
2T −∫T
(a) lim t →∞ =

T
2 What does the above figure represents
x ( t ) x ( t − τ ) dt
T ∫0
(b) lim t →∞ = (a) Output configuration of common emitter
T
(b) Input configuration of common base
1
x ( t ) x ( t − τ ) dt
2T ∫0
(c) lim t →∞ = (c) Output configuration of common base
(d) Input configuration of common emitter
T
2 44. MOSFET can be used as
x ( t ) x ( t − τ ) dt
T −∫T
(d) lim t →∞ =
(a) Current controlled capacitor
(b) Voltage controlled capacitor
36. A computer modem's rating of 56 K refers to
its− (c) Current controlled inductor
(a) Transmission capacity (d) Voltage controlled inductor
(b) Transmission speed 45. Consider the following statement :
(c) Memory size In JFET amplifiers, high frequency response
can be improved by using peaking circuits
(d) Modem size
containing inductors
37. The ______ holds intermediate results obtained
1. in series with drain resistance RD.
during program processing.
2. in series with the coupling capacitance
(a) Register (b) ALU
3. as a feedback element between drain and
(c) Motherboard (d) Main memory
gate?
38. If the memory chip size is 256 × 1 bits, then the
Which of the statement given above are
number of chips required to make up 1 KB
correct?
(1024) bytes of memory is
(a) 1 and 2
(a) 32 (b) 24 (c) 12 (d) 8
(b) 2 and 3
39. In open delta, configuration capacity of
transformer I reduced to: (c) 1 and 3
(a) 57.7 % (b) 50% (d) 1, 2 and 3
(c) 65% (d) 86.6% 46. A particular amplifier circuit used for
frequency doubling is
40. The relation between three vectors E, D, p and
(a) Push-push
is
(b) Push-pull
(a) D =ε0 E + P (b) D =ε0 ( E + P ) (c) Pull-push
E (d) Pull-pull
(c) D=ε0 P + E (d) D = +P
ε0 47. Match List-I (Bridge) with List-II (Quantity)
41. If and select the correct answer using the code
given below the lists:
x y
u = sin -1 + tan -1 List-I List-II
y x
∂ ∂

∂ ∂

A. Wheatstone bridge 1. Capacitance

u u B. Wien bridge 2. Very low
then x +y will be
x y resistance
(a) 1 (b) tan u C. Kelvin double bridge 3. Resistance
(c) 0 (d) sin u D. Schering bridge 4. Frequency
Practice Set-2 19 YCT
 Codes: 59. If the load on a dc shunt motor is increased, its
A B C D speed decreases primarily due to
(a) 3 4 2 1 (a) increase in its flux
(b) decrease in back emf
(b) 2 1 3 4
(c) increase in armature current
(c) 3 1 2 4 (d) decrease in brush drop
(d) 2 4 3 1 60. Ferrites are materials.
48. 7400 IC means (indicate) _____. (a) Paramagnetic (b) Diamagnetic
(a) 2-input NAND (b) 2-input AND (c) Ferromagnetic (d) Non magnetic
(c) 2-inpu OR (d) 2-inpu NOR 61. The Fourier transform of a signal x(t) exists
49. Digital system has been divided by when
(a) Combinational and Sequential ∞ ∞

(b) Synchronous and asynchronous

(a) ∫
−∞
f (t)dt = ∞ (b) ∫
−∞
f (t)dt < ∞
∞ ∞
(c) High level logic and Low level logic (c) ∫ | f ( t ) | dt < ∞ (d) ∫ f (t)dt > ∞
−∞ −∞
(d) Sum of product and product of Sum
50. The bode plot is applicable to : 62. Which one of the following modes has the
highest cut-off wavelength in rectangular
(a) Minimum phase network waveguide?
(b) All phase network (a) TE10 (b) TE01
(c) Maximum phase network (c) TM01 (d) TM11
(d) None of the above 63. The process of extension of a single-crystal
51. The damping ratio of a series RLC circuit is surface by growing a film in such a way that
the added atoms form a continuation of the
R 2C 2L
(a) (b) single-crystal structure is called
2L R 2C (a) Ion implantation
R C 2 L (b) chemical vapour deposition
(c) (d) (c) Electroplating
2 L R C
(d) Epitaxy
52. Laplace transform of e–at f(t) is 64. The basic conditions for generating sinusoidal
(a) F (s)e–at (b) F (s – a) voltage in a feedback oscillator is (are)
F (s) (a) Total loop gain should be 1
(c) F (s + a) (d) +a
s (b) Total phase shift should be 360º
53. Superposition theorem is not applicable to (c) Both (a) and (b)
networks containing (d) None of these
(a) non-linear elements (b) transformers 65. The circuit shown below acts as a
(c) dependent source (d) linear elements
54. The divergence of the magnetic flux density B
is given as :
(a) ∇.B = 0 (b) ∇.B = D
(c) ∇.B = ρ/ε (d) ∇.B = E
55. The modulation index of an AM wave is (a) Summing Integrator
changed from 0 to 1. The transmitted power is (b) Summing Differentiator
(a) Unchanged (b) Halved (c) Antilogarithmic Amplifier
(c) Increased by 50% (d) Quadrupled (d) Logarithmic Amplifier
56. The ethernet protocol uses 66. Lissajous pattern can be used to determine
(a) CSMA/CA (b) SCPC (a) voltage amplitude (b) amplitude distortion
(c) CSMA/CD (d) Slotted ALOHA (c) voltage gain (d) phase shift
57. The number of hardware interrupts (which 67. A master-slave flip-flop has the characteristic
require an external signal to interrupt) present that
in an 8085 microprocessor are (a) change in the input immediately reflected in
(a) 1 (b) 4 the output
(b) change in the output occurs when the state of
(c) 5 (d) 13
the master is affected
58. Which of the following is an example of volatile (c) change in the output occurs when the state of
memory? the slave is affected
(a) ROM (b) RAM (d) both the master and the slave states are
(c) PROM (d) E2PROM affected at the same time
Practice Set-2 20 YCT
68. For 10-bit PCM system, the signal to 76. A resistance thermometer has a temperature
quantization noise ratio is 62dB. If the number coefficient of resistance 10–3 per degree and its
of bits is increased by 2, then the signal to resistance at 0ºC is 1.0Ω. At what temperature
quantization noise ratio will is its resistance 1.1Ω?
(a) increase by 6 dB (b) increase by 12 dB (a) 10ºC (b) 100ºC
(c) decrease by 6 dB (d) decrease by 12 dB (c) 120ºC (d) –10ºC
69. What is the convolution of two signals? 77. Which one of the following is the equivalent
x1 (n) = {1, - 1, 2} and x 2 (n) = {1, - 2, 3} circuit of aperture coupled lossy cavity ?
↑ ↑

(a) {1, −3,7, −7,6} (b) {1, − 3,7, −7,6}

↑ ↑

(c) {1, − 3,7,7,6} (d) {1,3,7, −7,6} (a)

↑ ↑

70. All the three inductors are perfectly coupled as

shown below, the value of total inductance (in
Henry) across the terminal AB is

(b)

(a) 46 (b) 38
(c) 12 (d) 10
71. When a material is placed within a magnetic (c)
field, the magnetic forces of the material’s
electrons will be affected. This effect is known
as the ________of magnetic induction
(a) Stokes theorem
(b) Newton’s law
(d)
(c) Ferro electro-magnetic theorem
(d) Faraday’s law
72. Which one of the following is an indirect way of
generating FM? 78. Imax= 32pA, C= 6 µF, SR in µV/Sec?
(a) Reactance FET modulator (a) 5.33 (b) 5.33×103
3
(b) Varactor diode modulator (c) 1.9×10 (d) 1.9×109
(c) Armstrong modulator 79. Which of the following is NOT active
(d) Reactance tube modulator transducer?
73. In a typical frequency multiplier application (a) Thermoelectric transducer
using a PLL, a decade counter was inserted (b) Piezoelectric transducer
between the VCO output and the relevant (c) Hall-effect transducer
phase comparator input. If the input frequency (d) Electromagnetic transducer
is 10 kHz, the VCO output frequency would be 80. The state diagram depicts the truth table of
(a) 10 kHz (b) 100 kHz
(c) 1 kHz (d) 11 kHz
74. Which of the following antenna uses a number
a varying length parallel elements?
(a) Helical antenna
(b) Pyramidal Horn (a) Johnson counter (b) Up counter
(c) Corner reflection antenna (c) Ring counter (d) Ripple counter
(d) Yagi-Uda antenna 81. For Emitter-Coupled Logic (ECL), the
75. An I/O processor controls the flow of switching speed is very high because
information between (a) Negative logic is used
(a) Cache memory and I/O devices (b) The transistors are not saturated when they
(b) Main memory and I/O devices are conducting
(c) Two I/O devices (c) Multi-emitter transistors are used
(d) Cache and main memories (d) Of low fan-out

Practice Set-2 21 YCT

82. Poynting vector P = E × H has the unit 92. Quantization noise occurs in :
(a) Watts/metre2 (a) Pulse width modulation
(b) Watts/meter (b) Frequency division multiplexing
(c) Watts-metre (c) Time division multiplexing
(d) Watts-metre2 (d) Pulse code modulation
83. Which one of the following is used for the 93. A fibre-optic cable has the indices of refraction
detection of AM-DSB-SC signal? of core of 1.6 and of cladding of 1.4, For an
(a) Ratio detector angle of incidence 70º, the angle of return light
(b) Foster-Seeley discriminator ray will be
(c) Product demodulator (a) 35º (b) 61º
(d) Balanced-slope detector (c) 70º (d) 90º
84. In order to permit the selection of 1 out of 16 94. The audio frequency range is
equiprobable events, what is the number of bits (a) 5Hz–1KHz (b) 50Hz–20KHz
required? (c) 16Hz–20KHz (d) 0Hz–020KHz
(a) 8 (b) 4 95. A soft error is a
(c) log1016 (d) 2 (a) Regular-nondestructive event
85. For global communication, minimum number (b) Random-nondestructive event
of satellite used is (c) Random-destructive event
(a) 5 (b) 3 (d) Regular-destructive event
(c) 1 (d) 10 96. The average power consumed by the following
86. How many bits are used as conditional flags in circuit is
the flag register of 8086?
(a) 16 (b) 12
(c) 11 (d) 6
87. 3 port Circulator is
(a) Reciprocal, matched
(b) Non reciprocal, unmatched
(c) Non reciprocal, matched
(d) Reciprocal, unmatched Vrms = 20∠53.13°V
88. A cavity is a (a) 100 W (b) 110 W
(a) low-pass filter (c) 120 W (d) 160 W
(b) high-pass filter 97. 'FORTRAN' is a _________________
(c) band-pass filter (a) Low-level programming language
(d) band-stop filter (b) High-level programming language
89. The voltage resolution for n-stage ladder (c) Assembly language
network is given as (d) Machine language
V V 98. In data acquisition _______ block is used for
(a) REFn +1
(b) REF
2 2n frequency measurement.
V V (a) Analog output (b) Multiplexer
(c) REF (d) REF
2n −1 n −1 (c) Sample & Hold (d) Timer
90. Obtain the 16's complement of ABAB 99. The output voltage waveform of a three phase
(a) 5455 square wave inverter contains
(b) 5554 (a) Only even harmonics
(c) 5557 (b) Both even and odd harmonics
(d) 5655 (c) Only odd harmonics
91. Companding is used (d) Both triple harmonics
(a) To protect small signals in PCM for 100. Root Loci starts form
quantising distortion (a) Poles and ends on zeros
(b) to overcome quantized noise in PCM (b) Zeros and ends on poles
(c) To overcome impulse noise (c) Zeros and ends on infinity
(d) None of these (d) Poles and ends on infinity
Practice Set-2 22 YCT
 Answer Key
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (d)
11. (a) 12. (d) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20.(d)
21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (d) 24. (d) 25.(c) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (d) 29. (a) 30. (b)
31. (a) 32. (b) 33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (b) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (a) 40. (a)
41. (c) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (b) 45. (c) 46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (a) 49. (a) 50. (a)
51. (c) 52. (c) 53. (a) 54. (a) 55. (c) 56. (c) 57. (c) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (c)
61. (c) 62. (a) 63. (d) 64. (c) 65. (a) 66. (d) 67. (c) 68.(b) 69. (b) 70.(d)
71. (d) 72. (c) 73. (b) 74. (d) 75. (b) 76. (b) 77. (a) 78. (a) 79. (c) 80. (c)
81. (b) 82. (a) 83. (c) 84. (b) 85. (b) 86. (d) 87. (c) 88. (c) 89. (b) 90. (a)
91. (a) 92. (d) 93. (c) 94. (c) 95. (a) 96. (c) 97. (b) 98. (d) 99. (c) 100. (a)

Solution
1. (b) 6. (a)
Donor impurity (ND) = 1015atoms/cm3 Gate is a control element in SCR.
Intrinsic concentration (ni) = 1010cm–3 The gate is used to trigger the equipment into
NA = ? operation by the application of low voltage.
we know the mass action Law 7. (a)
ND×NA = (ni)2 The most commonly used input signal in control system
∴ 1015×NA = (1010)2 is step function.
1020 In step function, output always follows input.
∴ NA = = 105 cm −3
1015 Unit step signal:-
2. (c)
Parameters Half-wave Full-wave
Average Vm 2Vm
Voltage π π
RMS Voltage Vm Vm
8. (b)
2 2 ∞
E=∫ [ f (t)]
2
Voltage ripple 1.21 0.482 dt
−∞
factor ∞
E′ = ∫ [f (2t)]
2
dt
Rectifier 40.6% 81.06% −∞

efficiency ∞ dp  dp 
=∫ [f (p)]
2
∵ 2t = p;dt = 
3. (b) −∞ 2  2
Quantization noise results when a continuous random E
variable is converted to a discrete one or when a E′ =
2
discrete random variable is converted to one with fewer Note : If signal x(t) has Energy E.
level. Then,
The quantization noise depends on number of E
quantization levels. x(at) =
|a|
4. (c)
(82)10 = (?)5 x(t – t0) = E
x(–t) = E
A x(t) = A2E
A+ x(t) = ∞
9. (c)
The quantization of a PCM system depends on both
(82)10 = (312)5 step-size and number of quantization levels.
5. (b) Quantization noise in PCM-
Static CMOS logic circuits has no clock signal and • In PCM the quantization noise in terms of power is
complementary NMOS pull-down and PMOS pull-up given by the relation.
networks to implement logic gates or logic functions in
integrated circuits. However dynamic gates use a locked ∆2
Quantization noise power =
PMOS pull-up. 12
Practice Set-2 23 YCT
Here, Where elements aij belongs to ith row and jth column.
∆ is the step size. 18. (c)
V − ( −Vmax ) Vp − p Name Frequency Range
Step size (∆) = max = n Very low frequency (VLF) 0.003 MHz - 0.03MHz
L 2 Low frequency (LF) 0.03 MHz - 0.3 MHz
L is No. of quantization levels. Medium frequency (MF) 0.3 MHz - 3 MHz
10. (d) High frequency (HF) 3 MHz - 30 MHz
Given, Very high frequency (VHF) 30 MHz - 300 MHz
Ultra-high frequency (UHF) 300 MHz - 3000 MHz
f0 = 1000 kHz
Super- high frequency (SHF) 3000 MHz - 30, 000MHz
frequency (f) = 995 kHz Extra-high frequency (EHF) 30,000 MHz-3, 00, 000 MHz
19. (b)

(a) In N-type semiconductor Fermi energy level is

above the donor energy and below the conduction band.
Mathematically →
So, from the above diagram, the circuit impedance is
capacitive. N 
E f = E c − kT ℓn  C 
11. (a) White noise is characterized by Gaussian  ND 
probability density function. (b) In P-type Semiconductor the Fermi Energy level is
12. (d) • Telephone traffic is specified in terms of just below the acceptor energy level and just above the
Erlangs. maximum energy level of valence band.
10 Erlangs = 10call hours. Mathematically-
• It is used in telephony as a measure of offered load or N 
E F = E V + KT ℓn  V 
traffic offered by telephone.  NA 
13. (c)
(c) In Intrinsic Semiconductor-
It is a 16-bit registers.
Fermi-level is situated in the middle (centre) of
The PC hold the address of next instruction to be conduction band & valence band.
executed. Mathematically-
PC locate the memory address of the instruction that
is to be executed next. EC + E V N 
Ef = − KT ℓn  C 
14. (b) 2  NV 
The signal constellation diagram show MSK if NC = NV
modulation scheme.
EC + EV
15. (d) Then, E f =
Photovoltaic cell is not classifies as a photo conductive 2
device. It is operated on the basis of photo luminescent (d) In degenerated n-type semiconductor, If doping
effect. Increases then Fermi level moves towards the
16. (c) conduction band and for high level doping it start
The simple cubic has a coordination number of 6 and touching the conduction band & may enter into the
contain 1 atom per unit cell. conduction band same like in tunnel diode.
17. (b) 20. (d)
A set of m.n numbers arranged in the form of a
rectangular array having m rows and n columns is
called an m × n (m by n) matrix, where-
m = number of rows and
n = number of column
mathematically it may be represented by-
A =  a ij  m×n
Practice Set-2 24 YCT
If diode is silicon (PN junction) drain and gate. It is known as a unipolar transistors.
forward biased voltage 0.7 V. FET is a voltage control device.
21. (c) 29. (a)
Characteristic CB CE CC Feedback control system are basically a low-pass filter.
Input impedance Low Medium High 30. (b)
output impedance High Medium Low Any waveform can be expressed in fourier series if
Voltage gain High Medium Low Dirichlet's conditions are satisfied.
Current gain Low Medium High (i) Signal should have finite no. of maxima and
minima over the range of time period.
Phase shift 0º 180º 0º
(ii) Signal should have finite no. of discontinuities over
22. (d) the range of time period and size of discontinuity
There are two types of model is used in high frequency. should be finite.
(i) Hybrid π-model (iii) Signal should be absolutely integrable over the
(ii) Hybrid T-model range of time period.
23. (d) 31. (a)
a = 437 ± 4 Branch represents a single element such as a voltage
b = 462 ± 4 source or a resistor.
∆ a + ∆b
% error = × 100 32. (b)
a−b Given as, graph between voltage & current we have-
± (∆a + ∆b) = ± 8
b – a = 462 – 437 = 25
8
% error = ± × 100 = ± 32%
25
24. (d)

Since resistance R is a linear device

∆V 8
R= = = 2Ω
∆I 4
33. (d)
Poisson’s equation for inhomogeneous medium
The PMMC basic movement is not inherently
−ρv
insensitive to temperature, but it may be temperature- ∇2V =
compensated by the swamping resistance. The ε
swamping resistors is made of managin (having) 34. (c)
temperature coefficient of practically zero) and Let (A) dBm = 13dBm
combined with copper in the ratio of 20:1 to 30:1
P
10 log −3 = 13
25.(c) : F(A,B,C,D,E,F) = ( A + B) CD + (E + F) 10
= ( A + B ) C D. ( E + F ) log
P
=
13
10−3 10
= (( A + B) + C D ) .E. F P
log = 1.3
= ( A B + C + D ) E.F 10−3
P
( )
= A B + C + D E. F
10−3
= 101.3
26. (b) P = 19.95×10–3
A+A+A+ ....... + A = A P = 19.95mW
27. (b)
SCRs are mainly used in devices where the control unit P ≃ 20 mW
of high power possibly coupled with high voltage. 35. (a)
Hence it is a power regulator. The A.C.F. of ergodic random process is given by
28. (d)
1 T
x ( t ) × x ( t − τ ) dt
t →∞ 2T ∫− T
FET is a device which not have negative resistance lim
characteristics. FET is a three terminals device, source,
Practice Set-2 25 YCT
36. (b)A computer modem's rating of 56K refers to its 42. (a)
transmission speed. In a microwave, waveguides have the following
• Data is converted into message by the modem and advantages and disadvantages-
they are transmitted from terminal over telephone line. Advantages Disadvantages
37. (a) The accumulator is a register in which • Waveguides supports • It is not suitable for
intermediate arithmetic & logic results are stored. high power handling lower frequencies due to
38. (a) capability and lower increase dimensions .
Total memory 1024 × 8 losses.
Number of chips = = • It is easy to install in a • It is very big in size
One chip size 256 × 1
microwave transmission
=4×8 due to its simple
No. of chip = 32 structure.
39. (a) Power supplied by open delta connection- • It has a good immunity • It is not economized
Pv− v = 3Vph .Iph against any RF
Power supplied by color delta connection interference from • It supports narrow band
P∆−∆ = 3Vph I ph outside. operations.
43. (c)
1
Therefore Pv− v = P∆−∆ Above figure represent the output characteristic of
3 common base configuration.
= 57.7% of P∆−∆ Output characteristics of common emitter
The total load supplied by the open delta system is configuration-
57.7% of the closed delta system.
40. (a)
The relation between electric field intensity, electric
flux density and electric polarization.
D = ε0 E + P

41. (c) Note:- Output characteristic of the common collector

Given, configuration is same as the common emitter
x y configuration.
u = sin −1   + tan −1  
y x 44. (b)
MOSFET acts like a MOS capacitor and it is controlled
Differentiating partially with respect to x, treating y as a
by the input gate to source voltage. Hence, MOSFET, can
constant
be used as a voltage-controlled capacitors.
∂y y 1 x2  −y  BJT → Current controlled current source
∴ = .  + 2 2  2 
∂x x 2 − y2  y  x + y  x  JFET → Voltage controlled current source
1 y MOSFET → Voltage controlled capacitance source
= −
x −y
2 2 x 2 + y2 OP-amp → Voltage controlled voltage source
SCR → Current controlled voltage source.
∂y x xy
∴x = − ……………(i) 45. (c)
∂x x −y2 2 x 2 + y2 The junction field effect transistor (JFET) is a majority
Similarly differentiating partially with respect to y, charge carrier device hence. It has less Noise. The
treating x as a constant coupling capacitors in series with inductors will reduce
∂u y  −x  x2  1  the gain.
=   + 2   So the statements 1 and 3 are true.
∂y x 2 − y2  y  x + y  x 
2 2
46. (a)
−x x Frequency doubler means Amplifier should work like a
= + 2
y(x − y ) x + y
2 2 2 full wave rectifier.
Push-push amplifier allows for a fully active full wave
∂u −x xy rectifier. Centre tapped full wave and bridge rectifier
∴y = + …………….(ii)
∂y x −y2 2 x + y2
2
can work as a frequency doubler.
From equation (i) and (ii) we have- 47. (a)
(a) Wheatstone bridge is used for the measurement of
∂u ∂u
x +y =0 medium resistance and it is used in industry due to
∂x ∂y high accuracy.

Practice Set-2 26 YCT

(b) Wien bridge is used for the measurement of 54. (a) The divergence of the magnetic flux density (B)
frequency and unknown value of capacitance also of a steady magnetic field is equal to zero.
can be calculated. ∴ ∇.B = 0
(c) Kelvin's Double bridge is use to measure very low 55. (c) Given,
resistance because it eliminate lead/contact Modulation index of an AM wave → 0 to 1
resistance.
 µ2 
(d) Schering bridge is used for the measurement of PT = PC 1 + 
 2 
capacitance and it is also useful for the
measurement of relative permittivity, dissipation at, µ=0
factor and power factor.  0
Pt 0 = PC 1 + 
48. (a)  2
7400 - Quad 2 - input NAND gates
Pt 0 = PC
7408 - Quad 2 - input AND gates
7432 - Quad 2 - input OR gates at, µ=1
7402 - Quad 2 - input NOR gates  (1)2 
49. (a) Pt1 = PC 1 + 
 2 
A digital system is divided into two part. Combinational  
and sequential circuit. Combinational circuit does not 3
contain any memory while sequential circuit contain Pt1 = PC  
2
memory.
Increase power-
50. (a)
Pt − Pt 0
A minimum phase system does not contain any pole and = 1 × 100
zero in the right side of s-plane. So bode plot exist only Pt 0
for minimum phase system. 3 / 2PC − PC P ( 3 / 2 − 1)
51. (c) = × 100 = C × 100 = 50%
PC PC
Characteristics equation for series RLC circuits
The transmitted power increased by 50%
R 1
= s2 + s + 56. (c)
L LC • The Ethernet protocol uses CSMA/CD.
comparison with standard second order system • Ethernet is the traditional technology for connecting
s2 + 2ξωn s + ωn 2 = 0 devices in a wired local area network (LAN) or wide
1 area networks (WAN).
ωn2 = 57. (c)
LC
When microprocessors receive interrupt signals through
1 pins (hardware) of microprocessor, they are known as
ωn =
LC hardware interrupts. There are 5 hardware interrupts in
R 8085 microprocessor. They are - INTR, RST7.5,
2ξωn = RST6.5, RST5.5, TRAP.
L
58. (b)
R R LC A volatile memory is a computer memory that loses its
ξ= =
2Lωn 2L data when the computer is turned off. RAM is volatile
memory.
R C
ξ= 59. (b) for DC shunt motor
2 L
V = E b + Ia R a
52. (c)
Given, x(t) = e–at f(t) V − Eb
Ia =
From the time shifting property in s-domain, Ra
X(s) = F (s + a) As load increases, armature current will also increases,
53. (a) which implies that back e.m.f. of shunt motor slightly
Super-position theorem applicable only when all the decrease also
components of the circuit contain linear network. The E
N= b
superposition theorem states that a circuit with multiple φ
voltage and current sources is equal to the sum of
simplified circuits using just one of the sources. E b ↓⇒ N ↓

Practice Set-2 27 YCT

60. (c)
Ferrites have ferrimagnetic property. Ferrites can also
magnetized or attracted to a magnet unlike other
ferromagnetic materials. So that is why we can say that
have ferromagnetic property. • During positive clock pulse master gives intermediate
61. (c) output, but slave does not respond. During negative
clock pulse, slave FF activate and it copied the previous
The necessary and sufficient condition for Fourier
output of the master flip-flop and previous output.
transform -
• It is basically used to avoid race around condition.
1. It must be finite function.
• So the above discussion change in the output occurs
2. It has finite number of maxima and minima. when the state of the slave is affected.
3. It must be absolutely integrable that is 68. (b)
∞
∫ | f ( t ) | dt < ∞ . In PCM SNR = (6n + 1.8) dB
−∞

62. (a) n = 10 then, SNR1 = 6×10 + 1.8

The dominant mode in a rectangular waveguide is the = 61.8 dB
mode having lowest cut off frequency or highest cutoff if n = 12 then, SNR2 = 6×12+1.8
wavelength that is TE10. = 73.8 dB
63. (d) SNR2 – SNR1 = 73.8 – 61.8
Epitaxy refers to a type of crystal growth or material = 12 dB
deposition in which new crystalline layers are formed with Hence, if the number of bit is increased by 2, then the
one or more well defined orientations with respect to the signal to quantization noise ratio will increase by 12 dB.
crystalline seed layer. The deposited crystalline film is 69. (b)
called an epitaxial film or epitaxial layer. {
x1 ( n ) = 1, − 1, 2
↑
}
64. (c)
Loop gain |Aβ| = 1 {
x 2 ( n ) = 1, −2,3
↑
}
2. Total phase shift should be 360º or 0º Taking convolution
65. (a) y ( n ) = x1 ( n ) * x 2 ( n )
Summing Integrator
{ }{ }
= 1, − 1, 2 * 1, −2,3
↑ ↑

1  V1 V2 V3 
V0 = − ∫ + +  dt
C  R1 R 2 R 3  So, y ( n ) = {1, − 3,7, −7,6}
↑

R 1 = R2 = R3 = R 70. (d)
1
V0 = − ∫ ( V1 + V2 + V3 ) dt
RC
66. (d)
Lissajous pattern can be used to determine phase shift.
A lissajous figure is displayed on the screen when
sinusoidal signals are applied to both horizontal and L = 6 + 8 + 10 − 2 × 5 − 2 × 4 + 2 × 2
vertical deflection plates of CRO. It is used to measure L eq = 24 − 10 − 8 + 4
frequency and φ difference.
L eq = 10H
67. (c)
71. (d)
• Master slave flip-flop constructed by 2 JK flip-flops
Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction is the basic
first FF called master is driven by positive clock pulse
law of electro magnetism predicting how a magnetic
and second FF called slave is driven by negative clock
field will interact with an electric circuit to produce an
pulse. electromotive force (emf), a phenomenon known as
Practice Set-2 28 YCT
electromagnetic induction. According to faraday's law a 79. (c)
current will be induced in a conductor which is exposed Active transducers- Those transducers, which uses
to a changing magnetic field. their own developed voltage or current for giving the
72. (c) output signal. Ex. Thermoelectric transducers
Armstrong modulator is an indirect way of generating piezoelectric transducer, electromagnetic transducer.
FM signal. Passive transducers- Passive transducers are those
Reactance tube/varactor diode method is direct method transducers which uses an external power supply for
to generate FM. In this case, output frequency of VCO converting the non-electrical quantity to an electrical
is directly controlled by instantaneous value of quantity.
baseband. Ex. Potentiometer, LVDT, hall effect transducer.
73. (b) So, hall effect transducer is not active transducer.
fi = 10 kHz. 80. (c)
Output of PLL = 10 fi (for decade counter)
= 10 × 10 kHz
= 100 kHz
74. (d)
The Yagi-Uda Antenna typically consists of a number
of parallel thin rod elements each approximately a half
Ring counters-
wave in length.
It is simplest shift register counter.
75. (b)
It is also called end carry counter.’’
The Input/output processor controls the flow of
In this only one bit is high and it made to circulate
information between main memory and input/output
around the register as long as clock pulses are applied
devices.
81. (b) Emitter Coupled Logic (ECL):-
The I/O processor is similar to the CPU except that it
handles only the details of I/O processing. The I/O • ECL, the switching speed is very high because
processor can fetch and execute its own instructions. transistors are not saturated when they are conducting.
76. (b) • It is the fasted logic among the all hence called "
As per given data - current mode logic".
α = 10–3/oC • It provides wired 'OR' logic
at R0 = 1.0Ω, RT = 1.1Ω • It used negative power supply to avoid noise and
T1 = 00C, T2 = ? glitches.
We know that • Propagation delay in ECL circuit is 1 n sec.
RT = R0 [(1 + α (T2 – T1)] •Noise margin in ECL logic circuit is 0.3 Volt.
Then 1.1 = 1 [1 + 10–3 (T2– 0)] 82. (a)
1.1 = 1 + 10–3T2 Poynting Vector P = E × H
10–3T2 = 0.1 V A Volt.Amp
Units: × =
T2 = 100º C m m m2
77. (a) Watt
If the resonant frequency is parallel with L and C (both =
m2
are parallel) then it shows coupled lossy cavity.
83. (c)
78. (a) Product demodulator is used for the detection of AM
Given that, I max = 32pA DSB - SC signal.
C = 6µF 84. (b)
dV If probability of occurrence of message is p then its
I max = C information content I will be
dt
1
I max dV
= ( I ) = log 2
P
C dt
1
dV 32 × 10−12 given P =
= = 5.33 ×10−6 16
dt 6 × 10−6
1
dV I = log 2
S.R. = = 5.33 µV sec 1/16
dt
I = log216 = 4 bits
Practice Set-2 29 YCT
85. (b) For global communication minimum number. of n 
satellite used is 3. Each satellite provides around 120º Critical angle sinθc =  2 
coverage area.  n1 
86. (d)  1.6 
θc = sin −1  
There are 6 bit are used as conditional flags in flag  1.4 
register of 8086. The flag register are special purpose
8
register is 1. sign flags(S) 2. Zero flag (Z) 3. Auxiliary = sin −1  
carry flag (AC) 4. Parity flag (P)5. Carry flag (CY) 6. 7
Over flow (O). θc = 61.05º θc = θi = 70
87. (c) θi > θr
A 3 port circulator is an asymmetrical y-type junction
of three identical waveguides with an axially
magnetized ferrite port placed at the centre.
It provide the necessary non-reciprocal matched
property.
88. (c)
A cavity is a band pass filter because it is passes either
Total internal reflection takes place
or rejects desired RF signal within a range of
reflection angle = incidence angle
frequencies. Cavity Band pass filter offers excellent 60
dB out of Band rejection. A cavity filter has two θr = θi = 70º
functions: 94. (c)
• To pass the desired frequency The audio frequency range is 20Hz to 20kHz.
• To reject as much of undesired frequencies as 95. (a)
passable. Soft Errors are caused by radiations, when particles
89. (b) clash with a semiconductor, charged particles are
The voltage resolution for n-stage ladder network R generated inside the semiconductor. These charged
particles disturb the data contained in the memory cells
V
= REF to generate a soft error. Unlike hard error that damages
2n the circuit completely, soft error causes no destructive
90. (a) event to the semiconductor.
15's complement of ABAB - 96. (c)
15 15 15 15 Average power consumed-
A = 10, B = 11 − A B A B 2
Vrms
5 4 5 4 P=
R
5 4 5 4
=
( 20 )2 =
400
= 120W
16's complement = + 1 3.33 3.33
5 4 5 5 97. (b)
91. (a) FORTRAN is a high level programming language.
Companding is used to protect small signals in PCM for FORTRAN, as derived from formula translating system,
quantizing distortion. Companding is used in digital is a general purpose imperative programming language.
telephony system. It is used for numeric and scientific computing.
92. (d) Quantization is the process through which a 98. (d)
range of continuous analog values are quantized or A/D converter system, a counter/timer block is used for
rounded of to a single value. Quantization error occurs frequency measurement.
when an analog signal is converted into its digital form. 99. (c)
It occurs in pulse code modulation. The output voltage waveform of a three phase square
The quantization noise depends on the number of wave inverter contains only odd harmonics.
quantization level and not on the number of samples 100. (a)
produced per second. Root locus starts from open loop poles and terminated
93. (c) Given - at open loop zeros when number of poles and zeros are
n1 = 1.6 equal. When Z > P root locus start from infinity and
n2 = 1.4 ends at zero.
When P > Z, root locus start from poles and ends at
Angle of incidence ( θi ) = 70º
infinite.

Practice Set-2 30 YCT

 PRACTICE SET - 3
q 8. Double integration of a unit step function
1. The units of are
KT would lead to
(a) V (b) V–1 (a) an impulse (b) a parabola
(c) J (d) J/K (c) a ramp (d) a doublet
2. A Zener diode in the circuit shown in below 9. To permit the selection of 1 out of 16
figure has a knee current of 5 mA, and a equiprobable events, the number of bits
maximum allowed power dissipation of 300 required is
mW. What are the minimum and maximum (a) 2 (b) log1016
load currents that can be drawn safely from the (c) 8 (d) 4
circuit, keeping the output voltage V0 constant 10. The Quality factor of series R-L-C circuit will
at 6 V? increases if
(a) R decreases.
(b) R increases.
(c) Voltage increases.
(d) Voltage decreases.
11. The noise at the input to an ideal frequency
detector is white. The power spectral density of
(a) 0 mA, 180 mA (b) 5 mA, 110 mA the noise at the output is-
(c) 10 mA, 55 mA (d) 60 mA, 180 mA (a) Raised cosine
3. Four signals m1(t) = cos (ω0t), m2(t) = 0.5cos (b) Flat
(ω0t), m3(t) = 2cos (ω0t) and m4(t) = cos(4ω0t) (c) Parabolic
are multiplexed by time division multiplexing (d) Gaussian
system. The commutator speed is 12. The code division multiple access technique is
(a) 2f0 (b) 3f0 not used in satellite communication because of
(c) 4f0 (d) 8f0 (a) Wastage of power
4. The 2's complement representation of (–541)10 (b) Wastage of baseband spectrum
decimal in hexadecimal is: (c) Increase in delay
(a) DEE (b) DDD (d) Complexity and unreliability of operation
(c) DEF (d) DE3 13. An instruction used to set the carry flag in a
5. The two advantages of FIR filters over IIR computer can be classified as
filters are (a) Data transfer (b) arithmetic
(a) they are guaranteed to be stable and non- (c) logical (d) program control
linear 14. The modulation normally used with the digital
(b) they are marginally stable and linear data is
(c) they are guaranteed to be stable and may be (a) FM (b) AM
constrained to have linear phase (c) SSB (d) QPSK
(d) they are marginally stable and non-linear 15. Two ampere hour (Ah) is equal to how many
6. For a type A chopper, DC source voltage is 240 coulombs?
V. Calculate the average output voltage is the (a) 2 C
duty cycle is 0.4. Take a voltage drop of 4V (b) 8400 C
across the chopper when it is on. (c) 7200 C
(a) 95.2 V (b) 90.2V (d) 2400 C
(c) 94.4 V (d) 96 V 16. Which one of the following exhibits the most
7. A first order instrument is characterised by well defined X-ray diffraction pattern?
(a) Time constant only (a) A polycrystalline aggregate
(b) Static sensitivity and time constant (b) An amorphous material
(c) Static sensitivity only (c) A single crystalline material
(d) Damping coefficient and static sensitivity (d) A plastically deformed crystal
Practice Set-3 31 YCT
 1 2 3  23. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct
17. 4 5 6  answer:
 
7 8 9  List – I List - II
P. Precision i. The smallest change in
The trace of above matrix is
the input quantity
(a) 6 (b) 24 which can be detected
(c) 15 (d) 45 with its certainty.
18. A parametric amplifier has to be cooled Q. Accuracy ii. Closeness of the
(a) To improve noise performance reading with its true
(b) To increase bandwidth value.
(c) To make it suitable to pulses R. Resolution iii. Measurement of the
(d) Because it cannot operate at room temperature reproducibility of the
19. Match List-I (Equation) with List-II (Relation measurement.
between/Description) and select the correct S. Static iv. Ratio of infinitesimal
answer using the codes given below the lists: Sensitivity change sensitivity in
List-I List-II output to infinitesimal
A. Continuity equation 1. Relates diffusion change in input.
constant with
P Q R S
mobility
(a) ii iii i iv
B. Einstein's equation 2. Relates charge
(b) iii ii iv i
density with
(c) iii ii i iv
electric field
(d) ii iii iv i
C. Poisson's equation 3. Relates flow with
24. For the voltmeter, if meter movement is from
rate of change of
0-12 mA, then what will be its sensitivity?
concentration in
(a) 12 KΩ/V (b) 8.333 KΩ/V
space
D. Diffusion equation 4. Rate of change of (c) 83.33 Ω/V (d) 83.33 KΩ/V
minority carrier 25. For the given Boolean function F(x,y,z)
density with time =Σ(0,2,4,5,6) simplified output will be -
Codes: (a) F = z + xy' (b) F = z + x'y
A B C D (c) F = z' + x'y (d) F = z' + xy'
(a) 4 1 3 2 26. Consensus theorem is
(a) A'B+A'C+BC=A'B+A'C
(b) 4 1 2 3
(b) AB+A'C'+BC=AB'+A'C
(c) 1 4 2 3
(c) AB+A'C+BC=AB+A'C
(d) 1 4 3 2
(d) AB+A'C'+BC=A'B'+A'C
20. A crystal diode is used as………….
27. An SCR remains turned on if the anode
(a) an amplifier
current is more than the
(b) a rectifier (a) Breakdown current
(c) an oscillator (b) Trigger current
(d) a voltage regulator (c) Holding current
21. An amplifier using transistor has a voltage gain (d) Threshold current
of 100. If the input voltage is 65 mV, the output 28. In a thyristor, the minimum current required
voltage is: to maintain the device in the 'ON' state is called
(a) 6.5 V (a) Latching current (b) Ignition current
(b) 1.33 V (c) Holding current (d) Avalanche current
(c) 13.3 V 29. A system is described by the transfer function
(d) 4.15 V 100
G(S)= . The dc gain of the system
22. Input voltage applied to a circuit is 1Vrms and (s + 1)(s + 100)
the output is 1mVrms. Net gain of the circuit is: is .
(a) +30dB (b) –30dB (a) 0.25 (b) 0.5
(c) –60dB (d) +60dB (c) 1 (d) ∞
Practice Set-3 32 YCT
30. For half-wave (odd) symmetry, with T0 = 39. A 100 kVA, single-phase transformer has full-
period of x(t), which one of the following is load copper loss of 600W and iron loss of 500
correct? W. The maximum efficiency occurs at a load of
(a) x(t ± T0/2) = –x(t) nearly
(b) x(t ± T0/2) = x(t) (a) 82.1 kVA
(c) x(t ± T0) = –x(t) (b) 83.3 kVA
(c) 91.3 kVA
(d) x(t ± T0) = x(t)
(d) 98.1 kVA
31. The nodal method of circuit analysis is based
40. The temperature, beyond which substances lose
on
their ferroelectric properties, is known as
(a) KVL and Ohm's law
(a) Critical temperature
(b) KCL and Ohm's Law
(b) Curie temperature
(c) KVL, KCL and Ohm's Law
(c) Inversion temperature
(d) KVL and KCL
(d) Conversion temperature
L 41. If
32. has the dimension of
C
x2 + y 2
(a) time (b) capacitance u = sin -1
x+y

∂ ∂

∂ ∂
(c) inductance (d) resistance
33. The operator 'del; (∇) is a u u
then x +y will be
(a) Vector space function x y
(b) Vector time function (a) sin 2u (b) cos 2u
(c) Scalar space function (c) tan u (d) sin u
(d) Scalar time function 42. In a waveguide, attenuation near the cut-off
34. A system has a receiver noise resistance of 50Ω. frequency is
It is connected to an antenna with an input (a) low (b) high
(c) very high (d) zero
resistance of 50Ω. The noise figure of the
43. The Ebers-Moll model is applicable to
system is
(a) Bipolar Junction Transistor
(a) 1 (b) 2
(b) NMOS Transistor
(c) 50 (d) 101
(c) Unipolar Junction Transistor
35. Two random variable X and Y are totally
(d) Junction FET
uncorrelated if ρ XY :
44. The effective channel length of a MOSFET in
(a) 1.0 (b) ∞ saturation decreases with increases in
(c) Negative (d) 0 (a) gate voltage (b) drain voltage
36. In automatic exchange, switching is done by (c) source voltage (d) body voltage
(a) electromechanical or electronic switch gear 45. A junction field effect transistor can operate in
with the help of operator. (a) Depletion mode only
(b) electromechanical and electronic switch gear. (b) Enhancement mode only
(c) electromechanical or electronic switch gear (c) Depletion and Enhancement modes
without the help of the operator. (d) Neither depletion nor Enhancement modes
(d) none of the these 46. Match List-I (Type of Feedback) with List-II
37. In 8085, if the clock frequency is 5 MHz, the (Effect on Rin and Rout) and select the correct
time required to execute an instruction of 18 T- answer using the code given below the lists
states is List-I List-II
(a) 3.0µs (b) 3.6µs (A) Voltage series 1. Rin increase and
Rout decreases
(c) 4.0µs (d) 6.0µs
(B) Voltage Shunt 2. Rin and Rout
38. Processing speed of computer is measured in- decrease
(a) MIPS (Million Instruction Per Second) (C) Current Series 3. Rin and Rout
(b) MHz of clock increase
(c) Both (A) and (B) (D) Current shunt 4. Rin decreases and
(d) None of these Rout increases.
Practice Set-3 33 YCT
 Codes: 54. An electrostatic force between two point
A B C D charges increase when they are:
(a) 1 4 3 2 (a) More apart and dielectric constant of the
(b) 3 2 1 4 medium between them decreases
(c) 3 4 1 2 (b) Less apart and dielectric constant of the
(d) 1 2 3 4 medium between them decreases
(c) More apart and dielectric constant of the
47. The bridge best suited for measurement of
medium between them increases
mutual inductance is:
(d) Less apart and dielectric constant of the
(a) De Sauty bridge
medium between them increases
(b) Wien bridge
55. A carrier wave is phase modulated with
(c) Heaviside Campbell bridge frequency deviation of 20 kHz by a single tone
(d) Schering bridge frequency of 2 kHz. If the single tone frequency
48. Which one of the following gate is also known is increased to 2 kHz, assuming that phase
as equivalence gate? deviation remains unchanged, bandwidth of the
(a) NOR PM signal is
(b) AND (a) 20 kHz (b) 32 kHz
(c) Ex-OR (c) 22 kHz (d) 44 kHz
(d) Ex-NOR 56. A telegraph sounder is basically a
49. A full-adder can be implemented with half- (a) Mechanical devices
adders and OR gates. A 4-bit parallel full (b) Electrostatic devices
adder without any initial carry requires (c) Electromagnetic devices
(a) 8 half-adders. 4-OR gates (d) Electronic devices
(b) Three bit parity checker 57. In 8085 which of following has highest
(c) 7 half-adders, 4-OR gates priority?
(d) 7 half-adders, 3-OR gates (a) INTR (b) RST 7.5
50. A dominant pole is determined as : (c) RST 6.5 (d) RST 5.5
(a) the highest frequency pole among all poles 58. The contents of EPROM can be erased by
(b) the lowest frequency pole at least two octaves exposing it to
lower than other poles (a) Ultraviolet rays
(c) the lowest frequency pole among all poles (b) Infrared rays
(d) the highest frequency pole at least two (c) Burst of microwaves
octaves higher than other poles (d) Intense heat radiations
51. Consider a system with transfer function
59. In dc machine, fractional pitch winding is
9 employed to
2
; The system has ____, ____, and
s + 4s + 9 (a) Increase generated voltage
____. (b) Reduce sparking
(a) ζ = 0.667, ωn = 3, underdamped (c) Save copper
(b) ζ = 0.222, ωn = 9, undamped (d) Both (b) and (c)
(c) ζ = 0.667, ωn = 9, undamped 60. If the drift velocity of holes under a field
(d) ζ = 0.222, ωn = 3, underdamped gradient of 200 V/m is 100 m/s, their mobility
52. According to the final value theorem in SI units is
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.05
(a) F(0− ) = limit sF(s)
s→∞ (c) 50 (d) 500
(b) F(0+ ) = limit sF(s) 61. Fourier transform of u(t)______
s →∞

(c) F(∞) = limit sF(s) 1 2

(a) + πδ(ω) (b) + 2πδ(ω)
s→0
jω jω
(d) none of these
53. Thevenin's equivalent circuit consists of 1
(c) (d) πδ(ω)
______. jω
(a) Series combination of RTh, ETh and RL 62. The dominant mode in a circular waveguide is
(b) Series combination of RTh, ETh a
(c) Parallel combination of RTh, ETh (a) TEM mode (b) TM01 mode
(d) Parallel combination of RTh, ETh and RL (c) TE21 mode (d) TE11 mode
Practice Set-3 34 YCT
63. Moore's law relates to 72. The positive peak of an AM wave is 16V and
(a) speed of operation of bipolar devices the minimum value is 4V. Assuming single tone
(b) speed of operation of MOS devices Modulation, the modulation index is
(c) power rating of MOS devices (a) 0.6 (b) 0.25
(d) level of integration MOS devices (c) 0.36 (d) 4
64. Oscillator requires 73. Which of the following devices can be used for
(a) No feedback generating a PWM signal?
(b) Negative feedback (a) Comparator
(c) Positive feedback (b) 555 timer
(d) Either positive or negative feedback (c) Counter and magnitude comparator
(d) All the above
65. What is CMRR, if Ad = 30 dB and Ac = 2 dB?
74. The beam width between nulls of 140 cm
(a) 26 dB (b) 28 dB
parabolic reflector used at 6 GHz is
(c) 32 dB (d) 20 dB
(a) 2.5 degrees (b) 5 degrees
66. The time base signal in a CRO is (c) 10 degrees (d) 7.5 degrees
(a) a sinusoidal signal 75. The address lines required to interface 8 K
(b) square wave signal Byte memory chip with 8085 microprocessor is
(c) saw tooth signal (a) 16 (b) 13
(d) triangular wave signal (c) 10 (d) 7
67. A 4-bit Modulo-6 ripple counter uses JK flip- 76. Why are metals good conductors of heat?
flop. If the propagation delay of each flip-flop (a) Electrons are free
is 50ns then maximum clock frequency that can (b) Atoms are tightly packed
be used is: (c) Melting point is high
(a) 20 MHz (b) 5 MHz (d) Particles are separate
(c) 10 GHz (d) 15 MHz 77. The field configuration in two different views
68. A 13 bit PCM system performance is better of waves propagating in rectangular waveguide
as shown in the given figure represents.
than an 8 bit PCM system because :
(a) Noise is lower and is proportional to
reciprocal of bandwidth
(b) Bandwidth is larger and detection is easier
(c) Quantization noise is lesser other things being
equal
(d) Quantization noise is nearly zero since 213
levels are available (a) TE10 mode (b) TM11 mode
(c) TE11 mode (d) TE21 mode
69. The ROC of a stable system must include the
(a) Origin (b) Infinity 78. For a voltage follower circuit using an op-amp,
(c) A ring (d) Unit circle which of the following is true ?
70. Impedance Z as shown in the given figure is (a) both input and output impedance are very
large
(b) input impedance is very large and the output
impedance is very small
(c) input impedance is very small and the output
impedance is very large
(d) both input and output impedance are very
small
79. Which one is not a type of Viscometer?
(a) Orifice viscometer
(a) j29 Ω (b) j9 Ω (b) Capillary viscometer
(c) j19 Ω (d) j39 Ω (c) Redwood viscometer
71. Which of the following field equation indicate (d) Rotameter viscometer
that the free magnetic charge do not exist? 80. Shifting a register to left by one bit position
1 equivalent to (Binary Code).
(a) H = ∇ × A (b) ∇ × H = 0 (a) Division by 2
µ
(b) Multiplication by 2
Idl × R
(c) H = ∫ 4πR 2
(d) ∇ × H = J (c) Addition of 2
(d) Subtraction of 2
Practice Set-3 35 YCT
81. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct 90. Number of bits needed to code 256 operation is:
answer using the code given below the list : (a) 4 (b) 6
List-I List-II (c) 8 (d) 16
91. In a PCM system, each quantization level is
A. DCTL 1. Multiple collectors encoded into 6 bits. The signal to quantization
B. ECL 2. Current hogging noise ratio is-
2
C. I L 3. High speed (a) 6 dB (b) 36 dB
Codes : (c) 38 dB (d) 48 dB
A B C 92. At a given probability of error, binary coherent
FSK is inferior to binary coherent PSK by
(a) 2 3 1
(a) 6 dB (b) 3 dB
(b) 1 3 2
(c) 2 dB (d) 0 dB
(c) 2 1 3 93. The cladding which surrounds the fibre core
(d) 1 2 3 (a) is used to protect the fibre
82. The skin depth, δ at a frequency of 1.6 MHz in (b) is used to reduce optical interference
aluminium, where σ = 38.2 MS/m and µ = 1, (c) helps to guide the light in the core
(a) 64.4 µm (b) 100.5 µm (d) ensures that refractive index remains
unaltered
1 94. The standard voice frequency band is
(c) µm (d) None of these
π (a) 300 Hz- 3400 Hz (b) 3 KHz-30 KHz
83. The function of padders in radio receivers is to (c) 20Hz-20 KHz (d) 30 Hz-3000Hz
(a) improve sensitivity 95. Division by zero in a program gives rise to
which one of the following?
(b) reduce image frequency rejection (a) Syntax error (b) Run-time error
(c) reduce noise (c) Logical error (d) Semantic error
(d) improve tracking 96. Voltage on R, L, C in series circuit are shown
84. Channel capacity is basically a measure of: below. Value of voltage sources is
(a) maximum rate of information
(b) amount of information a channel can take
(c) Entropy rate
(d) None of these
85. Same Amplitude, 90° phase difference indicate
which polarization? (a) 10 V (b) 15 V
(a) Linear (b) Circular (c) 27 V (d) 5 V
(c) Elliptical (d) All 97. COBOL is a _________________
86. After assembly in 8086, any errors in program (a) Low-level programming language
syntax can be found by examining the -------- (b) High-level programming language
file. (c) Assembly language
(a) List (b) Source (d) Machine language
98. The resistance of a circuit is measured from the
(c) Main (d) Object
current flowing through and power fed to that
87. Magic Tee is a combination of circuit. The uncertainty in current and power
(a) One H-plane tee and one E-plane tee are ±1% and ±2% respectively. The
(b) One H-plane tee and two E-plane tee uncertainty in the measurement of resistance is
(c) Two H-plane tee and one E-plane tee (a) ± 2% (b) ± 3%
(d) Two H-plane tee and two E-plane tee (c) ± 4% (d) ± 5%
88. Travelling wave tube (TWT) is basically 99. The primary function of a phase inverter is to
(a) Wideband amplifier change the phase of a signal by
(b) Tuned amplifier (a) 90º (b) 120º
(c) An oscillator (c) 360º (d) 180º
(d) None of the above 100. The roots of the characteristic equation
1 + G(s) H(s) = 0 are the same as the
89. Given VOH = 4V, VIH = 3.2V, VIL = 2V,
(a) Poles of the closed loop transfer function
VOL = 1.5V, find noise margin? (b) Poles of the open loop transfer function
(a) 0.9 (b) 2.5 (c) Zeros of the closed loop transfer function
(c) 0.5 (d) 2 (d) Zeros of the open loop transfer function

Practice Set-3 36 YCT

 Answer Key
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (a)
11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (b)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (c) 25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c) 29. (c) 30. (a)
31. (b) 32. (d) 33. (a) 34. (b) 35. (d) 36. (a) 37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (b)
41. (c) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (b) 45. (a) 46. (d) 47. (c) 48. (d) 49. (d) 50. (b)
51. (a) 52. (c) 53. (b) 54. (b) 55. (d) 56. (c) 57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (a)
61. (a) 62. (d) 63. (d) 64. (c) 65. (b) 66. (c) 67. (b) 68.(d) 69. (d) 70. (b)
71. (b) 72. (a) 73. (d) 74. (b) 75. (b) 76. (a) 77. (c) 78. (b) 79. (d) 80.(b)
81. (a) 82. (a) 83. (d) 84. (a) 85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (a) 89. (c) 90. (c)
91. (c) 92. (b) 93. (c) 94. (a) 95. (b) 96. (d) 97. (b) 98. (c) 99. (d) 100. (a)

Solution
1. (b) Diode equation Vi − Vz 9 − 6 3
∵ Is = = = = 60mA
 VD q  Rs 50 50
I D = Is  e ηKT − 1 ……………(i)
  ∵ I L(min) = Is − I z(max) = 60 − 50 = 10mA.
 
Where, And, I z(max) = Is − I z = 60 − 5 = 55mA
I D − Total diode current
Is − Reverse saturation current 3. (d)
f1 = f0, f2 = f0, f3 = f0 & f4 = 4f0
VD- Applied voltage across the diode
η − ideality factor Commutator speed = 2⋅fmax
VT- Thermal voltage = 2 × 4f0
From equation (i) = 8 f0
 VD  4. (d)
I D = Is  e ηVT − 1 ( 541)10 in binary ( 001000011101)2
 
 
1's complements of 001000011101 is -
KT
∴ VT = 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
q + 1
K = 1.38 × 10 −23 J / K 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 2's complement
q = 1.6×10–19C (110111100011)2 = ( DE3)H
T = Room temperature
Thermal voltage is directly proportional to temperature. 5. (c)
The advantages of FIR filters over IIR filters are -
VT ∝ Tempreture FIR IIR
KT • Linear phase • IIR filters are non-linear
Now→ VT = characteristic phase characteristic.
q
Where, • Linear phase property • IIR filters can become
K → Boltzmann's constant implies that the phase more difficult to
q → charge (e − ) is a linear function of implement and distort
the frequency adjustments (because of
T→ Room Temperature
• FIR filters are always feedback).
∵ Now
stable i.e for a finite Which can alter the poles
q 1
= input, the output is and zeros and make the
KT V always stable. filters unstable.
q 6. (c)
= V −1
KT Given value,
2. (c) Given, Source voltage, Vs = 240
Iz = 5mA, V0 = Vz = 6V Iknee = 5mA. Duty cycle = 0.4
Voltage drop = 4V
Rs = 50Ω, Vi = 9V
∴ Max power dissipation 300mW. Average output voltage = ( Vs − 4 ) × 0.4
Pz( max ) 300 = ( 240 − 4 ) × 0.4
∴ I z(max) = = = 50mA
VZ 6 = 94.4V
Practice Set-3 36 YCT
7. (b) 18. (a)
First order of instrument is characterized by static A parametric amplifier must be cooled to improved
sensitivity and time constant. noise performance.
8. (b) 19. (b)
• Continuity equation: based on rate of change of
∫ ( step function ) dt → ramp function. minority carrier density with respect to time...
∫ ( Ramp function ) dt → Parabolic function. for e − →
dn 1 dJ n
= − Rn + Gn
Hence, ∫ ∫ ( step function ) dt → Parabolic function. dt q dx
9. (d) dp 1 dJ p
for Hole → =− − RP + GP
Given, Number of total events 2n = 16 dt q dx
2n = 24 Where-
Number of bits n=4 Gn/GP = e/hole generation rate
Rn/RP = e/hole- recombination rate
10. (a)
Jn/JP = e/hole density.
Quality factor of series R-L-C circuit
• Poisson's equation:-
ωL
Q= 0 dε p(x)
R general form : =
dx kε 0
1 L Where-
Q=
R C ε = electric field.
1 ρ (x) = space charge density (Charge/cm3)
Q∝ K = dielectric constant
R
Hence, the quality factor of series R-L-C circuit will ε 0 = permittivity of free space (8.854 ×10–
14
increases if R decreases. F/cm)
2
11. (d) d V P
=−
The noise at the input to an ideal frequency detector is dx 2
ε
white. The power spectral density of the noise at the Poisson's equation related charge density with electric
output is Gaussian. field.
12. (a) • Diffusion equation-
Code access method to used by various radio dn
communication technologies. CDMA is an example of for e– Jn(diff) = q Dn.
multiple access. It is not used in satellite dx
communication because of wastage of power. dp
for hole JP (diff) = – q Dp
13. (c) dx
A logical operation can be used to set the carry flag in a total diffusion = Jn(diff) + Jp(diff)
computer which perform basic logical operations such
dn dn
as AND, OR, XOR etc and works on a bitwise level. J diff = q D n − q Dp
14. (d) dx dx
QPSK (Quadrature phase shift keying) modulation • Einstein equation:
system is normally used with the digital data. D n D p KT T(k)
= = = VT = Volt
15. (c) µn µp q 11600
∵ 1 Ah = 3600 coulombs diffusion equation relates flow with rate of change of
∴ 2 Ah = 3600 × 2 concentration in space.
= 7200 coulombs 20. (b)
16. (c) A crystal diode is used as a rectifier to convert the AC into
X-ray diffraction pattern to determine a crystalline DC. As it conducts only in one direction and blocks the
material current flow in the reverse direction as similar to the
A crystal structure is SC, BCC, FCC, but for this we normal diode it can be used to design the half wave, full
must know which crystal planes are the diffracting for wave and bridge rectifier circuits.
each type of crystal structure. 21. (a)
17. (c) Av = 100, Vi = 65 mV, V0 = ?
since tr(A) = sum of diagonal elements of a square V
matrix Av = 0
Vi
=1+5+9
= 15 ⇒ V0 = 100×65×10–3 = 6.5 V

Practice Set-3 38 YCT

22. (c) Given that, 30. (a)
Input voltage (Vin) = 1Vrms As half wave odd symmetry contains only odd
Output voltage (Vout) = 1mV = 10–3Vrms harmonics hence,
V For half-wave odd symmetry,
Net gain (G) = 20log out  T 
Vin x  t ± 0  = −x (t )
 2 
10−3 Wave -
Net gain (G) = 20log
1
Net gain (G) = –60log1010
= –60 dB
23. (c)
(i) Precision - Measurements of the reproducibility of
the measurement.
(ii) Accuracy - Closeness of reading with the value.
(iii) Resolution - the smallest change that can be
detected with certainty.
(iv) Static sensitivity - Ratio of infinitesimal change
sensitivity in o/p to infinitesimal change in input.
1 Ω
24. (c) Sensitivity = = 31. (b)
I FSD V For nodal method of circuit analysis is based on
1 1000 Kirchhoff's current law and Ohm's law.
= −3
= 32. (d)
12 × 10 12
= 83.33 Ω / V L
The given expression is surge impedance, which
25. (d) F(x,y,z) =Σ(0,2,4,5,6) C
unit is ohm and resistance has also unit ohm. Therefore
L / C has the dimension of resistance.
33. (a)
A operator ‘del’ ( ∇ ) or nabla is a vector space function.
F = z + xy
It is used in mathematics as a vector differential
26. (c)
operator.
Consensus theorem
34. (b)
AB + AC + BC = AB + AC
Given that -
27. (c)
If the anode current is greater than the holding current, Req = 50Ω
SCR fails to turn off even when it is in conducting Rs = 50Ω
mode and a reverse voltage is applied between the R eq
anode and cathode. Noise figure (NF) = 1 +
Rs
28. (c) Holding current- The minimum current
required to maintain the device in on state is called 50
holding current an holding current of SCR is that = 1+
50
minimum value of current below which anode current
must fall to come in OFF state. NF = 2
Holding current is related to the turn off process of 35. (d) Two random variable X and Y are totally
the SCR. uncorrelated if ρ XY = 0 .
Latching current is related to the turn ON process 36. (a) In automatic exchange, switching is done by
of the SCR. electromechanical or electronic switch gear with the
Latching current is always more than holding help of the operator. In automatic telephone exchange,
current. switch is controlled by dialed pulse.
29. (c) 37. (b) Given, clock frequency (fclk) = 5 MHz
100 1
G(S)= Time period (Tclk) =
(s + 1)(s + 100) f( clk )
For DC gain put s = 0 1
100 100 =
= 5 × 106
( 0 + 1)( 0 + 100 ) 100 = 0.2 × 10–6
DC gain = 1 (Tclk) = 0.2 µ sec
Practice Set-3 39 YCT
Now, for 18 T - states So,
= 18 × 0.2 µ sec Increase in drain voltage decrease the channel length in
= 3.6 µ sec saturation.
38. (c) Saturation mode VDS ≥ VGS − VTh ( VGS > VTh )
Processing speed of computer is measured in MIPS 45. (a)
(Million Instruction Per Second), MHz of clock.
junction field effect transistor can operate in depletion
39. (c) mode only but MOSFET can operate in enhancement
Efficiency is maximum at some fraction and depletion mode.
‘k’ of full load
46. (d)
Wi ( Iron loss ) Feedback Output Input
k= Input Gain Output
Wcu ( Copper loss )
Resistance
Resistance
Voltage Voltage Voltage AV Increase Decrease
500 series
k= = 0.913
600 Current Voltage Current GM Increase Increase
kVA at ηmax = Full load kVA × k series
Voltage Current Voltage RM Decrease Decrease
= 100 × 0.913
shunt
= 91.3kVA
Current Current Current AI Decrease Increase
40. (b) The Curie point is the temperature above which Shunt
the material loses its ferroelectric properties.
41. (c) 47. (c)
x 2 + y2 Heaviside Campbell bridge- This bridge is used to
Given, u = sin -1 measure self-inductance in terms of a mutual
x+y
inductance.
x 2 + y2
or sin u =
x+y
put x = λx and y = λy, we get
x 2 + y2
sin u = λ.
x+y
i.e. sinu is a homogeneous function of order one, then
by Euler’s theorem-
∂ ∂
x ( sin u ) + y ( sin u ) = sin u
∂x ∂y
 ∂u ∂u 
or cos u  x + y  = sin u
 ∂x ∂y  48. (d)
Ex-NOR gate is also called equivalence gate because
∂u ∂u
or x +y = tan u when all its inputs are equal or equivalent then its
∂x ∂y output is 1(High).
42. (c) In a waveguide , the attenuation near the cut-off Truth table of Ex-NOR
frequency is very high. A B Y (Output)
43. (a) Ebers-Moll model is one of classical module of 0 0 1 (High)
BJT for small signals. This model is based on 0 1 0 (low)
interacting diode junction and is applicable to any 1 0 0 (low)
transistor operating modes. 1 1 1 (High)
44. (b)
Increase in drain voltage decreases the channel length. 49. (d)
When VGS = 0 and VDS > 0 then, let's assume 4 bit binary
ID value depends at- Full adder = (2n – 1) half adder + (n – 1) OR Gate
• Number of majority carrier = (2 × 4 –1) half adder + (4 – 1) OR Gate
• Length of channel 4 bit → 7 half-adder +3 OR Gate
• Size of channel in drain side 50. (b)
• Drain to source voltage. A dominant pole is the lowest frequency pole which has
V V at least two octaves lower than other poles. The
ID = DS = A DS dominant pole consist of major part of response as
R pℓ compare to other poles.
Practice Set-3 40 YCT
51. (a) 60. (a)
ω2 As per data given are-
T.F = n
Vd = 100 m/s & E = 200 V/m
s 2 + 2ξωn s + ωn2
∵ Vd = µE
Comparing the given transfer function- V 100
ω2n = 9, ωn = 3 ∴ µ= d = = 0.5 m2/V-sec
E 200
2ξωn = 4 61. (a)
4 x (t) = u(t)
ξ= Taking fourier transform
2×3
1
=
2
= 0.667 (underdamped) X(ω) = + πδ(ω)
3 jω
52. (c) 62. (d)
Final value theorem in s-domain is given by, The dominant mode in a circular waveguide is a TE11
F(∞) = limit sF(s) mode.
s→0
63. (d)
53. (b) It states that the number of transistor per square inch on
Thevenin equivalent circuit consist of voltage source IC will roughly double every year sine the invention of
(ETh) and in series with thevenin resistance (RTh) IC's. Moore's low is related to the level of integration of
54. (b) MOS devices it predicted that this trend would continue in
An electrostatic force between two point two charges the future also. Moor's law means even-more powerful
Q1Q 2 computers for less and less money.
(F) =
4π∈0∈r R 2 64. (c)
1 1 Oscillator requires positive feedback.
F∝ ∝ 2 A
∈r R +ve feedback closed loop gain = A CL =
1 − βA
F↑,∈r↓, R↓
An electrostatic force between two point charge βA = 1 is maintained to satisfy Barkhausen criteria
increases when they are less apart and dielectric due to which high gain can be obtained which produces-
constant of medium between them decreases. oscillation in the system.
55. (d) 65. (b)
Given- Given,
Frequency deviation (∆f) = 20kHz Ad = 30dB, Ac =2dB
single tone frequency (fm) = 2kHz A 
CMRR = 20 log  d 
Bandwidth = 2 (∆f + fm )
 Ac 
= 2 (20+2)
= 44 KHz CMRR ( dB ) = 30 − 2 = 28dB
56. (c) 66. (c)
A telegraph sounder is an electromagnetic device used CRO is a very fast X-Y plotter that shows the input
as a receiver on electrical telegraph lines. It consist an signal versus another signal versus time. It generate an
electromagnet attached to the telegraph. output voltage which varies linearly with time. The time
57. (b) base signal in CRO is a sawtooth signal.
Decreasing priority order → TRAP>RST7.5 > 67. (b)
RST6.5> RST 5.5 > INTR Propagation delay of each flip flop, = 50 ns
58. (a) Propagation delay of 4 flip-flop tpd = 4×50ns
Once programmed, an EEPROM can be erased by = 200 ns
exposing it to strong ultraviolet light source (Such as 1
Maximum clock frequency fmax =
from a mercury-vapor lamp). Tmin
59. (d) 1
In practice - coil - pitches as low as eight - tenths of =
t pd
pole pitch are employed without much serious reduction
in the e.m.f. 1
=
Fractional - pitched windings are purposely used to 200 × 10−9
effect substantial saving in the copper of the end
f max = 5MHz
connections and for improving commutation.
Practice Set-3 41 YCT
68. (d): Quantization noise is introduced by the 74. (b)
quantizer. Given-
The maximum quantization error is given by f = 6GHz
∆ D = 140 cm = 1.4m
[ Qe ]max =
2 c 3 × 108 1
λ= = = m
∆ = Step size f 6 × 109 20
Vmax − Vmin Parabolic antenna beam width between Null-
Step size ( ∆ ) = 1 1
2n = 140(λ/D) = 140 × ×
Where, 20 1.4
n is the number of bits per sample used by 140
Beamwidth first Null = = 5 degree
Quantizer. 2 × 14
Quantization noise is nearly zero since 213 levels are 75. (b)
available. 8085 microprocessor has 16 address lines from A0 to
69. (d) A15. Hence maximum size of memory 216 or 64 kb but
For a stable system, ROC must include the unit circle. for 8K byte.
70. (b) = 8 × 210
= 23 × 210 = 213
Hence address line is 13.
76. (a)
Metals have valence electrons that are free to move
around the surface. When heated, these free electrons
collide with each other and the majority of the kinetic
energy is transformed into heat energy, making metals a
good conductor of heat.
77. (c)
Z = X L1 + X L2 + X L3 + 2X M23 − 2X M13 In X and Y axis only half wave shows that's why for a
rectangular waveguide the mode is TE11.
Z = j5 + j2 + j2 + 2 × j10 − 2 × j10 78. (b)
Z = j9Ω Voltage follower circuit characteristics–
71. (b) Input Impedance = High
From the Maxwell equation- Output Impedance = Low
∇.B = 0 Current gain = High
Power gain = High
∇.µ H = 0
Voltage gain = Unity
µ∇.H = 0 Voltage follower used in buffer amplifier, isolation
amplifier, unity gain amplifier.
∇.H = 0 79. (d)
So, the equation ∇ × H = 0 does not exist the free Viscometer is an instrument used to measure the
magnetic charges. viscosity and flow properties of fluids. Its principle is
72. (a) based on 'Poiseuille's law' viscometer generally used in
Given that, petrochemical, light industry, textiles and other fields.
Vmax = 16V There are three main types of viscometers are-
Vmin = 4V 1. Orifice viscometer 2. Capillary viscometer
µ =? 3. Redwood viscometer.
We know that, 80. (b)
V − Vmin 16 − 4 Shifting a register to left by one bit position equivalent
µ = max , µ= to (Binary Code) multiplication by 2.
Vmax + Vmin 16 + 4
12
µ= µ = 0.6
20
73. (d) 81. (a)
The PWM signal can be generated in a number of ways. Logic family Property
• comparator • DCTL Current hogging problem
• 555 times • ECL High speed (non-saturated)
• counter and magnitude comparator • I 2L Multiple collectors.

Practice Set-3 42 YCT

82. (a) 93. (c)
1 The cladding increases the critical angle within the core
Skin depth δ = fibre and also prevents adjacent fibers from touching
πfµσ
each other.
1 Cladding is made of less dense material than core with
δ=
π × 1.6 × 10 × 38.6 × 106 × 4 π × 10 −7
6
such a combination that helps the light to reflect back to
δ = 64.4 µm the inner surface of core.
94. (a)
83. (d) In telephone, the usable frequency range from 300 Hz to
Padder are used in a receiver to discard the carrier 3400 Hz.
facilitate track and improve tracking. 95. (b)
84. (a) Dividing a number by zero is a mathematical error (not
The channel capacity C is defined to be the maximum defined) and we can use exception handling to
rate at which information can be transmitted through a gracefully overcome such operations. If you write a
channel. code without using exception handling then the output
 S of division by zero will be shown as infinity which can
Capacity of a channel (C) = BW log2 1 + 
 N  not be further processed. We can handle this exception
85. (b) by using run-time error.
Circular polarization indicates same amplitudes with 96. (d)
90º phase shift and Elliptical polarization indicates given that
different amplitude with 90º phase shift. VR = 3 Volt, VL = 14 Volt, VC = 10Volt
86. (a) as we know that
The 8086 is a 16-bit microprocessor having 20 address
Vs = VR2 + ( VL − VC )
2
lines and 16 data lines that provides up to 1MB storage.
After assembly in 8086-any errors in program syntax
can be found by examining the list file. = ( 32 ) + (14 − 10 )2
87. (a)
Magic tee is a combination of one H - tee and one E - = 9 + 16
plane tee there are two arms in tee called co-linear arms. Vs = 5 Volt
88. (a) 97. (b)
A traveling wave tube (TWT) is a specialized vacuum COBOL is a high level programming language.
tube that is used in electronic to amplify radio COBOL stands for common business oriented language.
frequency signal in microwave range.
It is imperative procedural and object oriented. COBOL
89. (c) takes data from a file or database, processes and gives
Given that VOH = 4V output.
VIH = 3.2 V 98. (c)
VIL = 2V Now power = I2R
VOL = 1.5 V Power
NMlow = VIL – VOL = 2 – 1.5 = 0.5V R=
I2
NMhigh = VOH – VIH = 4 – 3.2 = 0.8 2
P=I R
90. (c) For 128 operation 7- bit needed (27 = 128) like
that (28 = 256) P
R= 2
91. (c) I
SQNR = 1.8+6n δR δP δI
= +2
n=6 R P I
So, SQNR = 1.8+ 6×6 = ± (2% + 2×1)% = ± 4%
= 37.8dB 99. (d)
SQNR ≃ 38dB A phase inverter is simply an amplifier configured in
92. (b) such a way to give the original amplified signal and
another signal 180 out of phase to drive the push pull
1 Eb
Pe for FSK = erf c amplifier.
2 2N 0 100. (a)
1 Eb G (s ) Zero 's of CLTF
Pe for Psk = erf c CLTF = =
2 N0 1 + G (s) H (s) Poles of CLTF
for a given Pe-PSK is better than FSK by a factor of 2 So, 1 + G ( s ) H ( s ) → Poles of CLTF.
10 log22 = 3dB.
Practice Set-3 43 YCT
 PRACTICE SET - 4
1. The concentration of minority carriers in an 7. For the signal flow graph shown in the figure,
extrinsic semiconductor under equilibrium is determine the overall transmittance relating C
(a) directly proportional to the doping and R.
concentration
(b) inversely proportional to the doping
concentrations
(c) directly proportional to the intrinsic
concentration
(d) inversely proportional to the intrinsic G1 + G 2 G1 + G 2
concentration (a) (b)
1 − G1H1 + G 2 H1 1 + G1H1 − G 2 H1
2. In this circuit, V is a sinusoid input with
frequency f, current I contains : G1 + G 2 G1G 2
(c) (d)
I 1 + G1H1 + G 2 H1 1 + G1H1 + G 2 H1
8. δ (n) is equal to
(a) u(n) + u(n-1)
(b) u(n) - u(n-1)
(c) u(n) * u(n-1)
(a) Only f (d) u(n) + u(n-1) + u(n-2)
(b) All harmonics of f 9. The bit rate of a digital communication system
(c) Only even harmonics of f is 34 Mbit/s. The modulation scheme is QPSK.
The baud rate of the system is
(d) Only odd harmonics of f
(a) 68 Mbit/s (b) 34 Mbit/s
3. Signal to noise ratio is highest in:
(a) PWM (b) PPM (c) 17 Mbit/s (d) 8.5 Mbit/s
(c) PAM (d) PPM and PWM 10. If the Q-factor of a coil at a resonant frequency
4. The logic circuit given below converts a binary of 1.5 MHz is 150 for a series resonant circuit,
code Y1Y2Y3 into then the corresponding bandwidth is
(a) 225 MHz (b) 1.06 MHz
(c) 52 kHz (d) 10 kHz
11. An amplifier having output SNR of 16 dB and
input SNR of 21.4 dB. Its noise figure is
.
(a) 5.4 dB (b) +37.4 dB
(c) 37.4 dB (d) – 5.4 dB
12. In a GSM cellular network, the 148 data frame
(a) Excess -3 code starts and ends with three 0 bits. The purpose
(b) Gray code of these three bits is for:
(c) BCD code (a) Adding the zero padding to make frame of
(d) Hamming code perfect size
5. The VLSI/ULSI technique is used fabricate (b) Balancing of 1 and 0 in the data frame
(a) ECL (c) Frame delineation
(b) MOS (d) Guarding the frame
(c) CMOS
13. In a microprocessor, WAIT states are used to
(d) TTL
6. A TRIAC is similar to (a) Make the processor wait during a DMA
(a) two parallel connected thyristors operation
(b) two back to back (anti-parallel) connected (b) make the processor wait during an interrupt
thyristors processing
dv (c) make the processor wait during a power
(c) Thyristors with larger rating shutdown
dt
(d) Bipolar Junction Transistor (d) interface slow peripherals to the processor

Practice Set-4 44 YCT

14. Minimum shift keying is similar to 21. The emitter follower configuration is an
(a) Continuous phase frequency shift keying example of
(b) Binary phase shift keying (a) Voltage-series feedback
(c) Binary frequency shift keying (b) Current series feedback
(d) QPSK (c) Current shunt feedback
15. Which of the following is a source of EMF? (d) Voltage shunt feedback
(a) germanium diode (b) lead acid battery 22. Which one of the following statements is
(c) P channel FET (d) carbon resistor correct?
16. The rise time of an amplifier is
(a) Directly proportional to the upper 3-dB
frequency
(b) Inversely proportional to the upper 3-dB
frequency
(c) Directly proportional to the lower 3-dB
frequency
(d) Inversely proportional to the lower 3-dB
frequency
23. A d-Arsonval movement is rated at 50
microamperes. Its sensitivity is
Each side of the cube shown above is of length (a) 20000 Ω/V (b) 200000 Ω/V
a. What are the Miller indices of the shaded (c) 200 Ω/V (d) 2000 Ω/V
surface?
24. Match List-I (Instrument) with List-II
(a) (100) (b) (123)
(Property/use) and select the correct answer
1 1  using the codes given below the lists:
(c) (221) (d)  1
22  List-I List-II
sin ( θ/2 ) A. PMMC 1. Square law type scale
17. lim is B. Moving iron 2. Very good high
θ→ 0 θ
frequency response
(a) 0.5 (b) 1
C. Thermocouple 3. Linear scalar over the
(c) 2 (d) not defined
entire range
18. What is range of UHF?
(a) 30 MHz to 300 MHz D. Electrostatic 4. Voltmeter type
(b) 300 MHz to 3000 MHz Codes:
(c) 3000 MHz to 30,000 MHz A B C D
(d) Above 30,000 MHz (a) 4 1 2 3
19. As the Fermi energy of silver is 8.8 × 10–19 (b) 3 2 1 4
joule, the velocity of the fastest electron in (c) 4 2 1 3
silver at 0ºK (Given: Rest mass of electron= 9.1 (d) 3 1 2 4
× 10–31 kg) is 25. A 2n variable K-map has______cells.
(a) 3.33 × 105 m/s (b) 1.39 × 106 m/s (a) 2n (b) 22n
7
(c) 4.40 × 10 m/s (d) 3 × 108 m/s (c) log22n (d) 2n
20. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct 26. Which of the following are universal gates?
answer using the codes given below the list: 1. AND 2. NAND
List-I List-II 3. OR 4. NOR
A. LED 1. Electrical isolator 5. NOT
B. LCD 2. Forward biased (a) 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 (b) 1, 3 and 4 only
C. Optocouplers 3. Light reflectors/ (c) 2, 3 and 5 only (d) 2 and 4 only
transmitters 27. The number of terminals present in IGBT is
D. Photodiode 4. Reverse biased (a) 2 (b) 3
Codes: (c) 4 (d) 5
A B C D 28. An SCR is turned off when its turn-off time is
(a) 4 1 3 2 (a) less than the circuit time constant
(b) 2 1 3 4 (b) greater than the circuit time constant
(c) 4 3 1 2 (c) less than the circuit turn-off time
(d) 2 3 1 4 (d) greater than the circuit turn-off time
Practice Set-4 45 YCT
29. The equivalent of the block diagram in the 36. Which type of network is the internet?
figure is given as (a) Circuit-switched network
(b) Message-switched network
(c) Packet-switched network
(d) Cell-switched network
37. In the register indirect addressing mode of
8085 microprocessor, data is stored
(a) at the address contained in the register pair
(b) in the register pair
(c) in the accumulator
(d) in a fixed location of the memory
38. Computer memory which allows simultaneous
read and write operations is:
(a) ROM
(b) EPROM
(c) EEPROM
(d) RAM
30. The Fourier transform of u(t) is 39. Laminated insulation , coated with varnish, is a
(a) 1/jω (b) jω staple adoption in transformer assemblage in
(c) 1/(1 + jω) (d) πδ(ω) + 1/jω order to
31. Twelve 1 Ω resistance are used as edges to form (a) reduce the reluctance of the magnetic path
a cube. The resistance between two diagonally (b) minimize losses due to eddy currents
opposite corners of the cube is (c) increase the reluctance of the magnetic path
5 (d) increase the defect of eddy current
(a) Ω (b) 1Ω
6 40. Substances which have permeability less than
6 3 the permeability of free space are known as
(c) Ω (d) Ω (a) ferromagnetic (b) paramagnetic
5 2
32. (c) diamagnetic (d) bipolar
41. (cos 5θ - i sin5θ) is same as
2

(a) cos10θ + i sin 10θ

(b) cos25θ - i sin 25θ
(c) (cos θ + i sinθ)-10
(d) (cosθ - i sinθ)-10
The time constant for the given circuit is : 42. The waveguide modes are usually excited from
(a) 2ms (b) 20µs a signal source through:
(c) 20ms (d) 2µs (a) an antenna
(b) an aperture
33. The gradient of the function f(x,y) = x+y at the
(c) a coaxial cable
point (0,0) is
(d) free space coupling
(a) 0 (b) i+j
43. A BJT is said to be operating in the saturation
(c) 1 (d) i+2j
Region if
34. "The power spectral density of white noise
(a) Both the Junctions are reverse biased.
(a) Varies as square root of frequency
(b) Base-Emitter Junction is reverse biased and
(b) Varies as increase of frequency
Base-Collector Junction is forward biased.
(c) Varies as square of frequency
(c) Base-Emitter Junction is forward biased and
(d) is constant with frequency Base-Collector Junction is reverse-biased.
35. What do we call the relation between auto- (d) Both the junctions are forward biased.
correlation and power spectral density? 44. The transfer characteristic of the different
(a) Einstein Theorem types of MOSFETs is shown below, where ID is
(b) Weiner Theorem drain current and VGS is the gate-source
(c) Weiner - Khintchin Theorem voltage, the correct combination of MOSFET
(d) No relation exist w.r.t to transfer characteristics is

Practice Set-4 46 YCT

 Type of MOSFET Transfer  1
characteristics  Vr (s) = 2  is less than 0.01 rad/sec?
 s 
(P) p-Channel
Enhancement
MOSFET
(Q) p-Channel
Depletion
MOSFET
(R) n-Channel (a) 5 (b) 7
Enhancement (c) 10 (d) 14
(S) n-channel 51. A second order control system has a damping
Depletion ratio as 0.6 and natural frequency of
MOSFET oscillations as 11 rad/sec. What will be the
(a) P-4, Q-2, R-1, S-3 (b) P-3, Q-2, R-4, S-1 damped frequency of oscillation?
(c) P-1, Q-3, R-2, S-4 (d) P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-1 (a) 2.6 rad/sec (b) 6.9 rad/sec
45. The trans conductance 'gm' of a JFET is equal (c) 5.6 rad/sec (d) 8.8 rad/sec
2I 2 52. The final value theorem is used to find the
(a) − DSS (b) I DSS I DS (a) steady state value of the system output
VP VP (b) initial value of the system output
2I DS I DSS  VGS  (c) transient behavior of the system output
(c) − (d) 1 −  (d) none of these
VP VP  VP 
53. Thevenin's equivalent circuit of the network
46. Which of the following describe the correct shown in the given figure, between terminals T1
properties of an emitter follower circuit ? and T2 is
1. It is a voltage series feedback circuit.
2. It is a current series feedback circuit.
3. Its voltage gain is less than unity.
4. Its output impedance is very low.
Select the correct answer from the codes given
below:
(a) 1, 3 and 4 (b) 2, 3 and 4 (a)
(c) 2 and 3 only (d) 2 and 4 only
47. If power is measured using two-wattmeter
method with unity power factor, then : (b)
(a) one of the wattmeters will read zero
(b) both the wattmeters will have the same
reading (c)
(c) the reading of one wattmeter will be two
times the other
(d) one of the wattmeters will read negative (d)
48. The number of 3-to-8 decoders needed to wire
up a 4-to-16 decoder is:
54. A current of 5 A passes along the axis of a
(a) 0 (b) 2
cylinder of 5 cm radius. The flux density at the
(c) 1 (d) 3
surface of the cylinder is:
49. A multiplexer combinational circuit has n data
(a) 2µT (b) 20µΤ
input, m control inputs and one output, then
(a) 2m = n (b) 2n = m (c) 200µΤ (d) 2000µΤ
n
(c) m = 2 (d) n2 = m 55. The maximum transmission efficiency of a
sinusoidal AM signal is-
50. Consider the speed control system shown in the
(a) 21.8% (b) 33.3%
figure wherein the inner loop corresponds to
motor back e.m.f, the controller is an (c) 66.6% (d) 84.6%
integrator with gain K observes that the load is 56. The directivity of a λ/2 long wire antenna is
inertia only. What is the value of K for which (a) 1.5 (b) 1.66
steady-state error to unit ramp input (c) 2 (d) 2
Practice Set-4 47 YCT
57. Which one of the following interrupts is both 67. Which shift register counter requires the most
level and edge sensitive? decoding circuitry?
(a) RST 7.5 (b) RST 5.5 (a) Johnson Counter (b) Ring Counter
(c) TRAP (d) INTR (c) Ripple Counter (d) MOD counter
58. In decimal-dotted notation of an IP address, 68. Which one of the following scheme is a digital
the maximum value of each component can be modulation technique?
(a) 255 (b) 256 (a) Pulse code modulation
(c) 512 (d) 1024 (b) On-off keying
59. The counter e.m.f. of a d.c. motor (c) Pulse width modulation
(a) often exceeds the supply voltage (d) Delta modulation
(b) aids the applied voltage 69. If x (n) = δ(n), then the ROC of X (z) is
(c) helps in energy conversion (a) z > 1 (b) z < 1
(d) regulates its armature voltage (c) Entire z-plane (d) None of the above
60. Width of energy bands depends on which of the 70. The equivalent inductance of two inductances
following? with mutual coupling in between connected in
(a) Temperature parallel having the following configuration is
(b) Pressure given by
(c) Relative freedom of electrons in the crystal
(d) Mass of atom in the material
61. Inverse F.T of 1 is ______
(a) u(t) (b) δ(t)
(c) r(t) (d) t 2 / 2
62. A waveguide operated below cut-off frequency
can be used as L1L 2 + M 2 L1L 2 − M 2
(a) (b)
(a) A phase shifter L1 + L 2 − 2M L1 + L 2 + 2M
(b) An attenuator L1L 2 + M 2 L1L 2 − M 2
(c) An isolator (c) (d)
L1 + L 2 + 2M L1 + L 2 − 2M
(d) None of the above
63. Silicon has a preference in IC technology 71. "Time-varying magnetic field will always
produce an electric field".
because
The given statement is true for:
(a) it is an indirect semiconductor
(a) Maxwell's third equation
(b) it is a covalent semiconductor
(b) Maxwell's first equation
(c) it is an elemental semiconductor
(c) Maxwell's second equation
(d) of the availability of nature oxides SiO2 (d) Maxwell's fourth equation
64. The oscillator with the best frequency stability 72. The carrier of an AM signal obtained by
and accuracy is sinusoidal modulation to a depth of modulation
(a) Hartley oscillator equal to 1, carries.
(b) Colpitts Oscillator (a) 33.33% power (b) 50% power
(c) Tickler feedback oscillator (c) 66.66% power (d) 100% power
(d) Crystal controlled oscillator 73. De-emphasis circuit is used
(a) To attenuate high frequencies
65. The following figure is a circuit diagram
(b) To attenuated low frequencies
of . (c) To attenuated midband frequencies
(d) None of the above
74. Directive gain of an antenna is
(a) Inversely proportional to the beam width
(b) Directly proportional to the beam width
(c) independent of the beamwidth
(a) comparator (b) difference amplifier (d) always constant
(c) voltage follower (d) inverting amplifier 75. When compared with an RS232C serial port,
the USB (Universal Serial Bus)
66. CRO works in (a) Support a lower range of peripherals
(a) Frequency domain (b) Supports a faster transfer rate
(b) Time domain (c) Does not support 'Hot plug-ability'
(c) Digital domain (d) Controller in PC can not detect the presence
(d) None of these or absence of USB devices
Practice Set-4 48 YCT
76. The property of material by which it can be 89. To realize a 512k×8 memory, how many 32k×4
rolled into sheets is called− memory chips are needed?
(a) Plasticity (b) Malleability (a) 64 (b) 32 (c) 16 (d) 14
(c) Ductility (d) Elasticity 90. Of the following, which is the binary equivalent
77. In a rectangular cavity resonator having a = of the decimal number 368 ?
width, b = height and d = length for a > b < d, (a) 101110000 (b) 110110000
the dominant mode is (c) 111010000 (d) 111100000
(a) TE101 (b) TM101 91. The number of bits per sample in a PCM is
(c) TE110 (d) TM110 increased from 8 to 16. The bandwidth of the
78. A bistable multivibrator has………… system will increase
(a) Two stable states (b) One stable state (a) 8 times (b) 2 times
(c) No stable state (d) None of the above (c) Half times (d) 28 times
79. LVDT is a 92. Quadrature multiplexing
(a) Pressure transducer (a) the same as FDM
(b) Displacement transducer (b) the same as TDM
(c) Velocity transducer (c) a combination of FDM and TDM
(d) Acceleration transducer (d) quite different from FDM and TDM
80. Which among the bipolar logic families is 93. Which one of the following is capable of giving
specifically adopter for high speed the highest data speed?
applications? (a) coaxial cable link
(a) Diode Transistor Logic (DTL) (b) Microwave LOS link
(b) Transistor Transistor Logic (TTL) (c) Microwave satellite system
(c) Emitter Coupled Logic (ECL) (d) Optical Fiber System
(d) Integrated Injection Logic (I2L) 94. The colour TV system to be adopted in India is
81. The most widely used bipolar technology for (a) NTSC (b) SECAM
digital ICs
(c) PAL-B (d) CCIR
(a) DTL (b) TTL (c) ECL (d) None
95. The computer program which converts
82. Find the skin depth for attenuation constant of statements written in high level language to
0.4 units. object code is known as
(a) 2 (b) 2.5 (c) 5 (d) 1.5 (a) Assembler (b) Compiler
83. Decoding, storage and interpretation are the (c) Disassembler (d) Operating system
process steps of ______ . 96. A voltage v(t) = 173 sin (314t + 10º) is applied
(a) Transmission (b) Reception to a circuit. It causes a current flow described
(c) Filtration (d) Modulation by
84. For M equally likely messages, the average i(t) = 14.14 sin (314 t – 20º)
amount of information H is The average power delivered is nearly
(a) H = log10 M (b) H = log2 M (a) 2500 W (b) 2167 W
(c) H = log10 M2 (d) H = 2 log10 M (c) 1500 W (d) 1060 W
85. A radar transmitter has a PRF of 1500 PPS 97. Which of the following is not an internet
and a pulse width of 1 micro second. Its duty Service Provider (ISP) in India?
cycle is (a) BSNL
(a) 0.0075 (b) 0.015 (b) Tata Consultancy Services (TCS)
(c) 0.0015 (d) 0.00075 (c) Reliance
86. The interface chip used for data transmission (d) Airtel
between 8086 and a 16 bit ADC is 98. The use of ________ instruments is merely
(a) 8259 (b) 8255 confined laboratories as standardizing
(c) 8253 (d) 8251 instruments.
87. The given equivalent circuit belongs to: (a) Absolute (b) Indicating
(c) Recording (d) Integrating
99. Which of the following components convert
fixed DC to variable DC?
(a) Rectifiers (b) Choppers
(c) Cycloconverters (d) Inverters
(a) PIN diode (b) Varactor diode 100. For small value of gain k, the root must be
(c) Tunnel diode (d) Zener diode (a) at origin
88. A BWO is based on the (b) at infinity
(a) Coaxial magnetron (b) TWT (c) far away from the poles of the loops transfer
(c) Rising sun magnetron functions
(d) Crossed field amplifier (d) near the poles of the transfer function
Practice Set-4 49 YCT
 Answer Key
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (d)
11. (a) 12. (c) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20.(d)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (d) 25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (b) 28. (c) 29. (d) 30. (d)
31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (b) 34. (d) 35. (c) 36. (c) 37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (c) 42. (c) 43. (d) 44. (c) 45. (b) 46. (a) 47. (b) 48. (b) 49. (b) 50. (d)
51. (d) 52. (a) 53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (b) 56. (b) 57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (c) 60. (a)
61. (b) 62. (b) 63. (d) 64. (d) 65. (c) 66. (b) 67. (a) 68.(b) 69. (c) 70.(d)
71. (a) 72. (c) 73. (a) 74. (a) 75. (b) 76. (b) 77. (a) 78. (a) 79. (b) 80.(c)
81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (b) 84. (b) 85. (c) 86. (b) 87. (b) 88. (b) 89. (b) 90. (a)
91. (b) 92. (d) 93. (d) 94. (c) 95. (b) 96. (d) 97. (b) 98. (a) 99. (b) 100. (d)

Solution
1. (b) The concentration of minority carriers in an X1 = Y1
extrinsic semiconductor under equilibrium is inversely X 2 = Y 1⊕ Y 2
proportional to the doping concentration. X 3 = Y 1⊕ Y 2 ⊕ Y 3
According to mass action law- Let Y1 = 1, Y2 = 1, Y3 = 1, then
n.p. = n i2 X1 = 1, X2 = 0, X3 = 0
n = concentration of electrons So, the above conversion is binary to gray code.
p = concentration of holes 5. (c)
ni = intrinsic carriers The VLSI/ULSI (Very Large Scale Integration/Ultra
In n - type semiconductor Large Scale Integration) technique is used fabricate
minority Holes concentration CMOS.
p = n i2 /ND 6. (b) A TRIAC is similar to two back to back (anti-
parallel) connected SCRS. A TRIAC is bipolar and
ND = concentration of donor impurity bilateral power electronic device.
2. (b) 7. (c) From block diagram reduction, G1 and G2 are in
parallel, So G = G1 + G2

C G1 + G 2
=
R 1 + ( G1 + G 2 )( H 1 )
Operation –
C G1 + G 2
If D1 = forward bias =
R 1 + G1H1 + G 2 H1
D2 = Reverse bias
Then D1 = diode will be allow the current flow. 1 n=0
If D1 = Reverse bias 8. (b) δ(n) = 
0 other wise
D2 = Forward bias
Then, D2 diode will be allow the current flow. 1 n = 0,1, 2,3
u(n) = 
Therefore, current I contain all harmonics of frequency. 0 n<0
3. (b) 1 n = 1, 2,3, 4
Signal to noise ratio is highest in PPM. u(n – 1) = 
0 n <1
4. (b)
δ (n) = u (n) – u (n – 1)
9. (c) Given, Bit rate (Rb) = 34Mbps
Rb (R )
The baud rate of QPSK = = b
log 2 m 2
34
=
2
= 17Mbps

Practice Set-4 1 YCT

10. (d) 1 1 
Given that,  , ,1
2 2 
Resonant frequency (f0) = 1.5 MHz Reciprocals of these above number (2,2,1)
Q-factor = 150
17. (a)
1.5 × 106 Given
∴ Bandwidth = Hz
150 θ
= 10 kHz sin
lim 2
11. (a) θ→0 θ
Noise figure, F=
(S / N ) Input 1
On multiply and divide by
( S / N ) Ouput 2
S S 1 θ
Noise figure in dB, F =   .dB −   .dB sin
N N = lim 2 2
θ→0 θ
F = 21.4dB – 16dB
2
F = 5.4dB θ
sin
12. (c) 1 2
= lim
In a GSM cellular Network, the 148 data frame stars 2 θ→0 θ
and ends with three 0 bits. The purpose of these three 2
bits is for frame delineation. We know that
13. (d) sin x
WAIT states are used to interface slow peripheral to the lim =1 …(i)
x →0 x
processor. WAIT affects no flags and it enables the test
From equation (i) we get
input pin to go low.
1
14. (a) = ×1 = 0.5
Minimum shift keying is similar to continuous phase 2
frequency shift keying or minimum shift keying is a 18. (b)
special type of continuous PFSK. Its peak frequency Name Frequency Range
deviation is equal to 1/4 the bit rate. Very low frequency (VLF) 0.003 MHz - 0.03MHz
15. (b) Low frequency (LF) 0.03 MHz - 0.3 MHz
A source of EMF can be a cell, battery or generator. Medium frequency (MF) 0.3 MHz - 3 MHz
The voltage (emf) of a lead acid cell varies from 2.3 High frequency (HF) 3 MHz - 30 MHz
Very high frequency (VHF) 30 MHz - 300 MHz
volts when the cell is fully charged to 1.9 volts when
Ultra-high frequency 300 MHz - 3000 MHz
the cell is fully discharged. A voltmeter connected to
(UHF)
the battery terminals of discarded battery containing
Super- high frequency 3000 MHz - 30, 000MHz
some liquid will still show some reading. (SHF)
16. (c) Extra-high frequency 30,000 MHz - 3, 00, 000
(EHF) MHz
19. (b)
We know-
1 2
E=mv
2
Where- E → Energy of electron
m → Mass of electron
The coordinates of the intercepts made by the plane v → Velocity of electron
along the three crystallographic axis (x,y,z axis) 2E
v2 =
a a m
Here given = , y = , z = a
2 2 2 × 8.8 × 10−19
The intercepts as multiples of the unit cell dimensions v2 =
9.1× 10−31
or lattice parameter along axis.
v =1.93 × 1012
2

a 1 a 1 1
= , = , a× =1 v = 1.39 ×106m/s
2×a 2 2× a 2 a
Practice Set-4 51 YCT
20. (d) Basic gates - AND, OR, NOT
LED (Light emitting diode)- Universal gates -NAND, NOR
this diode emit light when connection is in forward bias Special purpose gates - Ex-OR and Ex-NOR
• LCD (Liquid crystal display)-LCD panels use 27. (b)
reflective technology (light reflector) An insulated-gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) is a 3-
• Optocoupler - optocouplers, also called opto- terminal power semiconductor device primarily used as
isolated, are semiconductor devices that isolated an electronic switch.
unwanted signal by optically couple circuit. 28. (c)
• Photo diode- this device that convert light into an An SCR is turned off when its turn-off time is less than
electrical signal when connection is reverse bias.
circuit turn-off time.
21. (a) Circuit turn off time- It is defined as the time during
It has voltage series negative feedback. Its voltage gain which a reverse voltage is applied across a thyristor
is less than 1 and current gain is high, due to its high
during its commutation process.
input impedance and low output impedance, its
SCR turn off time < circuit turn off time.
impedance matching. Common collector is also known
If the circuit turn off time is less than the SCR turn off
as emitter follower.
time then forward bias voltage gets applied across even
22. (b)
before the thyristor could reason its forward blocking
Rise time of an amplifier is measured with respect to
time, i.e. , capabilities and gets turn off again or the device turn
off is unsuccessful.
0.35
tr = 29. (d)
B.W.
1
tr ∝
B.W.
Since bandwidth is taken to be the upper 3dB cut-off
frequency.
Hence Bandwidth ≈ higher cut off frequency.
23. (a)
d-Arsonval current = 50 µAmp
1 1
Sensitivity = = Shifting the take off point after the block.
I FSD 50 × 10−6
1000000
= = 20000Ω / V
50
24. (d)
PMMC → Linear scale over the entire range as θ∝ I
Thermocouple → Very good high frequency response. 30. (d)
Moving Iron → Square law type scale as θ∝ I 2 Fourier transform of u(t) is given →
1 + sgn ( t )
Electrostatic type → Mainly used for high voltage we know that, u(t) =
2
measurement θ∝ V 2
1 sgn ( t )
25. (b) u(t) = +
2 2
The Karnaugh (K) map is a method of simplifying
Boolean algebra expressions. Fourier transform of 1 ↔ 2 π δ ( ω )
No. of Variables = 2n 2
No. of cells in K-map = 22n Fourier transform of sgn (t) ↔
jω
26. (d)
2
Universal gates are -
2πδ ( ω) +
NAND gate and NOR gate. jω
• All gates are implement by NAND gate and NOR u ( t ) ←
F.T.
→
2
gate.
1
u ( t ) ←
F.T.
→πδ ( ω) +
jω

Practice Set-4 52 YCT

31. (a) 36. (c)
The internet is an example of a packet switched
network. Packet-switched described the type of
network in which relatively small units of data called
packets are routed through network based on the
destination address contained within each packet.
37. (a)
In register indirect addressing mode, the data to be
operated is available inside a memory location and that
memory location is indirectly specified by a register
pair.
Apply KVL in loop ABCDA
38. (d)
I I I
V = × 1 + ×1 + ×1 RAM - Random Access Memory
3 6 3 Read and Write operations can be done simultaneous in
I I I RAM computer memory.
V= + +
3 6 3 The access time of all memory locations in RAM is the
1 1 1 same, that is the memory in which the data from a
Req = + +
3 6 3 memory word. The time taken to write from read to
memory word, does not depend on physical location is
5
R eq = Ω called RAM. It is a volatile memory.
6
39. (b)
32. (c) Eddy current loss
Given circuit diagram- Pe = K e Bmax
2
.t 2 .f 2 .V Watt
Basically eddy current loss in a material is circulating
current.
The process of lamination involves dividing the core
into thin layers held together by insulating materials.
Time constant - Due to lamination minimize losses due to eddy currents.
τ = RC 40. (c)
τ = 10×103×2×10–6 Diamagnetic materials–The relative permeability of
τ = 20×10–3 these materials is less than unity. They repel the lines of
τ = 20msec force slightly.
e.g. Bismuth, silver, copper and hydrogen.
33. (b)
41. (c)
F=x+y
Let C= ( cos5θ − isin 5θ )
2

∂F ∂F
∇F = ˆi + ˆj we know that –
∂x ∂y
( cos θ − i sin θ )
n
∂ ∂ = cos nθ − i sin nθ
= ( x + y)i + ( x + y) j
∂x dy C = cos10θ − isin10θ = (cos θ + i sinθ)-10
42. (c)
∇.F = ˆi + j The waveguide modes are usually excited from a signal
34. (d) source through a coaxial cable.
White Noise consists of signal of all frequency. 43. (d)
Mode JE JC Application
Random signal one considered as white noise if they are
Saturation Forward Forward 'ON' Switch
observed to have a flat Spectrum. It's spectral density bias bias
N0 Cut-off Reverse Reverse 'OFF'
remains constant. PSD of white noise = Sx (F) =
2 bias bias Switch
Active Forward Reverse Amplifier
35. (c)
bias bias
The relation between auto-correlation and power Reverse Reverse Forward Attenuator.
spectral density is called Weiner-Khintchin Theorem. Active bias bias
Practice Set-4 53 YCT
44. (c) P-1, Q-3, R-2, S-4 uses voltage-series feedback. Its input resistance is high
n- channel enhancement MOSFET–Transfer and output resistance is low. This makes it an ideal
characteristics circuit for impedance matching.
47. (b)
W1 = W2
Then,
 W − W1 
tan φ = 3  2 
n-channel depletion MOSFET– Transfer characteristics  W1 + W2 
 W − W1 
= 3 1 
 W1 + W1 
tan φ = 00
P-channel enhancement MOSFET's Transfer φ = 00
characteristics
So, cos φ = cos 00 = 1
48. (b)
Given decoder To be implemented Required
decoder
P-channel depletion MOSFET's Transfer characteristics 3×8 4×16 2+0= 2
2×4 3×8 2+0 = 2
3×8 6×64 8+1= 9
4×16 6×64 4+0 = 4
4×16 8×256 16+1= 17
49. (b)
No. of data input = n
45. (b) No. of control input = m
The drain current in saturation for a JFET is given by: then m = 2 n
2
 V  50. (d)
I D = I DSS  1 − GS  ..........(i)
 VP 

∂I D 2I  V 
= DSS  1 − GS  ....(ii)
∂VGS VP  VP 
2
 VGS  ID
1 −  =
 VP  I DSS 10
s 10
 VGS  1D CLTF = =
1 + × 0.1 s + 1
1 − = 10
 VP  I DSS s
put in equation (ii)
2IDSS ID
gm =
VP I DSS

2 I2DSS I D
gm =
| VP | IDSS

2
gm = I DSS .I D
| VP |
46. (a)
Common collector circuit is also known as emitter 10K
follower. Emitter follower's voltage gain is slightly less OLTF G ( s ) H ( s ) =
s ( s + 1)
than unity. Its current gain is high. Emitter follower
Practice Set-4 54 YCT
 10K For Vth-
K v = lim s G ( s ) H ( s ) = lim = 10K
s→0 s →0 s +1 I1 = 0 for open circuit-
1
ess = < 0.01
Kv
1
< 0.01
10K
K >10 equivalent circuit Vth = 40V
51. (d)
Given that-
ωn = 11rad/sec. 54. (b)
ξ = 0.6 Given that-
We know that- I = 5A
r = 5cm = 5×10–2 m
ωd = ωn 1 − ξ2 =11 1 − 0.62 =11× 0.8 flux density at the surface of density
ωd = 8.8rad / sec µ I
(B) = 0
2πr
52. (a)
Final value theorem is used to get steady state value of 4π× 10−7 × 5
=
the system output. 2 × π× 5 ×10−2
Initial value theorem → B = 2×10–5 T
If L {f ( t )} = F ( s ) then lim f ( t ) = lims F ( s ) B = 20µT
t →0 s →∞
55. (b)
Final value theorem → For maximum
lim f ( t ) = lims F ( s ) modulating index (m) = 1
t →∞ s→0

53. (a) m2 1
Power efficiency (η) = =
2 + m2 2 +1
1
= = 33.33%
3
56. (b)
For Rth- The directivity of a λ/2 long wire antenna is 1.66.
57. (c)
TRAP is a non-maskable interrupt. It consists of both
level as well as edge triggering and is used in critical
power failure conditions.
58. (a)
Dotted decimal notations are used to make string easily
Vth 1 in which periods or dots separate four decimal numbers
R th = =
I2 I2 from 0 to 255, describing 32 bits.
I2 = –I1 ………………………..(i) 59. (c)
Apply KVL in outer loop The counter e.m.f. of a d.c. motor helps in energy
−1 − 10 ×1.8I1 − 6I1 = 0 conversion.
• The electrical work required by the motor for causing
−24I1 = 1 the current against the back e.m.f. is converted into
1 mechanical energy and that energy is induced in the
I1 = −
24 armature of the motor.
From equation (i)- • Energy conversion in DC motor is possible only
1 because of the back e.m.f.
∴ I2 = 60. (a)
24
Energy bandgap is also known as forbidden gap, No
1 1
R th = = = 24Ω electrons stay in this band, valence electrons pass
I 2 1/ 24 through this gap.
Practice Set-4 55 YCT
 1 68. (b)
EG ∝
Temperature In this question
Digital modulation Technique is
this shows as T ↑→ E G ↓
Also E G (T) = (E G 0 − β0 T) eV
Where E g0 → Energy bandgap at 0ºK
β → Material constant eV/K
61. (b)
F(ω) =1
Take inverse fourier transform
f(t) = δ(t) Given all option are digital modulation technique
62. (b) schemes but the most appropriate option amongst them
An attenuator can be used as waveguide operated below is ON - OFF keying which is also known as ASK.
cutoff frequency. Attenuation is of precision and Amplitude Shift keying (ASK) is a form of Amplitude
variable type and its output around (0-50dB) modulation that represents, digital data as variations in
range. the amplitude of a carrier wave.
63. (d) 69. (c)
Silicon has a preference in IC technology because of x (n) = δ(n)
the availability of nature oxide SiO2. ∞

64. (d) X(z) = ∑ x(n).z − n

−∞
The oscillator with the best frequency stability and
accuracy is crystal controlled oscillator. Crystal X (z) = 1
oscillator parameters doesn't change with temperature, Hence ROC will be entire z plane.
the output frequency is highly stable. 70. (d)
65. (c)

V+ = Vin V– = Vout In this figure, the direction of current in this coil will be
Due to virtual short, same.
V+ = V– So, the mutual coupling is associative in nature.
∴ Vin = Vout  L L − M2 
Leq =  1 2 
Output voltage follows the input voltage  L1 + L 2 − 2M 
∴ voltage follower
71. (a)
66. (b)
From third equation of Maxwell a time varying
CRO stands for a cathode ray oscilloscope. It is magnetic field always produces a electric field.
typically divided into four sections which are display,
∂B
vertical controller horizontal controller and trigger. ∇×E = −
∂t
CRO work in time domain.
The negative sign indicate that the induced emf always
67. (a) opposes the time-varying magnetic flux.
Johnson counter is a modified ring counter where the 72. (c)
invented output from the last flip-flop connected to the
In amplitude modulation the information changes the
input in the first. This register cycles through a
amplitude of the carrier wave without changing its
sequence of bit platform. The mode of Johnson counter
frequency or phase.
is 2n if n flip-flop are used. Main advantage of Johnson
 2   2 
counter is that it needs half the number compared to the PC = PT  2 
= PT   = 0.6666 PT
ring counter for same MOD.  2+µ   2 +1 

Practice Set-4 56 YCT

 0.666PT 80. (c)
PC = × 100
PT Emitter coupled logic (ECL) are used for high speed
application. Hence there is no saturation problem
= 66.66% Power
occurs. In electronic emitter-coupled logic is a high-
73. (a)
speed integrated circuit bipolar transistor logic family.
De-emphasis circuit is used to attenuate high ECL uses an overdriven bipolar junction transistor
frequencies. differential amplifier with single ended input and
74. (a) limited emitter current to avoid the saturated region of
Directivity is the measure of the concentration of an operation and its slow turn off behaviour.
antenna radiation pattern in a particular direction.
81. (b)
Directive gain of an antenna is Inversely proportional to
TTL- Transistor transistor logic (TTL) is the most
the beam width.
widely used bipolar technology for manufacturing
75. (b)
digital integrated circuits. This is mainly due to the fact
USB RS232C
that it was one of the first to be developed. Because of
• Here PC can detect • Here PC cannot detect
their widespread use, TTL chips are also the least
the process. the process.
expensive and most accessible of the logic types within
• It support hot plug • It does not support the category of TTL gates there several different
ability. HOT plug ability. performance classes. No of fan out of TTL is 10 and
• Comparatively higher • Comparatively slower noise margin about 0.4 V.
transfer rate. transfer rate.
82. (b)
E.g.- 12 mbps E.g-
1
• USB cannot with 20 K band [Band = 5C] Skin depth (δ) = ( α = 0.4, given )
higher range of • It can connect with α
peripherals. lower range of 1
= = 2.5
peripheral. 0.4
RS-Recommended standard for serial communication. 83. (b)
C - Virsion (3rd)
Decoding, storage and interpretation are the process
76. (b) steps of Reception.
Malleability is the physical property of a material that is
Step are used in the reception side are-
formed by rolling thin sheets without breaking. In this, a
(i) Inverse transducer
material is made by knocking, pressing, rotating.
Examples of malleable metals are gold and silver, (ii) Demultiplexer
which can be molded into any form these processes. (iii) Decoder
77. (a) (iv) Storage device
In a rectangular cavity resonator having a = width, b = 84. (b)
height and d = length for a > b < d, the dominant mode For M equally likely messages, the average amount of
is TE101. information H is
78. (a) H = log2M
85. (c)
Duty cycle = Pulse width × PRF
Given that - Pulse width = 1 µs
PRF = 1500 PPS
Duty cycle = 10 −6 × 1500 = 0.0015
A type of multivibrator whose output consists of 2
86. (b)
stable states is known as Bistable multivibrator. The
The interface chip used for data transmission between
circuit switches from one stable state to the other when
8086 and a 16 bit ADC is 8255 (programmable
an appropriate trigger pulse is applied.
peripheral inter phase).
79. (b)
LVDT is an acronym for Linear Variable Differential • 8253 = Programmable timers
Transformer LVDT is common type of Displacement • 8259 - PIC controller
transducer for electrical signal (current or voltage). • 8251 - USART
Practice Set-4 57 YCT
87. (b) Thinner and sturdier
Varactor diode is a type of diode whose internal More Flexibility
capacitance varies with respect to the reverse voltage. Demerit of optical fiber communication-
Varactor diode known by other names as varicap,
(1) High manufacturing cost
voltcap, voltage variable capacitance.
(2) Extra care needed during installation
94. (c)
Phase alternating line is a encoding system for analog
television used in broadcast television system has been
most widely adopted in India.
95. (b)
ε0 A 1
C= C∝ The computer program which converts statements
d Vr written in high level language to object code is known
as compiler.
88. (b)
A backward wave oscillator (BWO) is based on
traveling wave tube (TWT).
89. (b) 96. (d)
memory = 512 k × 8 Given
memory chip storage = 32 k × 4 Vm = 173 volt φ = 20 + 10
512 ×1024 × 8
no. of chips = I m = 14.14 A φ = 30
32 × 1024 × 4
no. of chips = 32 Vm Im
Average power (Pav) = × cos φ
90. (a) 2 2
2 368 0
173 14.14
2 184 0 = × × cos30
2 2
2 92 0
173 14.14 3
2 46 0 = × ×
2 23 1 ( 368 )10 = (101110000 )2 2 2 2
2 11 1 Pav = 1060 W
2 5 1
97. (b)
2 2 0
Tata Consultancy Services (TCS) is not an internet
1 Service Provider (ISP) in India, others like BSNL,
91. (b) Reliance, Airtel, provide internet services.
No. of levels for n-bits = 2n 98. (a)
PCM Band width = n.fs The use of absolute instruments is merely confined
for n = 8 BW = 8 fs laboratories as standardizing instrument. Absolute
instruments-In these type of instruments, the quantity
for n = 16 BW = 16 fs
being measured can only be measured by observing the
so the bandwidth is increased by two times.
output indicated by the instrument.
92. (d)
Ex-Ammeter, voltmeter, pressure gauge etc.
Quadrature multiplexing is quite different from FDM
99. (b)
and TDM because it is the system where same carrier
A chopper is an electronics device that converts fixed
frequency is used for two different double sideband
dc input to a variate output voltage directly. It is also
signals (DSB). known as dc to dc conveters and dc transformer because
93. (d) of similar to the transformer of the ac circuit, choppers
Advantage of Fiber optic cables- are used to step up and step down the output dc value.
Higher data speed 100. (d)
Longer distances For small value of gain k, the root must be near the
Better Reliability poles of the transfer function.

Practice Set-4 58 YCT

 PRACTICE SET - 5
1. The resistivity of a uniformly doped n-type 9. Coherent demodulation of FSK signal can be
silicon sample is 0.5Ω – cm. If the electron detected using
mobility ( µ n ) is 1250 cm2/V-sec and the charge (a) correlation receiver
(b) bandpass filters and envelope detectors
of an electron is 1.6×10–19 Coulomb, the donor
impurity concentration (ND) in the sample is (c) matched filter
(a) 2×1016/cm3 (b) 1×1016/cm3 (d) discriminator detection
15
(c) 2.5×10 /cm 3
(d) 2×1015/cm3 10. In an RLC parallel circuit the impedance at
2. The output DC voltage of a full-wave rectifier resonance is
is (a) ∞ (b) minimum
2V V (c) maximum (d) zero
(a) Vdc = m − Idc R f (b) Vdc = m − Idc R f 11. In a communication system, the signal power is
π π
13 dBm and noise power is –1 dBm. The SNR
(c) Vdc = 2Vm − Idc R f (d) Vdc = Vm − Idc R f
will be:
3. If link transmits 2000 frames per second, and (a) 14 dB (b) –13 dB
each slot has 16 bits, then the transmission rate (c) 12 dBm (d) 12 dB
of circuit of TDM is-
12. The RAKE receiver is essentially a diversity
(a) 16 kbps (b) 2 kbps
receiver designed specially for
(c) 8 kbps (d) 32 kbps (a) TDMA (b) FDMA
4. The gray code of number 6 is (c) CDMA (d) OFDM
(a) 1100 (b) 1001
13. In memory mapped I/O 8085 µp can access
(c) 0101 (d) 0110
memory space
5. Which of following devices are VLSI?
(a) 64 KB
(a) Microprocessor Pentium–4
(b) SL 100 BJT (b) 32 KB
(c) Waveguide (c) 256 B
(d) Optical fibre (d) depends on ALU capacity
6. An inductor is connected in series with SCR to 14. The spectrum of BFSK may be viewed as the
protect it from sum of
(a) Excessive high voltage (a) Two ASK spectra (b) Two PSK spectra
(b) Excessive high dv/dt (c) Two FSK spectra (d) Two QPSK
(c) excessive high di/dt 15. The most common used primary cell is :
(d) Excessive large forward current (a) Lithium cell
7. Consider the following block diagram in the (b) Nickel – iron cell
figure. (c) Lead acid cell
(d) Nickel cadmium cell
16. Which of the following materials does not have
covalent bonds?
b (a) metals (b) diamond
C(s) (c) organic polymers (d) silicon
The transfer function is
R(s) 17. The value of cot 1º + cot 89º is
G1G 2 (a) 0 (b) 1
(a) (b) G1G2+G1+1
1 + G1G 2 (c) 2/sin 2º (d) None of these
G1 18. A waveguide section in microwave circuits will
(c) G1G2+G2+1 (d) act as a :
1 + G1G 2
(a) Low-pass filter
8. Transfer function is a ––– system (b) Band pass filter
(a) LTI (b) NLTV (c) Band stop filter
(c) Any system (d) Can't predict (d) High pass filter
Practice Set-5 59 YCT
19. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct Codes:
answer using the codes given below the lists: A B C D
List-I List-II (a) 4 1 3 2
A. Drift current 1. Law of (b) 3 4 1 2
conservation of
(c) 1 2 3 4
charge
B. Einstein's equation 2. Electric field (d) 4 3 2 1
C. Diffusion current 3. Thermal voltage 23. A voltmeter reads 40 V on its 100 V range and
D. Continuity equation 4. Concentration an ammeter reads 75 mA on its 150 mA range
gradient in a circuit. Both the instruments are
Codes: guaranteed ±2% accuracy on FSD. The
A B C D limiting error in the measured power is
(a) 2 1 4 3 (a) 4 % (b) 5 %
(b) 4 3 2 1 (c) 9 % (d) 12 %
(c) 4 1 2 3 24. The principle of operation of Q-meter is based
(d) 2 3 4 1
on
20. Match List-I (Diode) with (List-II)
(a) Self inductance
(Application) and select the correct answer
using the codes given below the lists: (b) Mutual inductance
List-I List-II (c) Series resonance
A. Gunn diode 1. Mixers (d) Parallel resonance
B. Zener diode 2. Microwave 25. Which law/theorem states the following
oscillators statements?
C. Varactor diode 3. Frequency A+B=B+A
modulation A.B=B.A
D. Schottky diode 4. Voltage (a) Distributive law
comparison (b) Associative law
Codes: (c) Commutative law
A B C D (d) De Morgan's Theorems
(a) 2 4 3 1 26. The Boolean function Y = AB + CD is to be
(b) 3 1 2 4 realized using only 2-input NAND gates. The
(c) 2 1 3 4 minimum number of gates required is
(d) 3 4 2 1 (a) 2 (b) 3
21. In the circuit, current gain of the ideal (c) 4 (d) 5
transistor, is 10. The operating point of the 27. How is the GTO turned off ?
transistor (VCC, IC) is (a) By using a commutation circuit
(b) By applying reverse gate pulse
(c) By using a latch circuit
(d) By reverse anode current pulse
28. Which type of protection is provided for SCR
by connecting the snubber circuit across it?
dv
(a) protection
dt
(a) 40 V, 4 A (b) 40 V, 5 A di
(b) protection
(c) 0 V, 4 A (d) 15 V, 4 A dt
22. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct (c) Over-voltage protection
answer using the codes given below the lists: (d) Over-current protection
List-I List-II 29. The signal flow graph of a feed back control
A. RC coupling 1. Higher voltage gain & system is given below. The transfer function
impedance matching C(s)
of the system is,
B. Inductive 2. Ability to amplify dc and R(s)
coupling low frequency signals.
C. Transformer 3. Minimum possible
coupling non-linear distortion
D. Direct coupling 4. Low collector supply
voltages can be used
Practice Set-5 60 YCT
 G1G 2 − G 3 G1G 2 − G 3 (c) 3E  X 3  − E 3 [ X ]
(a) (b)
1 − G1H 1 + G1H
(d) 2E  X 3  + E 3 [ X ] − 3E [ X ] E  X 2 
G G + G3 G G + G3
(c) 1 2 (d) 1 2 36. Why neighboring stations are assigned
1 + G1H 1 − G1H
different frequencies in cellular system?
30. The Fourier transform of a rectangular pulse (a) To minimize interference
for a period (b) To minimize area
T T
t = − to t = is (c) To maximize throughput
2 2 (d) To maximize capacity
(a) a sinc function 37. Which one of the following registers of 8085
(b) a sine function microprocessor is not a part of programming
(c) a cosine function model?
(d) a sine-squared function
(a) Instruction register
31. A delta-connected network with its star
(b) Memory address register
equivalent is shown in the figure below. The
(c) Status register
resistance R1, R2 and R3 (in ohms) are
respectively. (d) Temporary data register
38. An I/O processor controls the flow of
information between
(a) Cache memory and I/O device
(b) Main memory and I/O devices
(c) Two I/O devices
(d) Cache and main memory
(a) 1.5, 3 and 9 (b) 3, 9 and 1.5
39. The power transformer is a
(c) 9, 3 and 1.5 (d) 3, 1.5 and 9
(a) Constant voltage device
32. Under steady state condition, the energy stored
(b) Constant main flux device
in the circuit is:
(c) Constant current device
(d) Constant power device
40. Which of the following magnetic materials has
the highest reluctance?
(a) Ferromagnetic (b) Paramagnetic
(c) Diamagnetic (d) None of the above
41. cosθ Can be represented by
e + iθ − e −iθ e iθ − e − iθ
(a) (b)
(a) 8.22 × 10–6J (b) 1.48 × 10–6J 2 2i
(c) 2.88 × 10 J (d) 4.81 × 10–4J e iθ + e − iθ e iθ + e − iθ
–4
(c) (d)
33. Two vectors V1 and V2 are orthogonal if their 2 2i
dot product is 2 2
 mπ   nπ 
(a) 1 (b) 0  +   − ω µε
2
42. γ=  represents the
(c) infinity (d) 0.5  a   b 
34. If R(τ) is the auto-correlation function of a real, propagation constant in a rectangular
wide-sense stationary random process, then waveguide for
which of the following is NOT true? (a) TE waves only (b) TM waves only
(a) R(τ) = R(–τ) (c) TEM waves (d) TE and TM waves
(b) |R(τ)| ≤ R(0) 43. If an emitter follower has re ' =10Ω and
(c) R(τ) = –R(–τ) re=90Ω, the voltage gain is approximately
(d) The mean square value of the process is R(0) (a) 0 (b) 0.5
35. If E denotes the expectation operator, then (c) 0.9 (d) 1
E [X – E(X)]3 of a random variable X is 44. In a JFET drain current is maximum when VGS
(a) E  X 3  − E 3 [ X ] is
(a) zero (b) negative
(b) E  X 3  + 2E 3 [ X ] − 3E [ X ] E  X 2  (c) positive (d) Vpinch off
Practice Set-5 61 YCT
45. Crossover distortion is the characteristic of 54. If the potential, V = 4x + 2 volts, the electric
(a) Class A output stage field is:
(b) Class B output stage (a) 6 V/m (b) 2 V/m
(c) Class AB output stage (c) 4 V/m (d) −4a x V / m
(d) Common basic output stage
55. The expression for total modulation index, in
46. The voltage gain of an amplifier is 100. A case of modulation by several sine waves is
negative feedback is applied with β = 0.03. The given by
overall gain of the amplifier is:
(where µ1, µ2 and µ3 and so on are the
(a) 70 (b) 25
modulation indexes of sine waves respectively)
(c) 99.97 (d) 3
47. The phenomenon of creeping occurs in (a) µ = µ1 + µ 2 + µ3 + ...
(a) Ammeter (b) Voltmeter
(c) Wattmeter (d) Energy meter (b) µ = µ12 + µ 22 + µ32 + ...
48. Identify logic function given below -
(c) µ = µ13 + µ32 + µ33 + ...
(d) µ = µ12 + µ 22 + µ32 + ...
56. ________is also known as Hertz antenna
(a) Half-wave dipole antenna
(b) Parabolic reflector antenna
(a) Half Adder (b) Full Adder (c) Horn antenna
(c) Half Subtractor (d) Multiplier (d) Concave plane antenna
49. A 12-bit parallel subtractor needs how many 57. SIM stands for:
Full Adders?
(a) Select interrupt mask
(a) 14 (b) 12
(b) Sorting interrupt mask
(c) 18 (d) 16
(c) Set interrupt mask
50. A PD controller is used to compensate a
(d) Signal interrupt mask
system. Compared to the uncompensated
system, the compensated system has 58. The default alignment of numeric values in
(a) a higher type number MS-Excel is
(b) reduced damping (a) Left (b) Right
(c) higher noise amplification (c) Centre (d) Justify
(d) larger transient overshoot 59. A single-phase induction motor has a slip 6%
51. The acceleration error constant is given by with respect to forward flux. Calculate the slip
(a) lim G(s) (b) lim sG(s) with respect to backward flux.
s→0 s→0
(a) 1.88 (b) 1.94
2 3
(c) lims G(s) (d) lims G(s) (c) 0.06 (d) 2
s →0 s →0
52. The Laplace Transform 60. The total current in a semiconductor is
(a) is a real valued function of a complex proportional to
argument (a) Gradient of Fermi potential
(b) is a complex valued function of a complex (b) Gradient of Fermi energy
argument (c) Gradient of surface potential
(c) is a real valued function of a real argument (d) Gradient of surface energy
(d) is a complex valued function of a real argument 61. Fourier series of an odd periodic function
53. The equivalent circuit of the following circuit contains only
is: (a) odd harmonics (b) even harmonics
(c) cosine terms (d) sine terms.
62. For a wave propagating in an air filled
rectangular waveguide,
(a) guided wavelength is never less than free
space wavelength
(b) wave impedance is never less than the free
space impedance
(c) TEM mode is possible if the dimensions of
the waveguide are properly chosen
(d) Propagation constant is always a real quantity
Practice Set-5 62 YCT
63. A diode in which the change in reverse bias 71. Which of the following Maxwell's equations
voltage varies the capacitance is called as represents Ampere's law with correction made
(a) Varactor diode (b) Switching diode by Maxwell?
(c) Tunnel diode (d) Zener-diode ρ
(a) ∇.E =
64. If L1 = 1 mH, L2 = 2 mH and C = 0.1 nF in ε0
Hartley oscillator, then f =_____ kHz. (b) ∇.B = 0
(a) 45.88 (b) 290.57 ∂B
(c) 145.57 (d) 572.25 (c) ∇ × E =
∂t
65. An operational amplifier possesses ∂E
(a) Very large input resistance and very large (d) ∇ × B = µ 0 J + µ 0ε0
∂t
output resistance 72. The signal cosωc t + 0.5cosωm t sin ωc t is
(b) Very large input resistance and very small
(a) FM only (b) AM only
output resistance
(c) both AM and FM (d) neither AM nor FM
(c) Very small input resistance and very small
73. Three signal 5 kHz, 6 kHz and 8 kHz are
output resistance
multiplexed. The required channel bandwidth
(d) Very small input resistance and very large
will be-
output resistance
(a) 16 kHz (b) 10 kHz
66. The sweep width in a CRO is controlled by
(c) 19 kHz (d) 12 kHz
(a) Horizontal gain control
74. The Marconi antenna has a physical length of:
(b) Vertical gain control
λ λ
(c) Accelerating -anode potential control (a) (b)
2 4
(d) Focusing-anode potential control
λ
67. The circuit is a (c) λ (d)
8
75. For which of the following devices, is DMA the
most suitable?
(a) Keyboard (b) Mouse
(c) Joy stick (d) Hard disk
(a) Monostable MV (b) Astable MV 76. Pure Metals generally have
(c) Adder (d) SR FF (a) High Conductivity & Low temperature
68. A carrier is modulated by a digital bit stream coefficient
having one of the possible phases of 0º, 90º, (b) High Conductivity & High temperature
180º and 270º. Then the modulation is termed coefficient
as (c) Low Conductivity & zero temperature
coefficient
(a) BPSK (b) QPSK
(d) Low Conductivity & High temperature
(c) QAM (d) MSK coefficient
69. The final value theorem is 77. Which one of the following modes has the
(a) lim x (k) = lim(z – 1)X + (z) characteristic of attenuation becoming less as
k →∞ z →1
the frequency is increased and is attractive at
(b) lim x (k) = lim X + (z) microwave frequencies of circular cylindrical
k →∞ z →1
waveguides?
(c) lim x (k) = lim(z –1 )X + (z)
k →∞ z →0 (a) TE10 mode (b) TM01 mode
(d) lim x (k) = lim(z − 1) −1 X + (z –1 ) (c) TE01 mode (d) higher order mode
k →∞ z →0
78. An astable multivibrator is also called
70. Transfer impedance is defined as (a) Free running multivibrator
(a) Ratio of transform voltage and transform (b) Edge triggered multivibrator
current at the same port (c) Emitter coupled multivibrator
(b) Ratio of transform voltage at one port to the (d) Collector coupled multivibrator
current transform at the other port 79. It is required to measure temperature in the
(c) Both (a) and (b) range of 1300º-1520ºC. The most suitable
(d) Ratio between transform of voltage at one thermo couple is
port to the transform of voltage at the other (a) chromel-constantan (b) iron-constantan
port (c) chromel-alumel (d) platinum-rhodium
Practice Set-5 63 YCT
80. Which of the following technology results in 91. Consider an analog signal sampled at a rate of
least power dissipation? 2 KHz and quantized into 128 levels. The time
(a) CMOS (b) ECL duration for each bit of the binary encoded
(c) TTL (d) NMOS signal is:
81. The specifications given for a TTL logic family (a) 0.01 (b) 0.035
gate are as follows :
(c) 0.0714 (d) 0.05
IOH = –400 mA, IOL = 8 mA, IIH = 20 mA, and
IIL = –0.36 mA. Fan out is : 92. The signal to quantization noise ratio in a PCM
(a) 10 (b) 18 system depends upon
(c) 20 (d) 22 1. Sampling rate
82. A transmission line is distortionless if 2. Number of quantization levels
(a) RL = 1/GC (b) RL = GC 3. Message signal bandwidth
(c) LG = RC (d) RG = LC Codes :
83. What polarization is employed in an AM (a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 2 and 3 only
broadcasting? (c) 2 only (d) 3 only
(a) horizontal (b) parallel
93. The Bragg's Law of X-ray diffraction is :
(c) transverse (d) vertical
(a) d singθ = nλ (b) 2n sinθ = λ
84. The channel capacity is
(a) The maximum information transmitted by one (c) 2d sinθ = nλ (d) 2dn sinθ = λ
symbol over the channel 94. A TV system has BW of 240 MHz, how many
(b) Information contained in a signal TV signals could be transmitted using FDM of
(c) The amplitude of the modulated signal 4 MHz wide?
(d) Entire bandwidth available (a) 20 (b) 30
85. A satellite earth station has (c) 150 (d) 60
(a) only receiving equipments 95. Which one of following is not synthesizable
(b) only transmitting equipments VHDL statement?
(c) (a) and (b) both (a) ‘case’ (b) ‘wait until’
(d) none of these (c) ‘wait for’ (d) generate
86. A microcontroller differs from a 96. Two alternating quantities are added
microprocessor in terms of
(a) I/O interfaces and instruction decoding (a) arithmetically (b) graphically
(b) Memory configuration and I/O interfaces (c) vectorially (d) geometrically
(c) Data bus width and clock speed 97. HTTPs stands for
(d) Memory configuration and instruction (a) Hyper Text Transmission Protocol Secure
decoding (b) Hyper Text Transfer Programs Secure
87. Which of the following materials used in tunnel (c) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol secure
diode (d) Hyper Text Transmission Program Secure
(a) GaAs (b) Ge
(c) BaO2 (d) P2O5 98. Loading effect is primarily caused by
88. To prevent oscillations in the TWT which one instruments having:
of the following is resorted to? (a) high resistance (b) high sensitivity
(a) Bunching defocusing mechanism is used (c) low sensitivity (d) high range
(b) Attenuator is used 99. A Silicon Controlled Resistor (SCR) is made up
(c) External magnetic field is provided of silicon and not germanium because
(d) Helix is used (a) silicon is inexpensive
89. A combinational PLD with both programmable (b) silicon is mechanically strong
AND and OR arrays is called: (c) silicon has small leakage current
(a) PLA (b) PAL (d) silicon is tetravalent
(c) RAM (d) ROM 100. In root locus method, the value of K is obtained as
90. Find the complement of the function F1 - (a) Product of length of vectors from
F1 = x ( y z + yz ) poles/Product of length of vectors from zeros
(b) (Product of length of vectors from poles) ×
(a) F1 = x + ( y + z )( y + z ) (Product of length of vectors from zeros)
(b) F1 = x ( yz + yz ) (c) Product of length of vectors from
zeros/Product of length of vectors from poles
(c) F1 = x + ( y + z )( y + z )
(d) Product of length of vectors from zeros +
(d) F1 = x ( yz + yz ) Product of length of vectors from poles

Practice Set-5 64 YCT

 Answer Key
1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (c)
11. (a) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (a) 17. (c) 18. (d) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (c) 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (a) 29. (b) 30. (a)
31. (b) 32. (c) 33. (b) 34. (c) 35. (b) 36. (a) 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (c) 44. (a) 45. (b) 46. (b) 47. (d) 48. (a) 49. (b) 50. (c)
51. (c) 52. (b) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (b) 56. (a) 57. (c) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (a)
61. (d) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (b) 65. (b) 66. (a) 67. (d) 68.(b) 69. (a) 70. (b)
71. (d) 72. (a) 73. (a) 74. (b) 75. (d) 76.(b) 77. (c) 78. (a) 79. (d) 80. (a)
81. (c) 82. (c) 83. (d) 84. (a) 85. (c) 86. (b) 87. (b) 88. (b) 89. (a) 90. (c)
91. (c) 92. (c) 93. (c) 94. (d) 95. (c) 96. (c) 97. (c) 98. (c) 99. (c) 100.(a)
Solution
1. (b)
Given that,
Electron mobility (µn) = 1250cm 2 / V − s
Charge of electron (q) = 1.6×10–19 Coulomb.
Resistivity (ρ) = 0.5Ω cm
We know that,
5. (a)
1
(Resistivity) ρ = Microprocessor Pentium-4 device is under VLSI.
σ(Conductivity)
6. (c)
∵ σ = N D qµ n Ω / cm An inductor is connected in series with SCR to protect it
di
1 1 from excessive high .
ρ= , ND = dt
N D qµ n ρqµ n
1
ND =
0.5 ×1.60 ×10−19 × 1250
N D = 1016 / cm3
2. (a) 7. (c)
For full wave rectifier–
2V
Vo(avg) = m
π
When diode resistance is consider– Converting the block diagram into signal flow graph-
2Vm
V0(avg ) = − I dc × R f
π
3. (d)
Given, P1=G1G2, P2=1×G2=G2, P3 = 1×1=1
Transmit frame rate = 2000 frames/sec There are No loop gain paths
Number of bits n = 16 There are No two non touching loops
Transmission rate = frame rate × Number of bits ∴∆ = 1− 0 = 1
= 2000×16 ∆1 = 1, ∆ 2 = 1, ∆3 = 1
= 32000 C ( s ) ( G1G 2 × 1) + ( G 2 ×1) + (1 ×1)
∴ =
Transmission rate = 32kbps R (s) 1− 0
4. (c) = G1G 2 + G 2 + 1
Gray code is minimum error code 8. (a)
(6)10 → (0110)2 → (0101)Gray Transfer function is a LTI system.
Practice Set-5 64 YCT
9. (a) 18. (d)
Coherent demodulation of FSK signal can be detected The waveguide acts as a high pass filter in that most of
using correlation receiver. the energy above a certain frequency (the cut off
10. (c) frequency) will pass through the waveguide, whereas
most of the energy that is below the cut-off frequency
will be attenuated by the waveguide.
19. (d)
Drift current- Drift current is force phenomena current
flow due to apply electric field.
Y = G + j (BC− BL) (B) Einstein’s equation-
At Resonance, It gives, the relationship between diffusion constant,
Y = G + j (BC -BL) = G + j0 mobility & thermal voltage.
⇒Y=G D kT T(º k)
= VT = = Volt
1 µ q 11600
∴ Z = → Maximum
Y
11. (a) (C) Diffusion Current-
Signal power = 13 dB Diffusion is mainly due to concentration gradient-
noise power = –1 dB dp
J diff ∝ q.
SNR = (Signal power – Noise power) dB dx
SNR = (13 + 1) dB = 14 dB Concentration gradient.
12. (c)
(D) Continuity equation-
The RAKE receiver is a essentially a diversity receiver
designed specially for CDMA, where the diversity is Continuity equation is based on law of conservation of
provided by the fact that the multipath components are charge.
practically uncorrelated from one another when their dn 1 djn
relative propagation delays exceed a chip period. = − R n + Gn
dt q dx
13. (a)
In memory mapped input/output 8085 microprocessor 20. (a)
can access memory space is 64 KB. • Gunn diode is based on "Gunn effect" It have
14. (a) Negative Resistance, used in high frequency
The spectrum of BFSK may be viewed as the sum of (Microwave oscillation).
two ASK spectra. • Zener diode are widely used as a voltage reference
15. (a) an as shunt regulator or voltage comparison to
Primary lithium batteries are known with a varity of regulate the voltage across small circuit.
silver oxidizing agents (e.g. Ag2CrO4, AgF and AgCl).
Zener diode conducts when voltage reaches the
The advantage of these cells are the low equivalent
diode's reverse breakdown voltage.
weight of lithium.
16. (a) • Varacter diode is a varicap diode which also called
Metals always have ionic bond there is no covalent as voltage variable capacitance. it is used in FM
bond present in metals. signal in analog communication.
17. (c) • A Schottky diode is one of the popular options
cot 1º + cot 89º among non-linear device for mixer. mixer produced
= cot 1º + cot (90º – 1º) the original frequency as well as their sum and their
= cot 1º + tan 1º difference.

sin1º cos1º sin 2 1º + cos 2 1º 21. (b)

= + =
cos1º sin1º sin1º ⋅ cos1º IB = 0.5 A IC = β.IB
2 ×1 IC = 10×0.5
=
2sin1º cos1º IC = 5A
2
= And VCC = 40V
sin 2º
Practice Set-5 66 YCT
22. (b) 3, 2-input NAND gates.
List-I List –II 27. (b)
RC- coupling - Minimum possible non-linear The GTO can be turned on by a gate signal and can also
distortion be turned off by applying reverse gate pulse.
Inductive coupling - Low collector supply voltage 28. (a)
can be used dv
For protection of SCR, snubber circuit is used.
Transformer coupling - High voltage gain and dt
Impedance matching. Snubber circuit is made by resistance and capacitor in
Direct coupling - Ability to amplify dc and low series across thyristor.
frequency signal
23. (c)
%GAE × Fullscale
Voltmeter L.E. =
Measured Value
In RC snubber circuit,
2 ×100 Resistance is connected in series with capacitor to
% L.E of voltmeter = = 5%
40 protect from high value of discharging current.
%GAE × Fullscale Protection of thyristor-
% L.E. of ammeter =
Measured value dv
High protection- Snubber circuit is provided across
−3
dt
2 × 150 × 10
= = 4% SCR.
75 × 10−3 di
High protection- Connect a inductor in series with
Limiting error of power = 5% + 4% = 9% dt
24. (c) SCR.
The Q meter working Principle is based on series Thermal protection- Provide heat sink in SCR.
resonance, the voltage drop across the coil or capacitor 29. (b)
is Q times the applied voltage (where Q is the ratio of Forward path P = G G ∆1 = 1
1 1 2
reactance to resistance XL/R) if a fixed voltage is
applied to the circuit a voltmeter across the capacitor P2 = −G 3 , ∆2 = 1
can be calibrated to read. Individual loop L1 = −G1H
X L XC EC
Q= = = P∆ + P ∆ G G − G3
R R E T.F = 1 1 2 2 = 1 2
∆ 1 + G1H
25. (c)
Some Boolean algebraic laws 30. (a)
According to question –
(1) Commutative law A + B = B + A
Rectangular pulse-
A.B = B.A
(2) Associative law A + (B + C) = (A + B) + C
A.(B.C) = (A.B)C
(3) Distributive law A(B + C) = AB + AC
(4) De Morgan's theorem  −T T
A <t<
(1) A1.A 2 A 3 ......A n = A1 + A 2 + A 3 ...... + A n x(t) =  2 2
 0 otherwise
(2) A1 + A 2 + A 3 + ...... + A n = A1.A 2 .A 3 .......A n ∞

∫ x(t)e
− jω t
26. (b) X( ω) = dt
−∞
Y = AB + CD
T/2
X(ω) = ∫ A.e− jωt dt
Y = AB + CD −T / 2

T/ 2
Y = AB.CD Ae− jωt
X(ω) =
− jω −T/ 2

A  − jωT 2 − jω( −T 2) 
= e −e
− jω  

Practice Set-5 67 YCT

  + jωT − jωT
 ∴ VBC = 12V
A.T 2 j  e 2 − e 2 
= × So, energy stored
jω T  2j 
  1 1
= C1VAD 2
+ C2 VBC2

A.T  ωT  2 2
= .sin  
ωT / 2  2  1 1
= × 2 × 10−6 × 12 ×12 + × 2 × 10−6 × 12 ×12
AT  ωT  2 2
= sin
ω.T  2 
−4
= 2.88 × 10 J
2 33. (b)
If two vectors are orthogonal it means they are
 ωT 
  perpendicular to each other i.e. the dot product of the
X ( ω ) = AT sin 
2  two vector is zero.
ωT
2 V1.V2 = 0
 ωT  34. (c)
X( ω) = AT sinc  
 2  Auto-correlation function is an even....
Thus Fourier transform of a rectangular pulse for a R ( τ ) = −R ( −τ ) is not true (since it has even symmetry)
period is a sinc function.
31. (b) 35. (b)
E  X − E ( X ) 
3

= E  X3 − 3X 2 E ( X ) + 3E 2 ( X ) X − E3 ( X ) 

= E  X3  − 3E ( X ) E ( X 2 ) + 3E 2 ( X ) E ( X ) − E 3 ( X )

R1 ,R 2 ,R 3 = ? = E  X3  − 3E [ X ] E  X 2  + 2E 3 [ X ]
5 × 30 36. (a)
R1 = = 3Ω Neighboring base stations are assigned different group
50
30 × 15 of channels it minimizes the interference between base
R2 = = 9Ω stations and the users under their control.
50
37. (c)
5 ×15 3
R3 = = = 1.5Ω Status register is a hardware register that contains
50 2 information about the state of the processor and is not a
32. (c) part of programming model.
38. (b)
An input output processor controls the flow of
information between main memory and input output .
The CPU assigns the task of initiating the input output
program. The input output processor operates
independently from the CPU and transfers data
between peripherals and memory.
39. (b)
The transformer is a constant main flux device.
At steady state, capacitor will be open-circuited so, Transformer works on principle of electromagnetic
equivalent circuit is- induction.
40. (c)
Diamagnetic materials have the highest reluctance.
Reluctance : This is a property of a material that
opposes the magnetic field lines.
This is an analogy with the resistance in electric
circuits.
∵ VAD = VBC Reluctance is defined as :
mmf NI
VAD =
( 2 + 4 ) ×16 = 12V flux
=
φ
8
Practice Set-5 68 YCT
41. (c) We known that:- Energy meter -
e +eiθ − iθ
• It is an integrating type instrument.
cos θ =
2 • Its principle is similar to transformer.
eiθ − e − iθ • It is known as watt-hour meter and used to measure
energy in kWh
Sin θ= 2i
42. (d) φ2 ⋅ N
Tb ∝ ×R
In a rectangular waveguide electromagnetic waves are Re
reflected from the walls. So, there is only conductor
present in a rectangular waveguide. So, it did not Where,
support TEM. It only supports TE and TM mode. N → speed in rpm
43. (c) φ → Flux
The voltage gain of CC configuration- Tb → Braking torque
Vout 1 R → radius of disc
AV = =
Vin re' Re → resistance in path of current (i.e. disc)
1+
re 48. (a)
1 9 X = AB.AB
= = = 0.9
( )( )
10 10
1+ = A+B A+B
90
44. (a)
Drain current, = A.B + AB
2 = AB + AB
 V 
I D = I DSS 1 − GS  = AB + AB
 VP 
where, ID = Drain current X =A⊕B
IDSS = Maximum value of current when Y =A+B
VGS = 0
= AB
ID = IDSS
= AB
VP = Pinch off voltage
VGS = Gate to source voltage
45. (b)
Crossover distortion occurs in class B amplifiers
because the amplifier is biased at its cut-off point. Hence, the given logic function is half adder.
46. (b) 49. (b)
For n-bit parallel substractor, n-full adder are needed.
Given,
The parallel binary subtractor is formed by the
Gain, A = 100 combination of all full adder with subtrahend
Feedback, β = 0.03 complemented input. So for 12-bit parallel substractor,
A 12 full adder needed.
Overall gain, A f =
1 + Aβ 50. (c)
A PD controller is used to compensate a system by
100
= adding a zeros to the system. PD controller is used to
1 + 100 × 0.03 improve transient stability of the system.
A f = 25 Properties of PD controller-
(i) Improve transient stability.
47. (d)
(ii) Increases damping
Creep error is associated with energy meter. In energy
(iii) Reduces the overshoot
meter, if the friction is over compensated or there is
excessive voltage across the potential coil there is a (iv) Improve system response
tendency for the disc to run even when there is no (v) Increases the bandwidth and noise of system
current through the current coil is called creeping for (vi) It does not increase the type of the system
preventing creeping two diametrically opposite hole are (vii) It amplify noise and reduces signal to noise (S/N)
drilled in the opposite side of the disc. ratio.
Practice Set-5 69 YCT
51. (c) : E = − 4a x V/m
Acceleration error constant (ka) 55. (b)
= lims [ OLTF] = lims [ G(s)]
2 2
s →0 s→0
Total modulation index, in case of modulation by
several sine waves is given by
52. (b)
Laplace transform is the integral transform of given µ t = µ12 + µ 22 + µ32 + ...
derivative function with real variable t to convert into a
56. (a)
complex function with variables.
∞
Half wave dipole antenna is also known as Hertz
F(s) = ∫ f (t)e − st dt antenna. Hertz antenna is a dipole antenna of length
−∞
equal to half of the wave length of transmitted
The Laplace transform is a complex valued function of
electromagnetic wave.
a complex argument as s = σ + jω .
λ
53. (c) ℓ=
2
Apply millman's theorem-
57. (c)
SIM stands for set interrupt mask. It is 1-byte
instruction and it is a multipurpose instruction. The
main uses of SIM instruction are - masking/unmasking
of RST7.5, RST6.5 and RST5.5.
58. (b)
⇓
As a default in Microsoft Excel, text types into a cell is
a aligned to the left border of cell while numbers are
aligned to the right.
59. (b)
Given, sf = 6% = 0.06
V V V sf + s b = 2
+ +
V1 = R R R 0.06 + s b = 2
1 1 1
+ + s b = 2 − 0.06
R R R
s b = 1.94
1 1 1
V + +  60. (a)
V1 = 
R R R
1 1 1 The total current in a semiconductor is proportional to
 + +  Gradient of fermi potential. The fermi level is the
R R R
energy which is occupied by electron orbital at
V1 = V temperature equal to 0K.
Req = R||R||R 61. (d)
Req = R/3 ∞

Equivalent circuit- F(t) = a 0 + ∑ (a n cos nω0 t + b n sin ω0 t)

n =1

for odd signal F(t) = – F(–t)

So, odd signals have only sine term.
62. (a)
λ
λg =
2
f 
1−  C 
f 

54. (d) Given λg > λ

V = 4x+2
Because
∴ E = −∇V f > fC
 ∂ ∂ ∂  Where,
= −  a x + a y + a z  ( 4x + 2 )
 ∂x ∂y ∂z  fC = Cutoff frequency

Practice Set-5 70 YCT

λg = guided wavelength 67. (d)
λ = medium wavelength Given circuit can be re-drawn as below:-
So, guided wavelength is never less than free space
wavelength.
63. (a) A P-N junction diode which acts as variable
voltage capacitor under the reverse applied voltage is
called varactor diode.

A B Q Q
64. (b) 1 0 1 0
The frequency of the Hartley oscillator is given by 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1
f= LT = L1 + L2
2π L T C 0 0 0 1
1 1 1 0 0
=
2 π 3 × 10 × 0.1 × 10 −9
−3
So, the circuit is a SR flip-flop.
1 68. (b)
= = 290575.84Hz
2π 0.3 × 10 −12 The modulating system where different data bits are
= 290.57 kHz. represented by differing phase is phase shift keying.
65. (b) The phase shift keying (PSK) is known as Quadrature
phase shift keying. (because there are four symbols- like
Op-Amp characteristics -
00, 900,1800 and 2700).
• Open loop gain (ACL) = ∞ → very high
• Input resistance (Ri) = ∞ → very high
• Output resistance (R0) = 0 → very small
• Bandwidth (BW) = ∞ → very high
• CMRR = ∞ → very high
• Slew rate = ∞ → very high
• Offset voltage = 0 → very low. 69. (a)
Final value theorem in z-transform is -
lim x ( k ) = lim ( z − 1) X + ( z )
k →∞ z →1

70. (b)
Transfer impedance of any two port network is defined
as the ratio of voltage at one port and current transfer at
the another port.
71. (d)
ρ
Function diagram of op-amp - ∇.E = (Gauss's law)
ε0
∇. B = 0 (monopole not exist)
∂B
∇×E = (Faraday's law)
∂t
∂E
∇ × B = µ0 J c + µ0ε0 (Ampere's Law)
∂t
72. (a)
66. (a)
S(t) = cos ωct + 0.5 cos ωmt sin ωct
The time base (sweep or ramp) generator produces a
saw - tooth wave of the same frequency as the input cosωct & sinωct both are carrier component.
signal to the Y-plates. The sweep width in a CRO is both carrier component are in phase quadrature (90º)
controlled by horizontal gain control. so, this signal is a narrow band FM (NBFM) signal.

Practice Set-5 71 YCT

73. (a) PMOS logic family built with P-channel metal oxide
Given signal - semiconductor FET (MOSFET). NMOS logic family
f m1 = 5kHz, f m2 = 6 kHz, f m3 = 8kHz built with N-channel metal oxide semiconductor
FET(MOSFET).
(
Required channel B.W. = 2. f m1 ,f m2 ,f m3 ) max
81. (c)
= 2 × 8 = 16 kHz IOH
Fan-out (high) =
74. (b) I IH
A Marconi antenna is also known as quarter wave IOH = 400 × 10–3 , IIH = 20 × 10–3
antenna or the grounded antenna. A Marconi antenna 400 × 10−3
operates as a Hertz Antenna, but physically it is only a = = 20
20 ×10−3
quarter wave length ( λ 4 ) long.
IOL 8 ×10−3
75. (d) Fan-out (low) = = = 22.22
I IH 0.36 ×10−3
The DMA controller can transfer data directly between
device and memory without CPU intervention. It is If fan-out (low) fan-out (high) are not same,
more suitable for devices with high data transfer rates The fan-out is chosen as the smaller of two
like hard disk. So, fan -out of gate = 20
76.(b) 82. (c)
Pure metals generally have high conductivity and high A transmission line is said to be distortionless when
temperature coefficient. attenuation constant 'α' is frequency independent and
With the rise in temperature, the resistance of pure the phase shift constant β is linearly dependent on the
metals increases because pure metal have positive frequency.
temperature coefficients of resistance and it is very
For a distortionless transmission line, the primary
high.
constants are related by R/L = G/C.
LG = RC
83. (d)
In AM broadcasting, vertical polarization is employed
because absorption of the wave of a negligible chance
due to physical obstacles or environmental.
84. (a)
77. (c) The channel capacity, C is defined to be the maximum
For circular cylindrical mode the TE01 mode when the rate at which information can be transmitted through a
frequency increased then attenuation become less. channel.
78. (a)  S
Channel capacity (C) = BW log 2 1 +  bits / sec
In electronic circuit, astable multivibrators are also  N
known as free running multivibrators as they do not
Where, S/N= signal to noise ratio.
require any additional input.
85. (c)
79. (d)
A satellite earth station has receiving and transmitting
Type B (Platinum-Rhodium) suited for high
equipment. A satellite earth station is a type of radio
temperature measurements up to 1820 º C.
equipment used to communicate with space station from
Type Thermocouple Temperature range earth's surface.
types 86. (b)
E Chromel –270 to 1000 ºC A microcontroller differs from a microprocessor in term
Constantan of memory configuration and input/output interface.
J Iron-constantan –210 to 1200 ºC Microprocessor consist of only a CPU whereas micro-
K Chromel-Alumel –250 to 1250 ºC controller contains a CPU, memory, input all integrated
into one chip.
B Platinum - rhodium 250 to 1820 ºC
87. (b)
80. (a)
A tunnel diode is known as Esaki diode and it is a
CMOS logic family has least power dissipations. highly doped semiconductor this is capable of very fast
CMOS logic family built with both N-channel and P- operation. Germanium is basically used to make tunnel
channel metal oxide semiconductor FET. diode.
Practice Set-5 72 YCT
88. (b) 93. (c)
A traveling wave tube amplifier device which The Bragg's Law of Xray diffraction is
suppresses random oscillations through the entire length
2d sin θ = nλ
of the traveling wave tube. To prevent oscillation in the
TWT attenuator is used.  nλ 
sin θ = 2d 
89. (a)  
A combinational PLD with both programmable AND λ = Wavelength
and OR arrays is called PLA. PROM →
Programmable OR logic & fixed AND array θ = angle of incidence
PAL → Programmable AND logic & fixed OR array 94. (d)
PLA → Programmable AND logic & programmable Total number of signal transmitted in FDM system is -
OR logic. f
N=
90. (c) fx
F1 = x ( y z + yz ) Given,
Total bandwidth (f) = 240 MHz
F1 = x(y z + yz)
Signal bandwidth (fx) = 4 MHz
(
F1 = x + y z + yz ) N=
240
= 60
F1 = x + ( y + z )( y + z )  4
95. (c)
91. (c)
'Wait for' is not synthesizable VHDL statement. Wait
Given, statement can not generates any hardware directly so it
L = 2n = 128, Sampling rate = 2kHz is non-synthesizable statement in VHDL.
n=7 96. (c)
1 1 Two alternating quantities of any frequency in a line
The time duration Tb = =
nfs 7 × 2 × 103 diagram can be added algebraically in terms of their
instantaneous values. Hence it can also be added
Tb = 0.0714ms
vectorially.
92. (c) 97. (c)
The qualify of quantizer output depends upon the HTTPs stands for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol secure.
number of quantization levels used.
98. (c)
The spacing between two adjacent represent level is
Loading effect is primarily caused by instruments
called a quantum or step-sizes.
having low sensitive. Sensitivity of a voltmeter is
• Step size dependent upon no. of quantization level. defined as-
Noise Power -
1
∆2 Sv = Ω/V
PN = I FSD
12
Where, ( ∆ = Step size ) • A sensitive instrument have a high value of
resistance. If a low sensitive voltmeter is used to
Vp− p Vp − p measure the voltage across the low resistance, some
∆= =
L 2n of the current will pass through the meter and hence,
Signal power the meter reading will be a wrong or with error.
SNR =
Noise power 99. (c)
SCR is made of silicon instead of Germanium because
PS P
SNR = = 2S silicon has less leakage current.
PN Vp − p Silicon crystals have higher temperature tolerance than
12L2 germanium crystal.
12L2 × PS 100. (a)
SNR =
Vp2− p In root locus method, the value of K is obtained as
product of length of vectors from poles/Product of
SNR ∝ L2 length of vectors from zeros.
Practice Set-5 73 YCT
 PRACTICE SET - 6
1. The ratio of the mobility to the diffusion 9. The line code that has zero dc component for
coefficient in a semiconductor has the unit pulse transmission of random binary data is
(a) V –1 (b) cm.V –1 (a) non-return to zero (NRZ)
(c) V.cm –1 (d) V.s (b) return to zero (RZ)
2. For the circuit shown below, using ideal diode, (c) alternate mark inversion (AMI)
the values of voltage and current are (d) none of the above
10. A low-pass filter circuit is basically
(a) a differentiating circuit with low time
constant
(b) a differentiating circuit with larger time
constant
(c) an integrating circuit with low time constant
(a) –3 V and 0.6 mA (b) 3 V and 0.0 mA (d) an integrating circuit with larger time
(c) 3 V and 0.6 mA (d) –3 V and 0.0 mA constant
3. Which signaling scheme is most affected by 11. The spectral density of white noise is
noise? (a) Exponential (b) Uniform
(a) ASK (b) FSK (c) Poisson (d) Gaussian
(c) PSK (d) QAM 12. Which of the following is not the layer of
4. With 2's complement representation, the range TCP/IP protocol?
of values that can be represented on data bus of (a) Physical Layer (b) Application Layer
an 8-bit microprocessor is given by
(c) Internet Layer (d) Network Layer
(a) –128 to 127
(b) –128 to 128 13. Which of the following flag conditions are not
(c) –127 to 128 available in 8085 processor?
(d) –256 to 256 (a) Zero flag (b) Parity flag
5. Assuming ideal conditions, the speed up (c) Overflow flag (d) Auxiliary carry flag
obtained from a balanced N stage pipeline is 14. The frequency shifts in the BFSK usually lies in
(a) 2 N (b) N2 the range
(c) N (d) N! (a) 50 to 1000 Hz (b) 100 to 2000 Hz
6. In order to obtain static voltage equalization in (c) 200 to 500 Hz (d) 500 to 10 Hz
series connected SCRs, connections are made 15. The fatigue life of a part can be improved by :
of (a) Electroplating (b) Polishing
(a) One resistor across the string (c) Coating (d) Shot peening
(b) Resistors of different values across each SCR
16. In the case of dielectric subjected to an
(c) Resistors of same values across each SCR
alternating electric field of frequency f, the
(d) One resistor in series with the string
dielectric loss is proportional to
7. The unit impulse response of a certain system is
(a) f (b) f2
found to be e–8t. Its transfer function is .
1 1
1 1 (c) (d) 2
(a) (b) 2 f f
s −8 s +8
17. What does the following integral evaluate to?
1 1 π/2
(c) 2 (d) 6
s +4 s +8 ∫ sin θ.dθ
0
8. The discrete equation
y(n + 1) + 0.5ny(n) = 0.5x(n + 1) (a) 5 π/16 (b) 5 π/8
is not attributable to a (c) 0 (d) 5 π/32
(a) Memory less system 18. Which of the following wave guide tuning
(b) Time-varying system components is not easily adjustable?
(c) Linear system (a) Plunger (b) Screw
(d) Causal system (c) Iris (d) Stub
Practice Set-6 74 YCT
19. If a sample of germanium and a sample of Codes:
silicon have the same impurity density and are A B C D
kept at room temperature. (a) 1 2 3 4
(a) both will have equal value of resistivity (b) 4 2 3 1
(b) both will have equal negative resistivity
(c) 2 1 3 4
(c) resistivity of germanium will be higher than
that of silicon (d) 2 4 3 1
(d) resistivity of silicon will be higher than that 24. The sensitivity of a potentiometer can be
of germanium. increased by
20. Match List-I (Device) with List-II (Application) (a) Increasing the length of wire
and select the correct answer using the codes (b) Decreasing the length of wire
given below the list: (c) Increasing the current in the wire
List-I List-II (d) Decreasing the current in the wire
A. Hall element 1. Power control
25. The logic expression y = A + AB is equivalent
B. Varactor diode 2. Microwave mixer
to
C. SCR 3. Tuning element
(a) y = AB
in tank circuit
D. Schottky barrier 4. Sensor (b) y = AB
diode (c) y = A + B
Codes: (d) y = A + B
A B C D 26. The output of a logic gate is 1 when all its input
(a) 2 3 1 4 are at logic 0. Then the gate is either
(b) 4 1 3 2 (a) A NAND or an EX-OR Gate
(c) 2 1 3 4 (b) A NOR or an EX-NOR Gate
(d) 4 3 1 2 (c) An OR or an EX-NOR Gate
21. BJT is three terminal device which stands for (d) An AND or an EX-OR Gate
bipolar junction transistor. Which of the 27. A Triac has three terminals viz…………..
following are true about BJT. (a) Drain, source, gate
1. Base has smallest area to reduce the transit (b) Two main terminal and a gate terminal
time. (c) Cathode, anode, gate
2. collector is provided with the largest area to (d) None of the above
withstand heat dissipation. 28. Match List-I (Device) with List-II (Associated
3. BJT is a current controlled device. Term) and select the correct answer using the
4. BJT is a voltage controlled device. codes given below the lists:
(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1, 2 and 4 List-I List-II
(c) only 1 and 2 (d) only 2 and 4 A. Diode 1. Pinch off voltage
22. The common emitter model is shown below B. SCR 2. Holding current
C. BJT 3. Forward resistance
D. FET 4. Active region
Codes:
A B C D
(a) 3 4 2 1
(b) 1 2 4 3
(c) 3 2 4 1
The h-parameters of this model are
(d) 1 4 2 3
8 1   5 1 29. Systems having a finite non-zero steady state
(a)   (b)  
0.8 0.25 0.8 1 error to a parabolic input is called as
(a) Type – 0 System
8 0.8  5 0.8
(c)   (d)   (b) Type – 1 System
1 0.25 1 1  (c) Type – 2 System
23. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct (d) Type – 3 System
using the codes given below the lists: 30. The inverse Fourier transform of δ (ω - ω0) is
List-I List-II
1 jω0t
(a) Resistance 1. M–1L–2T2I2 (a) e jω t0
(b) e
(b) Inductance 2. ML2T–3I–2 2π
(c) Capacitance 3. M–1L–2T4I2 1 − jω0t
(c) e − j ω 0 t (d) e
(d) Reluctance 4. ML2T–2I–2 2π
Practice Set-6 75 YCT
31. The equivalent capacitance across 'ab' will be 39. Find VP and frequency at the terminals of
secondary coil of transformer given below

(a) 720V, 150Hz

(a) 0.2 µF (b) 0.1 µF (b) 720V, 50Hz
(c) 0.5 µF (d) 0 (c) 1018.23V, 50Hz
32. In figure, the current supplied by battery (d) 1018.23V, 150Hz
immediately after switching on the circuit is 40. A flux of 1.2 mWb exserting a magnet having a
cross-section of 30 cm2. The flux density in tesla
in
(a) 4 (b) 0.4
(c) 2.5 (d) 40
(a) 0A (b) 1A 41. Consider two events A and B. If
(c) 4A (d) 10A 1 1 A
A ⊂ B, P(A) = and P(B) = , then P   is :
33. If a = 2i - 2j - k and b = 3i + 2j + k , then the 4 3 B
projection of b on a is (a) 0.75 (b) 0.33
(c) 0.25 (d) 1
1
(a) (b) 1 42. The mode with lowest cut-off frequency for an
3
electromagnetic wave propagating between two
1 11
(c) (d) perfectly conducting parallel plates of infinite
14 3
extent is
34. If each stage had gain of 10 dB and noise figure (a) TE10 (b) TM10
of 10dB, then the overall noise figure of two- (c) TM01 (d) TEM
stage cascade amplifier will be 43. A biasing circuit has a stability factor of 40. if
(a) 10 (b) 1.09 due to temperature change, ICO changes by 1
(c) 1.0 (d) 10.9 µΑ. The change in IC will be
35. An energy signal has S(f) = 19. What will be the (a) 20 µA (b) 40 µA
energy density spectrum? (c) 80 µA (d) none of these
44. Match List-I (Semiconductor Device) with List-
(a) 361 (b) 38
II (Symbol Used) and select the correct answer
(c) 81 (d) 19 using the codes given below the lists:
36. ARQ stands for List-I List-II
(a) Accelerated redirection facility
(b) Amplitude radio detector quantizing noise A. n-p-n transistor 1.
(c) Automatic repeat request
(d) Aerial range quartz crystal
37. An 8085 microprocessor after the execution of B. SCR 2.
XRA A instruction
(a) the carry flag is set
(b) the accumulator contains FFH
(c) the content of accumulator is shifted by one
(d) the zero flag is set C. FET 3.
38. In which unit is the performance of cache
memory measured?
(a) Hz
D. MOSFET 4.
(b) Bits/s
(c) Cache constant
(d) Hit ratio

Practice Set-6 76 YCT

 Codes: 53. Determine the voltage vm in the given network.
A B C D
(a) 2 3 4 1
(b) 4 1 2 3
(c) 2 1 4 3
(d) 4 3 2 1
45. Operating cycle of Class-C amplifier is
(a) 180º
(b) Less than 180º (a) 12 V (b) 24 V
(c) 360º (c) –16 V (d) –36 V
(d) 180º to 360º 54. What is the electric flux density (in µC/m2) at a
46. For a voltage series feedback topology, if β = point (6, 4, – 5) caused by a uniform surface
0.01, A = 50 and R1 = 2.87 kΩ, then the Rif is charge density of 60 µC/m2 at a plane x = 8?
. (a) −30a x (b) −60a x
(a) 4.30 kΩ (b) 3.43 kΩ (c) 30a x (d) 60a x
(c) 1.78 kΩ (d) 1.91 kΩ 55. The modulation index of AM is given by (where
47. The energy meter installed near the main 'Vc' and 'Vm' are the maximum value of
switch in a residence and other locations is amplitudes of carrier and message signal
(a) Indicating or deflecting type instrument respectively)
(b) Integrating type instrument Vc V
(c) Recording type instrument (a) (b) m
Vm Vc
(d) Absolute instrument
48. The logic circuit realized by the circuit shown ( Vc + Vm ) ( Vc − Vm )
(c) (d)
in the given figure will be 2 2
56. An antenna, when radiating, has highly
directional radiation pattern. When antenna is
receiving, its radiation pattern:
(a) is more directive
(b) is less directive
(c) is the same
(d) exhibits no directivity at all
(a) B ☼ C (b) F = B ⊕ C 57. If interrupt service request have been received
(c) A ☼ C (d) F = A ⊕ C from all of the following interrupts, then which
49. If the input to T-flip-flop is 100 Hz signal, the one will be serviced last?
final output of the three T-flip-flops that are (a) RST 5.5 (b) RST 6.5
connected in cascade is (c) RST 7.5 (d) None of these
(a) 1000 Hz (b) 500 Hz 58. PROLOG is a
(c) 333 Hz (d) 12.5 Hz
(a) Procedural language
 1 + 0.5s  (b) Logic programming language
50. The transfer function   represents a
 1+s  (c) Imperative language
(a) lag network (d) Functional language
(b) lead network
59. If an induction motor with certain ratio of
(c) lag-lead network
(d) proportional controller rotor to stator slots, runs at 1/7th of the normal
rated speed, the motor is said to be
51. The characteristic equation of a system is s4 +
6s3 + 11s2 + 6s + K = 0. The range of values of (a) Hunting (b) Crawling
K to ensure that given system is stable is : (c) Cogging (d) Jogging
(a) 0 < K < 20 (b) 10 < K < 30 60. In an intrinsic Semiconductor the free electron
(c) 0 < K < 10 (d) 0 < K < 50 concentration depends on
52. Flat top sampling of low pass signals (a) Effective mass of electrons only
(a) Give rise to aperture effect (b) Effective mass of holes only
(b) Implies oversampling (c) Temperature of the semiconductor
(c) Leads to aliasing (d) Width of the forbidden energy band of the
(d) Introduce delay distortion semiconductor
Practice Set-6 77 YCT
 sin t 68. In a PCM system, non-uniform quantization
61. Fourier Transform of is
t leads to
(a) Triangular (b) Rectangular (a) Increased quantizer noise
(c) Sync function (d) sinusoidal (b) Simplification of the quantization process
62. Which of the following phenomena is most (c) Higher average SNR
important when foodstuff is cooked in a (d) Increased bandwidth
microwave oven? 69. Which of the following functions has unity as
(a) Resistive Jouble heating its Fourier transform, Laplace transform and
, (b) Induction heating Z – transform?
(c) Dielectric heating (a) Impulse (b) Gaussian
(d) Radiation heating (c) Sinc (d) Pulse
63. In tunnel diode, the Fermi level lies 70. The network function, H(s) is equal to
(a) inside valance band of p-type and inside
Y(s) X(s)
conduction band of n-type semiconductors (a) (b)
(b) in the energy band gap but closer to valence X(s) Y(s)
band of p-type semiconductors 1
(c) in the energy band gap but closer to valence (c) X(s) Y(s) (d)
X(s)Y(s)
band of p-type and below conduction band of
n-type semiconductors. 71. The Electrical susceptibility and relative
(d) in the energy band gap but above valence permittivity are related as :
band of p-type and below conduction band of (a) χ= ε r -1 (b) χ= ε r + 1
n-type semiconductors. (c) χ =εr ε0 (d) χ =1 +ε0εr
64. Colpitts oscillator circuit uses
72. An amplitude modulated amplifier has a radio
(a) Two capacitors and one inductor
frequency output of 50 W at 100% modulation.
(b) Two inductors and one capacitor
The internal loss in the modulator is 10 W. The
(c) One inductors and one capacitor
unmodulated carrier power is
(d) Three inductors
(a) 40 W (b) 50 W
65. In the differential amplifier shown in the
(c) 60 W (d) 80 W
figure, the magnitudes of the common-mode
and differential-mode gains are Acm and Ad' 73. How many A.M. broadcast stations can be
respectively. If the resistance RE increased, accommodated in a 50 kHz bandwidth if the
then highest frequency of a modulating carrier is 5
kHz?
(a) 20 (b) 5
(c) 15 (d) 10
74. If the minimum range of a radar is to be
doubled, the peak power has to be increased by
a factor of
(a) 2 (b) 4
(c) 8 (d) 16
75. 8251 IC is a
(a) UART (b) USART
(c) Programmable Interrupt controller
(a) Acm increase (d) Programmable interval timer/counter
(b) Common-mode rejection ratio increases
76. Superconducting metal in super conducting
(c) Ad increase state has relative permeability of
(d) Common-mode rejection ratio decreases (a) Zero (b) One
66. A dual-trace CRO has (c) Negative (d) More than one
(a) one electron gun 77. The microwave tube that uses buncher and
(b) two electron guns catcher cavities is
(c) one electron gun and one two-pole switch (a) Magnetron (b) Klystron
(d) two electron guns and one two-pole switch (c) Reflex Klystron
67. If the input of T flip flop is 100 signals, the final (d) Travelling wave tube
output of the three T flip flops in cascade is 78. The basic important blocks of IC 555 timer
(a) 12.5 Hz (b) 333 Hz (a) Voltage source (b) Flip-flop
(c) 500 Hz (d) 1000 Hz (c) Resistors (d) Switch
Practice Set-6 78 YCT
79. LVDT : (c) 32,768 bits (d) 10,48,756 bits
(a) Converts linear motion into electrical signal 90. Using the DeMorgan's theorem (x + y)' is
(b) Translates electrical signal into linear motion (a) x'.y' (b) (xy)'
(c) Helps measuring temperature (c) x + y (d) x + y'
91. In a pulse width modulation inverter, the fifth
(d) Can be used to sense angular displacement
harmonic can be eliminated by making pulse
80. The figure of merit of a logic family is given by width equal to:
(a) Gain bandwidth product (a) 80º (b) 72º
(b) (Propagation delay time) × (power (c) 120º (d) 90º
dissipation) 92. In PCM, the biggest disadvantage as compared
(c) (fan-out) × (propagation delay time) to AM is
(d) (noise margin) × (power dissipation) (a) larger bandwidth
81. The conversion time for a 10-bit successive (b) larger noise
approximation A/D converter, for a clock (c) inability to handle analog signals
frequency of 1 MHz is (d) incompatibility with time division multiplex
(a) 1 µs (b) 5 µs system
(c) 10 µs (d) 15 µs 93. _______ is used to describe the light gathering
or light collecting ability of an optical fiber
82. The depth of penetration of a wave in a lossy
(a) Critical angle
dielectric increases with increasing
(b) Cut-off wavelength
(a) conductivity (b) permeability
(c) Numerical Aperture
(c) wavelength (d) permittivity
(d) Acceptance angle
83. Boosting of higher frequency at the transmitter 94. The resolution of a TV picture is determined by
is done by using (a) Video amplification factor
(a) De-emphasis (b) AGC circuit (b) Video bandwidth
(c) Pre-emphasis (d) Armstrong method (c) The number of frames scanned
84. The purpose of source coding is to (d) The output of the video detector
(a) increase the information transmission rate 95. A microprogram
(b) decrease the information transmission rate (a) is usually written in high level language
(c) decrease the S/N rate (b) is a sequencing program for the control unit
(d) decrease the probability error. of any processor
85. Which of the following can be used to improve (c) is a program for microcomputers
(d) is a program written in assembly language
range resolution in a Radar?
96. For rms 100 value triangular wave, the peak
(a) Short duration pulse
voltage will be:
(b) Long duration pulse (a) 173 V (b) 141 V
(c) High frequency of operating signal (c) 111 V (d) 100 V
(d) Increasing pulse width 97. A Virus can not_______________
86. When the 8051 is reset and the line is HIGH, (a) Steal hard disk space
the program counter points to the first (b) Steal CPU time
program instruction in the (c) Log keystrokes
(a) internal code memory (d) Increase/decrease the word length of CPU
(b) external code memory 98. The hot wire ammeter:
(c) internal data memory (a) Is used only for dc circuits
(d) external data memory (b) High precision instrument
87. Which of these has highly doped p and n region? (c) Used only for ac circuit
(a) Tunnel diode (b) Schottky diode (d) Reads equally well on dc and ac circuit
(c) Photo diode (d) PIN diode 99. A 3-phase full wave bridge rectifier yields
88. Avalanche Photodiodes are preferred over PIN ____diodes.
diodes in optical communication systems because of (a) three (b) eight
(a) speed of operation. (c) four (d) six
(b) higher sensitivity. 100. In a Bode magnitude plot, which one of the
(c) large bandwidth. following slopes would be exhibited at high
(d) large power handling capacity. frequencies by a 4 th order all-pole system?
89. A semiconductor RAM has a 12-bit address (a) -80 dB/decade
register and an 8-bit data register. The total (b) -40 dB/decade
number of bits in the memory is (c) +40 dB/decade
(a) 256 bits (b) 4,096 bits (d) +80 dB/decade
Practice Set-6 79 YCT
 Answer Key
1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (c) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (a) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (a) 17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (d)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (a) 25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (c) 29. (c) 30. (b)
31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (a) 34. (d) 35. (a) 36. (c) 37. (d) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (b)
41. (a) 42. (d) 43. (b) 44. (a) 45. (b) 46. (a) 47. (b) 48. (d) 49. (d) 50.(a)
51. (c) 52. (a) 53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (b) 56. (c) 57. (c) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (c)
61. (b) 62. (c) 63. (a). 64. (a) 65. (b) 66. (c) 67. (a) 68.(c) 69. (a) 70. (a)
71. (a) 72. (a) 73. (d) 74. (d) 75. (b) 76. (a) 77. (b) 78. (b) 79. (a) 80. (b)
81. (c) 82. (d) 83. (c) 84. (a) 85. (a) 86.(a) 87. (a) 88.(d) 89. (c) 90. (a)
91. (b) 92. (a) 93. (c) 94. (c) 95. (b) 96. (a) 97. (d) 98. (d) 99. (d) 100. (a)

Solution
1. (a) 3. (a) ASK signaling scheme is most affected by noise as
According to Einstein's Relation- minimum distance between two signaling most is r in ASK
At constant temperature, ratio of diffusion constant with compare to other modulation technique.
to mobility is constant and it is equal to thermal 4. (a)
voltage. For 2's Complement representation, the range of values
It gives the relationship between diffusion constant, that can be represented on data bus of an 8-bit
mobility & thermal voltage. microprocessor (n = 8) is -
−2 n −1 to + 2n −1 − 1
D Dn
= VT = VT → For electron
µ µn −28 −1 to + 28−1 − 1
−128 to + 127
µ 1 DP
= = VT → For hole 5. (c)
D VT µP
Let each stage take T units of time.
µ So, N state units of time = N × T
= VT−1
D N×T
Hence, speed up from N stage pipeline = =N
Where → D = Diffusion constant T
VT = Thermal voltage The speed up factor cannot be greater than number of
stages in pipeline. Hence, the speedup will be equal to
µ = mobility
N.
2. (a) 6. (c)
As diode is forward biased then it will act like a short Equal voltage distribution is obtained by connecting a
circuit (S.C) suitable resistance across every SCR such that each
parallel combination has the same resistance. These
type of circuit is known as equalizing circuit.
7. (d)
As we know
Transfer function = L{Impulse response}
Given, Impulse response (IR) = e–8t
So,
T.F = L{e–8t}
+3V − ( −3V ) =
1
∵ L{ e–at } =
1
I=
10k s+8 s+a
8. (a)
=
( 3 + 3) V = 6
= 0.6mA
10 × 103 10 × 103 y ( n + 1) + 0.5n y ( n ) = 0.5x ( n + 1) is linear system, time
varying system, causal system and dynamic system.
V = −3V and I = 0.6 mA
Memory less system is also called static system.
Practice Set-6 1 YCT
9. (c) 15. (d)
The line code that has zero dc component for pulse The fatigue life of a part can be improved by Shot
transmission of random binary data is Alternate Mark peening.
Inversion (AMI). Shot peening is a cold work process used to finish metal
10. (d) parts to prevent fatigue and stress corrosion failures and
prolong product life for the part.
• A low pass filter circuit basically an integrating
circuit with larger time constant. In shot peening, a small spherical shot bombards the
surface of the part to be finished.
• A low pass filter is a circuit can be designed to
16. (a)
modify, reshape or reject all unwanted high
frequencies of an electrical signal and accept or pass Dielectric loss, loss of energy that goes into heating a
only low frequency signals wanted by the circuit dielectric material in a varying electric field.
designer. Dielectric loss (P) = 2πf V2C cos(90º – θ) {∵φ = 900–
θ}
(P) = 2πf V2C sinθ
In most of the dielectric, the angle θ is very small -
∴ sinθ = tanθ
P = 2πf V2C tanθ
So,
[Low Pass Filter]
The dielectric loss is proportional to f.
V0 ( s ) 1 1 1 17. (d)
= T.F. = = =
Vi ( s ) 1 + sCR 1 + sT 1 + jωT π
2
V( 0) ( t ) = V0 e−1/ T ∫ sin θ dθ
6

0
Less the time constant → Faster will be the discharge
Here n = even
More the time constant → Slower will be the discharge
(6 − 1)(6 − 3)(6 − 5) π
So, for the capacitor to act as an integrator. =
(6 − 0)(6 − 2)(6 − 4) 2
11. (b)
5 3 1 π 5π
White noise consists of signals of all frequency. = × × × =
6 4 2 2 32
Random signals are considered as white if they are
observed to have a flat spectrum its spectral density 18. (c)
remains constant or uniform. Iris wave guide is difficult to adjust Iris wave guide is
12. (a) basically just an obstruction sitting within the wave
guide.
Physical layer is not the layer of TCP/IP protocol.
19. (d)
TCP/IP model has 4 layers-
• Consider the P-N diode for Ge 0.3 eV is the
(i) Application layer. breakdown voltage and in the case of silicon (Si) its
(ii) Transport layer 0.7eV Since the Impurities are added in the same
(iii) Internet layer amount the bond due to the other atoms of the silicon
(iv) Network access layer. makes it resistive compared to the Ge.
13. (c) • When a sample of germanium and silicon having
same impurity density are kept at room temperature
In 8085 microprocessor overflow flags are not
available. There are five flags in 8085 microprocessor then, Resistivity of silicon will be higher than that of
(i) Carry flag (ii) Auxiliary carry flag (iii) Sign flag (iv) Germanium.
Parity flag (v) Zero flag. 20. (d)
14. (a) • Hall element are used in sensor to time the speed of
Frequency shift in the BFSK-Range in 50 to 1000 Hz. wheels and shafts.
Binary phase-shift keying is a digital modulation • Varactor diode or varicap diodes are used mainly in
scheme that conveys data by changing, or modulating, radio frequency to provide voltage controlled
two different phase of a reference signal. variable capacitor tunning in tank circuit.

Practice Set-6 81 YCT

• SCR are mainly used in device where the control of Dimension of reluctance-
high power application. MMF NI
Reluctance(S) = =
• Schottky barrier diode is widely used in different Flux φ
application like a microwave mixer. Reluctance (S) = [M–1 L–2 T2 I2]
21. (a)
24. (a)
A BJT is stands for Bipolar junction transistor it is a
The sensitivity of a potentiometer can be increased by
three terminal device. It's base has smallest area to
increasing the length of wire.
reduce the transit time and it is a CC device.
 1 
22. (a) potential gradient ∝  
Write input KVL and output KCL equation  sensitivity 
V1 = h11I1 + h12 V2  potentialdifference 
potential gradient ( K ) =  
I 2 = h 21I1 + h 22 V2  length of wire 
V1 = 8I1 + V2 25. (d)
V2 y = A + AB
I2 = 0.8 I1 +
4 y = ( A + A ) ( A + B)
8 1
 h11 h12  8 1  y=A+B
h =  1  = 
 21 h 22  0.8 
0.8 0.25 26. (b)
 4 
23. (d)
Dimension of resistance-
V W
R= & V=
I Q

[ML2T −2 ]
V= = [ML2T −3I −1 ] W = [ML2T–2]
[IT]
Q = [IT]
V
R= = [ML2T −3I −2 ]
I
R = [ML2 T–3 I–2] 27. (b)
Dimension of Inductance- Triac–An SCR is a unidirectional device as it can
conduct from anode to cathode only and not from
Nφ φ
L= ,= L ∝ cathode to anode. But TRIAC is directional.
I I
φ = [ML2 I–1 T–2]
[ML2 I −1T −2 ]
L=
[I]
L = [ML2 I –2 T–2]
28. (c)
Dimension of capacitance- Diode - Forward resistance
q  W SCR - Holding current
C=
V  V = q  , q = [IT] BJT - Active region
 
FET - Pinch off voltage
q2 Forward resistance- The opposition offered by diode
C= [W = F.d = ma.d]
W to DC flowing current in forward bias condition is
a = [LT–2] known as DC forward resistance or static resistance.
Holding current-Holding current of SCR is that
[I 2T 2 ]
C= W = [M L2 T–2] minimum value of current below which anode current
[ML2T −2 ] becomes zero and thyristor must fall to come in OFF
C = [M–1 L–2 T4 I2] state.
Practice Set-6 82 YCT
Active region- Active region is the region between cut 32. (b)
off and saturation region in a bipolar junction transistor.
In this region collector- base junction remains reverse
biased and base- emitter junction is in forward biased.
Pinch off voltage- Pinch off voltage refers the threshold
voltage below which device turn off. Behaviour of uncharged inductor after excitation i.e. at
In FETs, the pinch off voltage is the value of VDS when t=0+ is open circuit.
drain current reaches constant saturation value.
29. (c)
Type Step input Ramp Parabolic
input input
Type-0 A/1+K ∞ ∞ V 20
i= = = 1 Amp.
R 20
Type-1 0 A/k ∞
33. (a)
Type-2 0 0 A/k Given a = 2i − 2 j − k and b = 3i + 2 j + k
30. (b)
| a |= 2 2 + ( −2 ) 2 + (1)2 = 3
ejω0t x( t ) ← 
F.T.
→X( ω−ω0 )
and a.b = ( 2i − 2 j − k ) . ( 3i + 2 j + k )
We know that
1← 
F .T .
→ 2 π δ (ω ) = (6 – 4 – 1) = 1
a.b 1
∴ejω0t1← 
F.T
→2πδ( ω−ω0 ) Then, projection of b on a = =
|a| 3
1 jω0t
δ ( ω− ω0 ) ←
I.F.T.
→ e 34. (d)
2π Overall noise figure F of the system is
31. (b) F2 − 1
F = F1 +
The circuit can be redrawn as: G1
F1 = F2 = 10dB = 10 in absolute units
G1 = 10 dB = 10 in absolute units
10 − 1
So, F = 10 +
10
9
= 10 +
10
The bridge is balanced and the current through middle = 10 + 0.9
branch will be 0. = 10.9
35. (a)
2
Energy density spectrum = S(f )
2
= 19
= 361
36. (c)
ARQ (Automatic repeat request) is an error control and
packet recover method for data transmission in which
the receiver sends an alert to the sender if a packet is
missing, So that the sender can resend the missing
packet.
∴ Cab = C1 + C 2 37. (d) XRA A←A⊕A
= 0.05 + 0.05 The content of accumulator (A) will be zero after XRA
Cab = 0.1µF A Hence result is zero So, Zero flag is set.
Practice Set-6 83 YCT
38. (d) 44. (a)
The performance of cache memory is frequently measured Component Symbol
in terms of a quantity called hit ratio. We can improve
cache performance using higher cache block size, higher (a) NPN Transistor
associatives, reduce miss rate, reduce miss penalty and
reduce the time to hit in the cache.
hit no.of hits
Hit ratio = =
hit + miss Totalaccesses (b) SCR
39. (c)
N2 3
Given that, = , V1 = 240 V
N1 1 (c) FET
V2 = ?
V2 N 2 V 3
∵ = ⇒ 2 = ⇒ V2 = 720V.
V1 N1 240 1
(d) MOSFET
Thus Vmax = 2 × 720 = 1018.23V and frequency
always remains constant
40. (b)
45. (b)
Flux φ
Flux density = B= Operating cycle of class C amplifier is less than one -
Area A Half cycle means the conduction angle is less than 180º
φ = 1.2 mWb = 1.2 × 10–3 Wb and its typical values is 80º to 120º.
A = 30 cm2 = 30 × 10–4 m2 46. (a)
Given,
1.2 × 10 −3
flux density = = 0.4 T β = 0.01
30 ×10 −4
A = 50
41. (a)
R 1 = 2.87kΩ
Given A ⊂ B ⇒ n ( A ∩ B ) = n ( A )
In voltage series F.B, Rif = Ri × D
P ( A ∩ B)
∴ P ( A / B) = D = 1+βA
P ( B) = 1+0.01(50)
P(A) 3
= D=
P ( B) 2
1 1 Rif = Ri×D
=
4 3 3
= 2.87 ×
3 2
=
4 R if = 4.305kΩ
= 0.75 47. (b)
42. (d) Energy meter is integrating type instrument. It is a
The mode with lowest cut-off frequency for an device that measures the amount of electrical energy
electromagnetic wave propagating between two consumption.
perfectly conducting parallel plates of infinite extent is 48. (d)
TEM. The transmission line which consists of two or According to given logic circuit
more conductors can support TEM wave propagation.
F = S1 S 0 I0 + S1S0 I1 + S1 S 0 I2 + S1S0 I3
43. (b) Given,
S = 40 ∂ICO = 1 µA F = A BC + ABC + ABC + ABC

∂IC F = AC(B + B) + AC(B + B)

S=
∂ICO F = AC ×1 + AC ×1
∂IC = 40 ×1 = 40µA F = A⊕C
Practice Set-6 84 YCT
49. (d) When n - flip-flop are cascaded then final output 55. (b)
frequency, Vm
f 100 Modulation index of AM =
f out = inn = 3 Vc
2 2
56. (c) An antenna is a reciprocal device, Whose
f out = 12.5Hz characteristics are same when it is transmitting or
50.(a) Given that, receiving. Thus, an antenna when radiating has a highly
directive radiation pattern, the receiving antenna will
1 + 0.5s
Transfer function = .....(i) also have the same pattern.
1+ s
57. (c)
Pole → s = –1
If interrupt service request have been received from
−1
Zero → s = = −2 RST 5.5, RST 6.5 and RST 7.5 then RST 7.5 will be
0.5 serviced at last.
Pole is closer to origin than the zero. Then T.F. 58. (b)
represents a lag network.
PROLOG is logic programming language which is
51. (c) mainly used in Artificial intelligence and computational
Given, procedures.
s 4 + 6s 3 + 11s 2 + 6s + K = 0 59. (b)
Routh tabulation- It has been found that induction motor, particularly the
s4 1 11 K squirrel-cage type, sometime exhibit a tendency to run
s3 6 6 0 stably at speeds as low as one-seventh of their
synchronous speed (Ns). This phenomenon is known as
s2 10 K crawling of an induction motor.
60 − 6K 60. (c) The intrinsic semiconductor concentration is the
s1 0
10 number of electron in the conduction band or the
s0 K number of holes in valence band in intrinsic material.
For stability K > 0 and 60 – 6K >0 n ∝ T3 / 2
10>K 61. (b)
Hence, the range of K- sin t
0 <K <10 ←→ sinc function
t
52. (a) Duality
Flat top sampling of low pass filter signals give rise to
x ( t ) ←
→ x ( ω)
aperture effect. Aperture effect can be improved by
selecting the value of pulse width. x ( t ) ←
→ 2πx ( −ω )
53. (d)
x ( t ) ←
F.T
→ x (f )
Apply KVL in loop-
−3i a + 4i a + 12 = 0 x ( t ) ←
→ x ( −f )

i a = −12 rect ( t ) ←

F.T
→ sinc ( f )
Vm = –36V sinc ( t ) ←
→ rect ( −f ) (even function)
54. (a) Electric flux intensity due to uniform surface,
sinc ( t ) ←
→ rect ( f )
σ
(E) =
2ε 0 62. (c)
In a microwave oven foodstuff is cooked by the
D = ε0E phenomena that in dielectric heating in which
60 × 10−6 B2max f 2
D= We ∝
2 ρ
D = 30 µ C/m2 ρ = resistivity of metal
Hence, electric flux density at a plane (x = 8) = – Bmax= Maximum flux density
30 aɵ x µ C / m 2 . We = eddy current loss.

Practice Set-6 85 YCT

• By controlling the flux density and supply frequency 66. (c)
the amount of heat can be controlled. Power loss due to A dual trace CRO has a single electron gun whose
eddy current appears in the form of heat. In a electron beam is splited into two by an electronic
microwave thermal energy used which is known as switch. There is one control for focus and another for
dielectric heating. intensity. It has one electron gun with one two pole
63. (a). switch.
67. (a)
Input frequency fi = 100 Hz
No. of T flip-flop n = 3
fi 100 100
final output frequency f0 = = 3 = = 12.5Hz.
Tunnel diode is a highly doped semiconductor diode 2n 2 8
the fermi level lies inside the conduction band on n-side 68. (c)
and inside the valance band on p-side, because of this
The quantization in which the quantization levels are
heavy doping.
unequal and mostly the relation between them is
64. (a) logarithmic, is called non-uniform quantization.
A colpitts oscillator is a type of LC oscillator, and it Non-uniform quantization is a PCM system leads to
generates sinusoidal output signals with very high higher average signal to noise ratio.
frequency. Colpitts oscillator circuit uses two capacitors 69. (a)
and one inductor.
Laplace of impulse function
δ ( t ) ←
→1
z-transform of impulse function
δ ( n ) ←
→1
Fourier transform of impulse function
δ ( jωn ) ←
→1

70. (a)
Y

Output Y(s)
Network function H(s) = =
Input X(s)
71. (a)
The electric susceptibility and relative permittivity are
related as χ =εr − 1
72. (a)
65. (b)
 µ2 
 –g R  PT = PC  1 + 
Ad  m c  2 
CMRR = =  –R c  = 2g m R E
A cm  2R  PC = Carrier Power
E
  µ = Modulation Index
−R C PT = 50 +10 = 60W
A cm =
2R E µ = 100% = 1

As R E ↑→ A d ↑→ A c ↓→ CMRR ↑  1
60 = PC 1 + 
 2
When RE is increased then Acm is decreased and CMRR
increases. PC = 40W

Practice Set-6 86 YCT

73. (d) Propagation time delay :- this is the average transition
total bandwidth delay time for the signal to propagate from input to
No. of station = output when signal changes its value. This determines
Bandwidth per station
how fast the logic system can operate.
50 kHz
= t PHL + t PHL
5kHz t pd = ns
2
No. of station =10
tPHL– Delay time going from high logic to low logic.
74. (d) tPHL– Delay time going from low logic to high logic.
The range of the radar is given - Power dissipation :- It is determined by the current Icc
1/ 4
 P G 2 σA  which draws from the Vcc supply.
R= t 2 e PD(avg) = ICC × Vcc mW
 ( 4π ) Pr 
G = Antenna gain • for the best operation of IC's, figure of merit should be
σ = Radar x-section small as possible.
Pr = Reflected power 81. (c) The conversion time for Successive
Ae = Effective area of the Antenna approximation type ADC -

R ∝ ( Pt )
1/ 4  1 
= n × TCLK ∵ TCLK = 
 f CLK 
Now to double the range R, Pt has to be increased by a
factor of 16. 1
= 10 ×
75. (b) FCLK
8251 IC is a USART. USART is standing for universal
10
synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter acts as a =
mediator between microprocessor and peripheral to 1MHz
transmit serial data. 10
76. (a) =
1× 106
Superconducting material in super conduction state has = 10 µs
zero relative permeability because at super conducting
state inside the conductor B = 0. 82. (d)
Perfect diamagnetism means induced magnetic field Depth of penetration or skin depth (δ) may be defined
cancels exactly the applied magnetic field. This as -
exclusion of magnetic flux from the interior of a 1 2 ε
superconductor is called the Meissner effect. δ= =
α σ µ
77. (b)
The microwave tube that uses buncher and catcher σ µ
Where, α = = attenuation constant in a lossy
cavities is klystron. Klystron are used at ultra high 2 ε
frequency and 100 GHz frequency operation band. dielectric.
78. (b) Hence, depth of penetration of a wave in a lossy
The important blocks of IC 555 timer has two dielectric increases with increasing permittivity.
comparators, which are basically 2 operational 83. (c)
amplifiers an R-S flip flop, two transistors and a
The artificial boosting of higher modulating frequencies
resistive network.
is called as pre-emphasis.
79. (a)
84. (a) Source coding is used to reduce the redundancy
Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) LVDT to improve the efficiency which make information rate
is the most widely used inductive transducer for increase.
converting the linear motion into proportional output
85. (a)
electrical voltage.
Range resolution is the ability of a radar to distinguish
80. (b)
between two or more targets which are very close to
Figure of merit (FOM)
each other.
FOM = tpd × PD(avg) pico joules
If short duration pulse is used then pulse repetition
Where tpd = propagation time delay. frequency increases causing Improvement in range
PD = power dissipation. resolution.
Practice Set-6 87 YCT
86.(a) 94. (c)
In 8051 microcontroller when line is HIGH, PC points T.V. Resolution is defined by the amount of Horizontal
internal code memory if it is reset. and vertical pixels.
87. (a) If Resolution is high, the quality of picture will be high.
It is depends on the number of frames scanned per second.
A tunnel diode or Esaki diode is a type of
semiconductor diode that has effectively "negative 95. (b)
resistance" due to quantum mechanical effect. Tunnel Microprogram is a microinstruction program that
diode has highly doped p and n region. controls the instructions of a central processing unit or
peripheral controller of a computer.
88.(d)
96. (a)
Avalanche photodiodes are preferred over PIN diodes in
optical communication system because of large power Rms value for triangular wave
handling capacity. V
Vrms = m
89. (c) 3
A = Address register = 12 bit Vm
100 =
D = Data register is 8 bit 3
Memory size = 2A × D Vm = 100 3V ⇒ Vm = 173.2V
= 212× 8
97. (d)
= 212 × 23
Viruses often perform harmful activity on infected host
= 215 computers. Such as acquisition of hard disk space or
= 32768 bits central processing unit (CPU) time. Resident viruses
90. (a) install itself and resides in RAM and overwrite interrupt
handling code and when the operating system attempts
From De Morgan's theorem - to access the target file or disk sector, the virus code
F = xy or F=x+y intercepts the request and redirects the control flow to
the replication module, infecting the target this virus
F=x+y F = x.y steals the CPU time.
91. (b) Keystorke logging (Keyboard capturing) is the action of
recording the keys struck on the a keyboard so that
nth harmonic can be eliminated by the pulse width
person using the keyboard is unware that their actions
2× π
= are being monitored.
n Keyloggers are most often used for the purpose of
n=5 stealing passwords.
2 × 180 Keylogger viruses are zeus and SpyEye trojans viruses
Pulse width = cannot affect the word length (increase/ decrease the
5
address size) of CPU.
= 72º 98. (d)
92. (a) Hot wires ammeters uses the heating effect of current so
• Encoding is possible in PCM very high noise it is all the same for both ac and dc as heat generated is
square function of current.
immunity i.e. better performance in presence of
Noise. Convenient for long distance communication. Hot wire instrument is made up of platinum-Iridium
wire.
• PCM have largest bandwidth. It is the biggest 99. (d)
disadvantage as compared to AM system. A 3-phase full wave bridge rectifier yields six diodes.
• Good signal to Noise Ratio compare to AM. 100. (a)
93. (c) Given system is 4th order all pole system that means it
has four (4) poles only at origin.
Numerical aperture (N.A) = n12 − n 22
K
G(s) = 4
Numerical aperture is used to describe the light s
gathering ability of an optical fiber. Numerical aperture
Slope in Bode magnitude plot = –4×20 dB/dec.
is a measure of acceptance angle of a fiber. It also gives
the light gathering capacity of the fiber. = –80 dB/dec

Practice Set-6 88 YCT

 PRACTICE SET - 7
1. The electrical conductivity of pure 7.
semiconductor is :
(a) Proportional to temperature
(b) Increases exponentially with temperature
(c) Decreases exponentially with temperature
(d) Not altered with temperature Calculate the closed loop gain of the given
2. The circuit shown in figure is a system.
(a) positive peak clipper 11 11
(a) (b) −
(b) positive clamper 5 5
(c) differentiator 6 6
(c) − (d)
(d) negative clamper 5 5
8. A function of one or more variables which
conveys information on the nature of physical
phenomenon is called
(a) Noise (b) Interference
(c) System (d) Signal
9. Compression in PCM refers to relative
3. Which modulation technique does NOT use
compression of
past information for modulation?
(a) higher signal amplitudes
(a) Delta Modulation
(b) lower signal amplitudes
(b) Adaptive Delta Modulation
(c) lower signal frequencies
(c) Pulse Code Modulation
(d) higher signal frequencies
(d) Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
10. An active filter uses
4. The best representation of negative numbers is (a) Resistors and inductors
(a) sign magnitude form (b) Resistors and capacitors
(b) 1's complement form (c) Inductors only
(c) 2's complement form (d) Capacitors only
(d) 9's complement form
11. The variance σ 2 of a random variable X is
5. An 'Assembler' for a microprocessor is used given by
for
(a) E[X2]
(a) Assembly of processor in a production line
(b) {E[X]}2
(b) Creation of new programmers using different
(c) E [X2] −{E[X]}2
modules
(d) E [X2]+{E[X]}2
(c) Translation of a program from assembly
12. TCP/IP is a _______ layered standard.
language to machine language
(a) 5 (b) 4
(d) Translation of a higher level language in to
(c) 7 (d) 8
English text
13. In 8085 microprocessor the value of the most
6. An SCR triggered by a current pulse through
signification bit of the result following the
its gate can be turned off by
execution of any arithmetic or Boolean
(a) giving another pulse of the same polarity to
instruction is stored in
the gate
(a) The carry status flag
(b) by giving pulse so the cathode
(c) by giving pulse to the anode (b) The auxiliary carry status flag
(d) by reversing the polarity of anode and (c) The sign status flag
cathode voltage (d) The zero status flag
Practice Set-7 89 YCT
14. The binary waveform used to generate BPSK (c) Active region
signal is encoded in (d) does not depend on temperature
(a) Manchester coding 22. A CE-amplifier has RL = 10kΩ. Given
(b) Differential coding hie = 1kΩ, hfe = 50, hre = 0 & 1/hoe = 40 kΩ.
(c) Bipolar NRZ format What is the voltage gain?
(d) NRZ (a) – 500 (b) – 400
15. If the flux through a 200-turn coil changes (c) – 50 (d) – 40
steadily from 1Wb to 4Wb. in 1 second, the 23. A 1-mA meter movement with an internal
induced voltage is: resistance of 100Ω is to be converted into a 0-
(a) 300 (b) 600 100 mA ammeter. The value of shunt resistance
(c) 800 (d) 1200 will be
16. The medium behaves like dielectric when the (a) 2.41Ω (b) 2.01Ω
(a) Displacement current is just equal to the (c) 1.41Ω (d) 1.01Ω
conduction current. 24. A Kelvin double bridge is best suited for the
(b) Displacement current is less than the measurement of
conduction current. (a) inductance (b) capacitance
(c) Displacement current is much greater than the (c) low resistance (d) high resistance
conduction current. 25. According to Boolean law : A + 1 = ?
(d) Displacement current is almost negligible. (a) 1 (b) A
∫e
ax
17. dx is equal to: (c) 0 (d) A'
26. Which gate corresponds to the action of
1 − ax
(a) e −c (b) e−ax + c parallel switches ?
a (a) AND gate (b) OR gate
1 (c) NAND gate (d) NOR gate
(c) eax + c (d) eax + c
a 27. An SCR is sometimes called……….
18. A signal propagated in a waveguide has a full (a) Triac
wave of electric intensity change between the (b) Diac
two walls and no component of the electric field (c) Unijunction transistor
in the direction of propagation. The mode is (d) Thyristor
(a) TE11 (b) TE10 28. A thyristor equivalent of thyratron tube is
(c) TM22 (d) TE20 (a) SCR (b) UJT
(c) Diac (d) Triac
19. In the Fermi-Dirac statistics, the probability of
electron occupancy of an energy level equal to 29. If the characteristic equation of a closed-loop
the Fermi level is system is 2s2 + 6s + 6 = 0, then the system is :
(a) overdamped (b) critically damped
(a) 0 (b) 0.25 (c) 0.5 (d) 1.0
(c) underdamped (d) undamped
20. The current through a PN junction diode with
V volts applied to the P region relative to the N 30. The inverse Fourier transform of the function
1
region (where I0 is the reverse saturation F (ω ) = + πδ ( ω ) is
current of the diode, m is the ideality factor, K jω
is the Boltzmann constant, T is the absolute (a) sin ωt (b) cos ωt
temperature and q the magnitude of charge on (c) sgn (t) (d) u(t)
an electron) is
31. Which of the following bulbs will have the least
 qV   − qV  resistance?
(a) I0  e mKT − 1 (b) I0  mKT 
  e −1  (a) 220V, 60 W
(b) 220 V, 100 W
 qV   qV 
(c) I0  mKT 
(d) I0  mKT  (c) 115 V, 60 W
 1 − e   e + 1  (d) 115 V, 100 W
21. If the temperature increases then the Q point in 32. A first order circuit is excited with a dc source.
dc load line will be moving towards The current i(t) through any element of the
(a) Cut-off region circuit can be written as (if and ii are the final
(b) Saturation region and initial values, respectively, of the current)
Practice Set-7 90 YCT
 (a) i1 – (i1 – if) e-t/τ 41. The probability that a leap year has 53
(b) if – (if – ii) e–t/τ Sundays is
(c) ii – (if – ii) e–t/τ 1 2
(a) (b)
(d) if – (ii – if) e–t/τ 7 7
33. Which one of the following statements is 5 6
(c) (d)
correct? 7 7
(a) Both Lapace’s and Poisson’s equation are 42. For parallel plane waveguides, which is the
non-linear equations. mode with lowest cut-off frequency?
(b) Laplace’s equation is non-linear but Poissonֹ’s (a) TE10 (b) TM10
equation is linear (c) TEM (d) TE11
(c) Laplace’ equation is linear but Poisson’s 43. Match List-I (Biasing of the junctions) with
equation is non-linear List-II (Functions) and select the correct
(d) Both Lapace’s and Poisson’s equations are answer using the codes given below the lists:
linear. List-I List-II
34. 1 mW in dBm is: (Biasing of the (Functions)
(a) 0 dBm (b) –30 dBm junctions)
(c) 30 dBm (d) 1 dBm A. E-B junction 1. Very low gain
35. Probability density function defines forward bias and amplifier
C-B junction
(a) Amplitudes of random noise
reverse bias
(b) Density of signal
B. Both E-B and C- 2. Saturation
(c) Probability of error
B junctions condition
(d) Constellation diagram forward bias
36. In OSI Reference model, which layer is C. E-B junctions 3. High gain
responsible for the process to process delivery reverse bias and amplifier
of the entire message? C-B junction
(a) Data Link Layer forward bias
(b) Transport Layer D. Both E-B and C- 4. Cut-off
(c) Network Layer B junctions condition
(d) Application Layer reverse bias
37. The 8085 supports----------number of Codes:
instructions, with ------number of addressing A B C D
modes and operates at ----------MHz frequency. (a) 2 3 1 4
(a) 74 , 5, 3 (b) 256, 4, 6 (b) 3 2 1 4
(c) 74, 4, 6 (d) 256, 5, 6 (c) 3 2 4 1
38. What are the commands to the assembler itself, (d) 2 3 4 1
called? 44. An N-chanel enhancement mode MOSFET
(a) Macros with threshold voltage of 1 V is biased at VGS =
2 V and VDS = 2 V. If the drain voltage is
(b) Macro instructions
doubled to 4 V, the drain to source current will
(c) Micro instructions
(a) double
(d) Pseudo instructions (b) more than double
39. A step- up transformer increases (c) increase only slightly
(a) Voltage (b) Current (d) become half
(c) Frequency (d) Power 45. The efficiency of a Class - B amplifier for a
40. Soft iron is used to manufacture supply of VCC = 24 V and peak output voltages
electromagnets because it has VL(P) = 22 V is
(a) High retentivity (a) 41.2%
(b) High coercive field (b) 72%
(c) Low retentivity (c) 19.6%
(d) Low coercive field (d) 29.1%
Practice Set-7 91 YCT
46. Voltage amplifier uses feedback  t

topology. S. A sin ωc t + k ∫ m ( t ) dt 
(a) current series (b) voltage shunt  –∞ 
(c) voltage series (d) current shunt Group 2
47. For the measurement of electrical energy, we W. Phase modulation
may use a X. Frequency modulation
(a) Wattmeter Y. Amplitude modulation
(b) KWh meter Z. DSB-SC modulation
(c) Multimeter (a) P-Z, Q-Y, R-X, S-W (b) P-W, Q-X, R-Y, S-Z
(d) Voltmeter, ammeter and PF meter (c) P-X, Q-W, R-Z, S-Y (d) P-Y, Q-Z, R-W, S-X
48. How many select lines are needed in a 56. Cassegrain feed is used with a parabolic
multiplexer (MUX) with 1024 inputs and one reflector to -
output? (a) Increase the bandwidth
(a) 16 (b) 14 (b) Increase the gain
(c) 12 (d) 10 (c) Allow the feed to be placed at a convenient
49. In JK flip-flop which combination will toggle point
the output? (d) Reduce the size of the main reflector
(a) J = 0, K = 0 (b) J = 1, K = 1 57. TRAP is _______ whereas RST7.5, RST6.5,
(c) J = 1, K = 0 (d) J = 0, K = 1 RST5.5 are
50. Which one of the following is a disadvantage of (a) Maskable, Non Maskable
proportional controller? (b) Maskable, Maskable
(a) It destabilizes the system (c) Non Maskable, Non Maskable
(b) It produces offset (d) Non Maskable, Maskable
(c) It makes response faster 58. Which of these devices performs the function of
(d) It has very simple implementation both input device and output device for a
51. The characteristic polynomial of a system is computer ?
q(s) =2s5+s4+4s3+2s2+2s+1. The system is (a) Joy Stick (b) Mouse
(a) Stable (b) Marginally stable (c) Modem (d) Printer
(c) Unstable (d) Oscillatory 59. Slip ring induction motor has the advantages of
52. What is the Nyquist rate for the signal x(t) = (a) High starting torque and high overload
cos2000πt + 3sin6000πt ? capacity
(a) 2 kHz (b) 4 kHz (b) Nearly constant speed
(c) 12 kHz (d) 6 kHz (c) Low starting current in comparison to squirrel
cage induction motor
53. If a two-port network is reciprocal as well as
symmetrical, which one of the following (d) all of the above
relationships is correct? 60. Which of the following material is not a
(a) Z12 = Z21 and Z11 = Z22 semiconductor?
(b) Y12 = Y21 and Y11 = Y22 (a) Silica (b) Germanium
(c) AD – BC = 1 and A = D (c) Selenium (d) Gallium-arsenide
(d) All of the above  –4 2
61. Given the matrix  , the eigenvector is
54. Mark the incorrect relation 4 3 
(a) D = εE (b) B = µH  3  4
(a)   (b)  
(c) J = σE (d) B = µD  2  3
55. Find the correct match between group 1 and
2  –1
group 2. (c)   (d)  
Group 1  –1 2
P. {1 + km ( t )}A sin ( ωc t ) 62. The cut-off wavelength λc for TE20 mode for a
standard rectangular waveguide is
Q. km(t)A sin( ωct) (a) 2/a (b) 2a
R. A sin {ωc t + km ( t )} (c) a (d) 2a2
Practice Set-7 92 YCT
63. The diffusion capacitance of a p-n junction 71. The characteristic impedance η0 of a free space
diode is :
(a) Increases exponentially with forward bias µ0 µ0
voltage (a) (b)
ε0 ε0
(b) Decreases exponentially with forward bias
voltage (c) µ 0 ε0 (d) µ 0ε 0
(c) Decreases linearly with forward bias voltage 72. A receiver connected to an antenna whose
(d) Increases linearly with forward bias voltage resistance is 50 Ω has an equivalent noise
64. The Wien bridge oscillator is resistance of 30 Ω. Calculate the receiver's
(a) a free running oscillator noise figure in decibels.
(b) a square wave generator (a) 2.67 (b) 1.6
(c) a stable sine wave generator (c) 0.4 (d) 2.04
(d) also called cosine oscillator 73. For over modulation in AM
65. The large signal bandwidth of an op-amp is (a) Modulation Index is 0
limited by (b) Modulation Index is 1
(a) Its slew rate specification (c) Modulation Index is 0.5
(b) Its Gain-bandwidth product
(d) None of these
(c) CMRR
74. Random satellite moves in
(d) None of these
(a) random paths
66. For the Gaussian response, the rise time (tr)
(b) polar orbits
and bandwidth (BW) are related by
(c) geostationary orbits
(a) tr = 0.35/BW (b) tr = 0. 5/BW
(d) equatorial plane
(c) BW = 0.35tr (d) tr = 0.35BW
75. What type of circuit is used at the interface
67. A flip-flop is a
point of output port of 8085?
(a) Combinational logic circuit and edge
(a) Decoder (b) Latch
sensitive
(c) Tristate buffer (d) None of the above
(b) Sequential logic circuit and edge sensitive
(c) Combinational logic circuit and level 76. Superconductivity is observed for
sensitive (a) infrared frequencies
(d) Sequential logic circuit and level sensitive (b) d.c. and low frequency
68. Frequency modulated signal with single tone (c) a.c. and high frequency
modulation has frequency deviation of 20 kHz (d) none of the above
and bandwidth of 60 kHz. The frequency of the 77. Which transmission line is ideal for handling
modulating signal will be- high powers
(a) 5 kHz (b) 10 kHz (a) Coaxial line
(c) 20 kHz (d) 30 kHz
(b) Strip line
69. What is the spectral density of white noise?
(c) Micro strip
(a) A constant (b) δ(ω)
(d) Rectangular waveguide
(c) [δ(ω)]2 (d) A step function in ω
78. DC output drops from 50 V with no load to 48
70. The number of links in the graph shown in the
V with full load. Load regulation is
figure is
(a) 2% (b) 4%
(c) 1% (d) 8%
79. Three types of temperature transducers are
compared as regards their sensitivity. The
order in which they exhibit their sensitivities
(highest to lowest) is
(a) Thermistors, RTDs, thermocouples
(b) Thermocouples, RTDs, thermistors
(a) 3 (b) 4 (c) RTDs, thermistors, thermocouples
(c) 2 (d) 5 (d) RTDs, thermocouples, thermistors
Practice Set-7 93 YCT
80. In standard TTL, the 'totem pole' refers to 92. For a given data rate, the bandwidth β p of a
(a) Multi-emitter input stage BPSK signal and the bandwidth β0 of the
(b) The phase splitter OQPSK signal are related as
(c) Open collector output stage (a) βp = β0/2 (b) βp = 2β0
(d) The output buffer (c) βp = β0/4 (d) βp = β0
81. The number of comparators required for
93. The fiber splice is a ___________ joint between
implementing an 8-bit flash analog-to-digital
converter is 2 fibers.
(a) 8 (b) 128 (a) Temporary (b) Permanent
(c) 255 (d) 256 (c) Demountable (d) Alignment
82. A λ/4 line, shorted at one end, presents 94. In Indian TV, video signal bandwidth is
impedance at the other end equal to (a) 15 kHz (b) 5 MHz
(a) Z0 (b) 2Z0 (c) 5.5 MHz (d) 7 MHz
(c) ∞ (d) 0 95. Mnemonic codes and variable names are used
in
83. The bandwidth of DSB suppressed carrier
modulation system when the modulating (a) a machine language
frequency varies between 500 Hz and 5 kHz is (b) an assembly language
(a) 555 kHz (b) 505 kHz (c) a high level language
(c) 500 kHz (d) 9 kHz (d) all of these
84. A random experiment has 64 equally likely 96. Crest factor is defined as:
outcomes. Find the information associated with
(a) Peak value/Avg. value
each outcome.
(a) 3 bits (b) 2 bits (b) RMS value/Peak value
(c) 6 bits (d) 5 bits (c) Average value/Peak value
85. Numerical aperture is describing the ability of (d) Peak value / RMS value
(a) Light Collection (b) Light Scattering 97. Which of the following is a linear data structure?
(c) Light Dispersion (d) Light Polarization (a) Binary tree (b) Graph
86. PLA (Programmable Logic Array) uses (c) Stacks (d) Tree
processor returns to 98. Q factor is measured using
(a) ROM matrices (b) PROM matrices (a) Reflect meter method
(c) RAM matrices (d) EPROM matrices (b) Transmission line method
87. Which of the following modulation schemes
(c) Power ratio method
gives the maximum probability of error?
(a) ASK (b) BFSK (d) Current ratio method
(c) DBPSK (d) PSK 99. Identify the given symbol.
88. Which of the following is a cross-field device?
(a) Travelling wave tube
(b) Two cavity klystron
(c) Magnetron
(d) Reflex klystron
89. PROM stands for
(a) Programmable Read Only Memory
(b) Pre-fed Read Only Memory
(a) SIDAC
(c) Pre-required Read Only Memory (b) TRIAC
(d) Programmed Read Only Memory (c) DIAC
90. De-Morgan's theorem states that_____ (d) PHOTO THYRISTOR
(a) (AB)' = A' + B' (b) (A + B)' = A' * B
100. In the Bode-plot of a unity feedback control
(c) A' + B' = A'B' (d) (AB)' = A' + B system, the value of phase of G(jω) at the gain
91. Consider a noiseless channel with a bandwidth
cross over frequency is–125º. the phase
of 4000 Hz transmitting a signal with two signal
levels. What can be the maximum bit rate? margin of the system is
(a) 2000 bps (b) 4000 bps (a) −125 (b) −55
(c) 8000 bps (d) 1000 bps (c) 55 (d) 125
Practice Set-7 94 YCT
 Answer Key
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (d) 9. (a) 10. (b)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (b) 23. (d) 24. (c) 25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (a) 29. (c) 30. (d)
31. (d) 32. (b) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (b) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (a) 40. (d)
41. (b) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (b) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (b)
51. (c) 52. (d) 53. (d) 54. (d) 55. (d) 56. (c) 57. (d) 58. (c) 59. (d) 60.(a)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (a) 64. (c) 65. (a) 66. (a) 67. (b) 68.(b) 69. (a) 70.(a)
71. (b) 72. (d) 73. (d) 74. (b) 75. (b) 76. (b) 77. (d) 78. (b) 79. (a) 80. (d)
81. (c) 82. (c) 83. (d) 84. (c) 85. (a) 86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (c) 89. (a) 90. (a)
91. (c) 92. (b) 93. (b) 94. (d) 95. (b) 96. (d) 97. (c) 98. (b) 99. (b) 100. (c)
Solution
1. (b) 6. (d)
The electrical conductivity of a semiconductor increases An silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) can triggered by a
exponentially with an increase in temperature because current pulse through gate can be turned off by
as temperature is increased more electrons get energy reversing polarity of anode and cathode voltage.
and can jump to the conduction band which increases 7. (c)
conductivity G −3
Closed loop gain ( T ) = =
σ = C T3 / 2 e − Eg / 2kT e ( α + β ) T −3/ 2 1 − GH 1 + 3 × 0.5
2. (b) −3 −6
= =
2.5 5
8. (d)
• A function of one or more variables which conveys
information on the nature of physical phenomenon
is called signal.
• Signal can be even, odd, periodic, a periodic,
Let Vi = ± Vm exponential etc.
(i) If Vi is − Vm : 9. (a)
Diode is in F.B. Compression in PCM refers to relative compression of
higher signal amplitudes. The combination of
C charges upto −Vm
compression and Expanding is also known as
(ii) If Vi is + Vm
companding.
Diode is in R.B
10. (b)
Capacitor can discharge through R
An active filter is a type of analog circuit implementing
an electronic filter using resistor and capacitors,
Vi V0 max typically an amplifier.
+ Vm 0V 11. (c)
−Vm 2Vm The variance σ 2 of a random variable X is given by E
3. (c) [X2] −{E[X]}2.
Pulse code modulation (PCM) is a method used to 12. (b)
digitally represent sampled analog signals. In this TCP/IP model is a communication protocol to
modulation techniques circuit not use past information interconnect network devices on the internet. TCP/IP
for modulation. model has 4 layers.
4. (c) TCP/IP is a 4 layered standard.
2's complement form is the best representation of all (a) Application layer
negative number in binary form. (b) Internet layer
5. (c) (c) Network access layer
An assembler is a type of computer program that (d) Transport layer
interprets software programs write in assembly 13. (c)
language into machine language code and instructions The most significant bit (MSB) represents the sign of
that can be executed by a computer. the number.

Practice Set-7 95 YCT

• If MSB = 1 ⇒ Indicates the number is negative and 1
At E = EF , f (E) = (for any value of temperature).
sign flag becomes set. 2
• If MSB = 0 ⇒ Indicates the number is positive and Then fermi level represents the energy state with 50%
sign flag becomes reset. probability of being filled electron.
So, it is stored in the sign status flag. 20. (a)
14. (c) The generalized current and voltage relation ship of
The binary wave from used to generate BPSK signal is diode-
encoded in bipolar NRZ (Non-return-to-zero) format.  qV 
I D = I0  e mKT − 1
15. (b)  
N=200 turn, dφ = ( 4 − 1) Wb , dt = 1sec Where,
dφ ID → diode current
Induced voltage ( E L ) = N I0 → Reverse saturation
dt
V →Voltage across diode
( 4 – 1)
= 200 × q → charge of electron (1.6×10–19C)
1
K → Voltage constant (1.38×10–23J/k)
EL= 600 volt
m → Ideality factor
16. (c)
T → Temperature (in kelvin)
The medium behaves like dielectric when the
21. (b)
displacement current is much greater than the
If the temperature increases then the Q point in dc load
conduction current and for reverse condition the
line will be moving towards saturation region.
substance behave as a conductor.
22. (b)
17. (c)
The general equation for the current gain of small signal
∫e ⋅ dx
ax
analysis of transistor amplifier
Let ax = t According to given question
dt 1 t 1 1 R L = 10kΩ h ie = 1kΩ h fe = 50
adx = dt ⇒ dx = = ∫ e ⋅ dt = e t + c = eax + c
a a a a 1
h re = 0 and = 40kΩ
18. (d) h oe
The mode is TE20. Av = ?
19. (c)
− h fe 50
Concept of fermi Dirac Function- It will provide Ai = =−
information about probability of finding electron at any 1 + h oe R L 1× 10 × 103
1+
energy level at any temperature and mathematically it 40 ×103
can be given by following formula. −50
= = −40
1 5
F(E) = (E − E F ) 4
1+ e kT
Z −40 × 10k
• Where, A v = Ai ⋅ L =
Zin 1k
F(E) = probability of finding e–
A v = −400
at any energy level.
E = Energy 23. (d)
EF = Fermi energy level (eV) Rm (Meter resistance) = 100Ω.
According to question- I 100 × 10−3
∵ At, E = E F m= = = 100
Im 1 × 10−3
at, T = 0º k Rm 100
Rsh = = = 1.01Ω
1 m − 1 100 − 1
f(E) = (E − E F )
24. (c)
1+ e kT
A Kelvin bridge or Kelvin double bridge is a modified
1 version of the Wheatstone bridge. A Kelvin double
f (E) =
2 bridge is best suited for the measurement of low
f (E) = 0.5 resistance.

Practice Set-7 96 YCT

 Measurement of resistance 29. (c)
Low Medium High resistance Given that,
resistance resistance (1Ω < (R >100kΩ) Characteristic equation,
(R < 1Ω) R < 100kΩ) 2s2 + 6s + 6 = 0
s2 + 3s +3 = 0
Ammeter- Voltmeter - Megger
voltmeter ammeter method Compare this equation with s 2 + 2ξωn s + ω2n = 0
method We get ω2n = 3 ⇒ ωn = 3
Kelvin double Wheatstone Direct
and 2ξωn = 3
bridge bridge deflection
method 2× ξ× 3 = 3
Potentiometer • Ohm-meter Loss of charge ξ = 0.866 ∵ξ < 1
• Carey foster method
Hence given system is underdamped system.
bridge
1
25. (a) 30. (d) Given, F(ω) = + πδ ( ω)
Boolean Law - jω
A+1=1 By taking inverse Fourier transform of F( ω), we get :
A+A=A 1
+ πδ ( ω) ←
I.F.T.
→u ( t )
A+0=A jω
A + A =1 31. (d)
A.A = 0 By checking option -
26. (b) V 2 220 × 220
OR gate corresponds to the action of parallel switches (i) R1 = = = 806.67 Ω
P 60
V 2 220 × 220
(ii) R 2 = = = 484 Ω
P 100
V 2 115 × 115
(iii) R 3 = = = 220.42 Ω
P 60
Y=A+B
V 2 115 × 115
(iv) R 4 = = = 132.25 Ω
P 100
• AND Gate corresponds to the action of series for least resistance, power should be more and voltage
switches. should be less.
32. (b)
Y = AB Given that,
if = final; value of current
ii = Initial value of current
Then the current i(t)
i(t) = final value + {initial value -final value} e-t/τ
27. (d) i(t) = i f + (i i − i f )e − t / τ
An SCR is sometimes called thyristor. It is four layer i(t) = i f − (i f − i i )e − t / τ
PNPN device. It is a rectifier with a control element.
Where τ = time constant of 1st order circuit.
33. (c)
−ρ v
Poisson's equation →∇2V =
ε0
Laplace equation →∇2V = 0
Laplace equation is linear but Poisson's equation non-
linear.
34. (a) Given that -
28. (a) Power in watt = 1 mW
The silicon controlled rectifier is a solid state equivalent P 10−3
of thyratron tube. The gate anode and cathode of SCR P (dBm) = 10 log10 = 10 log10
correspond to the grid, plate and cathode of thyratron 10−3 10−3
for this reason SCR is sometimes called thyristor. P (dBm) = 0

Practice Set-7 97 YCT

35. (a) Probability density function defines amplitudes Emitter-Base Collector-Bas Operating
of random noise. junction junction Region
36. (b) Forward biased Reverse biased Active
The transport layer is responsible for the process to Reverse biased Reverse biased Cut-off
process delivery of the entire message. The network
Forward biased Forward biased Saturation
layer is responsible for the source to destination
delivery of a packet, possibly across multiple networks. 44. (b) Given,
VT = 1V, VGS = 2V, VDS = 2V
37. (a)
ID = k (VGS –VT)2
8085 microprocessor-
ID = k (2–1)2
• It has 74 basic instructions with 246 op codes.
ID = k
• There are 5 addressing modes. When VDS = 4V
• There are 5 hardware interrupts available for 8085. then IDS = ?
• It is 8-bit processor. It has total 16 address line with ∵ VDS > (VGS – VTH) then IDS is more then double.
maximum memory handing capacity of 64kB. 45. (b)
• The crystal frequency of processor is 6MHz and the Given VCC = 24V
clock frequency is 3MHz. VL(P) = 22V
38. (a) π VL (P)
η= ×100
Assembler is a software that converts low level 4 VCC
language into the machine level language. Low level
π 22
language is also known as assembly language. η= × ×100
Assembly language uses Op-Code (Operation Code) 4 24
which is called mnemonics as ADD A, B = 71.99
Following instructions are given to Assembler – ≃ 72%
i) Pseudo instruction :- These are specific
commands which is given to the assembler to set 46. (c)
the program at right position.
ii) Micro instruction :- The micro instruction
program is the basic program given to the
assembler for execution of higher level program.
iii) Macro instruction :- Macro instructions are
bigger programs that are combined together to
make simple programs and it works as a single
instruction. Macro instructions are the commands
which are used for assembler itself. Type of Negative feedback
39. (a) Charact
A step- up transformer increases voltage but frequency eristic
Voltage Voltage Current Current
remain constant. series shunt series shunt
40. (d) Soft iron is generally used for making Voltage Decrease Decrease Decrease Decrease
electromagnet because it has low coercive field which is gain
less than 1000 A/m. Bandwidth Increase Increase Increase Increase
41. (b) A leap year consist 52 week and 2 days these Ri Increase Decrease Increase Decrease
two day may be (sun, mon), (mon, tues), (tues, wed),
R0 Decrease Decrease Increase Increase
(wed, thurs), (thurs, fri), (fri, sat), (sat, sun)
Harmonic Decrease Decrease Decrease Decrease
2 distortion
P(E) =
7 Noise Decrease Decrease Decrease Decrease
42. (c) 47. (b)
For TEM propagation it has two or more conductions For the measurement of electrical energy, we use kWh
and which has no cut off frequency that’s why it has a meter. It has two current coils and one pressure coil. A
lowest cutoff frequency fC = 0 permanent magnet is used for breaking torque. It’s
43. (b) pressure coil is highly inductive.
A transistor has two PN Junction. Emitter-base Junction
 N No. of revolution 
and collector-base Junctions. applying proper d.c.  K = E = kWh 
voltage to the two Junctions is known as transistor
biasing. [ K = Energy meter constant ]
Practice Set-7 98 YCT
48. (d) Inputs = 1024 = 3000 Hz
Output = 1 Nyquist rate = 2 fm
Select line = S = 2 × 3000 Hz
Inputs = 2S = 6000 Hz
1024 = 2S = 6 kHz
S = 10 53. (d)
49. (b) When J = K = 1 then the race condition is occurs Condition for reciprocity and symmetry in different
that means both output wants to be high.
parameters can be given as
Hence there is toggle condition is occurs.
50. (b) Disadvantages of proportional controller is Parameter Symmetry Reciprocity
given below- Z Z11 = Z22 Z12 = Z21
(1) Cannot eliminate the offset error i,e produce offset. Y Y11 = Y22 Y12 = Y21
(2) Reduces the damping ratio and increases the T A=D AD – BC = 1
maximum overshoot. h h11h22 – h12h21 = 1 h12 = – h21
(3) Leads to the instability.
51. (c) Characteristic polynomial, 54. (d) J = σE
q(s) =2s5+s4+4s3+2s2+2s+1, D = εE
The Routh table is written as, B = µH
s5 2 4 2 So, B = µD is incorrect relation.
s 4
1 2 1 → Auxiliary equation 55. (d)
Group –1 Group – 2
s3 0 0 0
P {1+km (t)}A sin ( ωct) Y Amplitude
s2 modulation
s1 Q km(t) A sin ( ωct) Z DSB-SC
When the entire row is zero then coefficient is Modulation
determined by –
Coefficient of row of zero R A sin { ωct + km (t)} W Phase Modulation
d S A sin X Frequency
= (Auxiliary equation) = 0
ds  t Modulation
d 4

ω
 c t + k ∫ m(t)dt
(s + 2s 2 + 1) = 0 −∞
ds
4s3 + 4s = 0 56. (c) Cassegrain feed is used with a parabolic reflector
to allow the feed to be placed at a convenient point. In
s5 2 4 2 telecommunication and radar, A cassegrain antenna is a
s 4
1 2 1 → Auxiliary equation parabolic antenna in which the feed antenna is mounted
at or behind the surface of the concave main parabolic
s3 0 ( 4) 0 ( 4)
reflector dish
2
s 1 1 57. (d) The input of TRAP input is level sensitive and
s 1
0 ( 2) edge sensitive hence a vectored interrupt in 8085 is
0 TRAP which is non maskable. While RST 7.5, RST 6.5,
s 1 RST 5.5 is maskable.
Roots of auxiliary equation gives the closed loop poles.
58. (c)
∴ s 4 + 2s 2 + 1 = 0
A modem is considered as an input and output device
(s + 1) = 0
2 2
because it sends data (upload/input) and receives data
(download/output).
s = ± j and ± j
59. (d)
Slip ring induction motor has the advantage of
(1) High starting torque and high overload capacity.
(2) Nearly constant speed
(3) Low starting current in comparison to squirrel cage
Here one pair of repeated roots lies on imaginary axis, induction motor.
Hence, system is unstable.
60.(a)
52. (d) Given that -
Silica is not a semiconductor material, silica is a
x(t) = cos 2000πt + 3 sin 6000πt
insulator there is a large gap between the conduction
maximum frequency (fm) = max f m1 ,f m2 { } band and valence band.

Practice Set-7 99 YCT

61. (c) Given, Diffusion capacitance due to electrons-
 −4 2  τ I
A=  C Dn = n n
 4 3 ηVT
Characteristic equation | A – λI | = 0 where,
−4 − λ 2 In → electron current
| A – λI | = =0 τ n → carrier life time of electron.
4 3−λ
total diffusion capacitance→
(–4 –λ) (3–λ) – 8 = 0 CD = CDP + CDN
(–12 – 3λ + 4λ+λ2) – 8 = 0 τ I τ I
λ2 + λ – 20 = 0 CD = P P + n n
ηVT ηVT
λ2 + 5λ –4λ –20 = 0
λ (λ + 5) –4 (λ + 5) = 0 τP I P + τn I n
CD =
λ = –5, 4 ηVT
m  Iτ
Let eigen vector be  1  CD =
m 2  ηVT
by putting λ1 = –5 Where,
 −4 − ( −5) 2   m1  I → total current (electron + Hole)
 =0 τ → carrier life time (electron + Hole)
 4 3 + 5   m 2 
 1 2   m1 
(
CD = I0 e v / ηVT − 1 )
 4 8   m 2  = 0 C D ∝ e V / ηVT
 
If forward bias→Thus, diffusion capacitance of p-n
1 2   m1   0 
1 2   m 2  =  0  junction diode increases exponentially with applied
  forward voltage.
1 2   m1   0  64. (c)
 0 0   m 2  =  0  A Wien's bridge oscillator is a type of electronic
 
oscillator that generates sine wave. It can generate a
m1 + 2 m2 = 0 large range of frequencies.
Let m1 = k
• Wien bridge oscillator
−k
m2 = or 1
2 frequency of oscillation f =
2π C1C 2 R 3 R 4
m1 = 2k, m 2 = −k
If C1 = C2 = C and R3 = R4 = R
eigen vectors is  2  1
− 1  Then f =
62. (c) 2π RC
For TE20 65. (a)
2 The large signal bandwidth of op-amp is limited by
λC = slew rate because
2 2
m n
  +   dV 
 a  b slew rate =   = 2πVm f V/µsec
 dt  m
m=2 n=0
66. (a)
2 2
λC = = The rise time (tr), of signal applied to CRO and
4 2
bandwidth of CRO are related as
a 2 a tr × BW = 0.35
λC = a If this condition fails then the signal is distorted at the
63. (a) Diffusion capacitance due to Holes- output of CRO.
τ I 67. (b) • Flip-flop is a sequential logic circuit. Flip-flop
C DP = P P is said to be edge sensitive or edge triggered, it is a bi-
ηVT stable multi-vibrator. Flip-flop is a device which stores
Where, a single bit of data.
IP → Hole current • Flip-flop generate output at the positive or negative
τ P → Carrier life time of Hole edge of the clock signal.
Practice Set-7 100 YCT
68. (b) ∆f = 20kHz 76. (b)
Bandwidth = 60 kHz In the state of super conductivity material exhibit zero
Bandwidth = 2(∆f + f m ) resistivity and perfect diamagnetism. Superconductivity
appears at low temperature and in a magnetic lower
60 = 2 (20 +fm) than a particular level.
fm = 30–20 77. (d)
f m = 10kHz Rectangular wave guide can transfer high frequency
wave. Hence these wave guide are ideal for handling
69. (a) high powers.
White noise is that kind of signal which has flat spectral 78. (b)
density and frequency spectrum is sustained. VNL = 50 V VFL = 48 V
Spectral density of white noise is constant, it is
VNL − VFL
expressed in watt/Hz. %VR = ×100
VNL
70.(a)
No. of links (L) = B – N+1 50 − 48
= ×100
= 6–4+1 50
=3 %VR = 4%
71. (b)
79. (a)
Intrinsic impedance of Electromagnetic wave
The order of sensitivity from high to low
jωµ Thermistors > RTDs > thermocouple
η0 =
σ + jωε Sensor type Thermocouple RTD Thermistor
Accuracy 0.5 to 5°C 0.1 to 1°C 0.05 to 1.5°C
for free space σ = 0
(Low) (High) (Moderate)
µ = µ0µr = µ0 Stability Variable 0.05°C /year 0.2 °C/year
ε = ε0µr = ε0 Temperature 200 to 1750°C –200 to –100 to
∴ Characteristic impedance Range 650°C 325°C
Power Self powered Constant Constant
jωµ 0 required voltage or voltage or
η0 =
jωε 0 current current
Susceptibility Susceptible/Col Rarely Rarely
µ0 to electrical d junction susceptible susceptible
= noise compensation high
ε0 resistance
only
72. (d)
Response time Fast Generally Fast
We know that, 0.10 to 10s slow 1 to 50s 0.12 to 10s
R eq Linearity Non-linear Fairly linear Exponential
Noise figure = 1 +
Rs Cost Low High Low to
moderate
30 8 Sensitivity Low Moderate High
= 1+ = = 1.6
50 5 80. (d) TTL ‘totem pole’ refers to the output buffer.
Noise figure in dB = 10 log (1.6) = 2.04
73. (d)
In amplitude modulation
A
Modulation index (µ) = m
Ac
(µ = 1) Critical modulation
(µ < 1) under modulation
(µ > 1) Over modulation
74. (b)
Random satellite moves in polar orbits.
75. (b) TTL circuit are classified as :
Latch is a circuit used at the interference point of output (i) Tristate logic (high impedance logic)
port of 8085. Because Latch are memory device that (ii) Totem pole logic (active pull up)
can store one bit of data for as long as the device is (iii) open collector logic (passive pull up)
powered.
Practice Set-7 101 YCT
The main advantage of TTL with a "totem-pole" output According to De-Morgan's theorem.
stage is the low output resistance at output logic '1' also (1) A.B.C........ = A + B + C + ........
addition of an active pull up circuit in the output of the
(2) A + B + C +........ = A.B.C........
gate which results in reduction of propagation delay.
81. (c) 91. (c)
BW = 4000Hz
No. of comparator = 2n − 1
Bit rate Rb = 2×BW
No. of bit (n) = 8
= 2×4000 = 8000 bps.
Number of comparator = 28–1 = 255
82. (c) 92. (b)
Bandwidth for binary phase shift keying (BPSK)
Z02
We have , Zin = BWBPSK = βp = 2fm …(i)
ZL Bandwidth for OQPSK
λ BWOQPSK = β0 = fm …(ii)
At distance , If line is shorted then
4 from equation (i) and (ii)
ZL = 0 Ω βp = 2β0
Zin = ∞
83. (d) 93. (b)
Bandwidth of modulating freq = (5–0.5)KHz The fiber splice is a permanent joint between 2 fibers.
= 4.5 KHz There are two type of fiber splicing -
Bandwidth in DSBSC signal (i) Mechanical Splicing
= (2×message signal BW) (ii) Fusion Splicing
= 9 KHz 94. (d)
84. (c) A TV signal is usually allocated 7MHz of bandwidth
Equally like outcomes (M)=64 for transmission.
Entropy (H) = log2M 95. (b)
Mnemonics codes and variable names are used in an
(H) = log264
assembly language.
(H) = 6
96. (d)
85. (a)
Crest factor is defined as Peak value / RMS value.
Numerical aperture is a measure of light collecting
V I
ability of fiber. It establishes the relationship between Peak factor = Crest factor = m = m
acceptance angle and refractive indices of different Vrms I rms
medium involved. 97. (c)
( n1 ) − ( n 2 ) A linear data structure, data elements trace the
2 2
NA =
arrangements sequentially, in which only one has direct
86. (a) access to the data. For example arrays, linked, lists,
Programmable logic Array uses Read Only Memory stack, queue any type of list is all linear. Binary B and
(ROM) matrices. B+ tree is a non linear data structure.
87. (a) 98. (b)
ASK signaling has the highest probability of error and There are three method Transmission method,
BPSK has the lowest probability of error. Impedance method and transient method for measuring
88. (c) Q of a cavity resonator. The easiest and most followed
The magnetron is called a cross field device in the method is transmission method.
industry because both magnetic and electric fields are 99. (b)
employed in its operations and they are produced The symbol given is that of the TRIAC. The TRIAC is
perpendicular direction. three terminal electronic device, when triggered, can
89. (a) conduct current in both directions.
PROM is stands for programmable read only memory. 100. (c)
A programmable read only memory is a form of digital Given,
memory where the setting of each bit is locked by a fuse
∠G( jω) at ωgc = −125°
or antifuse.
90. (a) Phase margin = 180° + ∠G ( jω) ω=ω
gc
De-Morgan's theorem - The complement of the product
of all the terms is equal to the sum of the complement of Phase margin = 180° – 125°
each terms. P.M. = 55°

Practice Set-7 102 YCT

 PRACTICE SET - 8
1. The number of holes in an N-type silicon with 6. Which semiconductor power device out of the
intrinsic value 1.5 × 1010/cm3 and doping following is not a current triggered device?
concentration of 1017/cm3, by using mass-action (a) Thyristor (b) GTO
law is (c) Triac (d) MOSFET
(a) 6.67 × 106/cm3 (b) 4.44 × 10–25/cm3 7. In a closed loop control system
–24 3 3 3
(c) 1.5 × 10 /cm (d) 2.25 × 10 /cm (a) Control action is independent of output
2. Which of the five waveforms of Vout predicts (b) Output is independent of input
the correct output of circuit for Vin as shown (c) There is no feedback
below: (d) Control action is dependent on output
Vin (Volts) 8. Convolution of x(t + 5) with impulse function
δ(t – 7) is equal to
(a) x(t-12) (b) x(t+12)
(c) x(t-2) (d) x(t+2)
9. Which of the following has same probability of
error?
(a) BPSK and QAM (b) BPSK and ASK
Vout (Volts) (c) BPSK and QPSK (d) BPSK and PAM
Vout (Volts)
10. If r̂ = xiˆ + yjˆ + zkˆ the curl r̂ is
(a) 0 (b) 1
(c) x (d) x + z
11. Noise factor of a system is defined as
(a) Output signal to noise ratio
(b) Ratio of output S/N ratio to input S/N ratio
(c) Ratio of input S/N ratio to output S/N ratio
(d) Ratio of input signal to output noise ratio
12. Linear predictive coding is
(a) Time domain coding
(b) Frequency domain coding
(c) Space domain coding
(d) None of the above
3. If the bit rate for an FSK signal is 1200 bps, the 13. In a microprocessor system, the stack is used
baud rate is: for–
(a) 300 (b) 400 (a) Storing the program return address whenever
(c) 600 (d) 1200 a sub-routine jump instruction is executed
4. The binary representation of the Hexadecimal (b) Transmitting and receiving input-output data
number 3B7F is (c) Storing all important CPU register contents
(a) 0100100111101101 whenever an interrupt is to be serviced
(b) 0011101101111111 (d) Storing program instruction for interrupt
(c) 0010010000001010 service routine
(d) 0110001110111100 14. One of the following communication system is
5. SMPS normally use Ferrite core transformers analog
in place of Iron core because of (a) PCM (b) Delta
(a) Higher saturation flux density (c) Differential PCM (d) PAM
(b) Lower core loss 15. The unit for reluctance is
(c) Higher electrical conductivity (a) H (b) H–1
(d) Lower thermal conductivity (c) A (d) A–1
Practice Set-8 103 YCT
16. The electronic polarizability of an inert gas 23. The meter suitable for only DC measurement
atom is proportional to which one of the (a) Moving iron type
following? (where R is the radius of the atom) (b) Permanent magnet type
(a) R (b) R2 (c) Electrodynamics type
(c) R3 (d) R4 (d) Hot wire type
24. The dielectric loss of capacitance can be
x 2 + 5x − 3
17. Evaluate: lim measured by
x →2 x 2 − 2x (a) Hay bridge (b) Schering bridge
(a) 1/3 (b) ∞ (c) Maxwell bridge (d) Anderson bridge
(c) –3 (d) 0 25. A Karnaugh map with 4 variables has
18. In TEmn mode ‘m’ and ‘n’ are integers (a) 2 Cells (b) 4 Cells
denoting the number of- (c) 8 Cells (d) 16 Cells
1 26. The POS form of expression is suitable for
(a) the wavelength of intensity between each circuit using
2
pair of walls (a) NAND (b) NOR
(c) XOR (d) AND
1
(b) the wavelength of intensity between each 27. An SCR combines the features of………..
3 (a) A rectifier and resistance
pair of walls (b) A rectifier and transistor
1 (c) A rectifier and capacitor
(c) the wavelength of intensity between each (d) None of the above
4
pair of walls 28. The two transistor equivalent circuit of SCR is:

1 (a) (b)
(d) the wavelength of intensity between each
8
pair of walls
19. A bar of intrinsic germanium 5 cm long is
subjected to an electric potential of 12 V. If the
velocity of electrons in bar is 75 m/s, then find
mobility of electrons. (c) (d)
(a) 31.25 cm2 /V-sec (b) 3.125 cm2 /V-sec
2
(c) 3125 cm /V-sec (d) 60.25 cm2 /V-sec
20. Zener diode break down voltage ______with
temperature 29. The steady state error of a stable 'type 0' unity
(a) decreases (b) constant feedback system for a unit step function is
(c) increases (d) may increase or decrease 1
21. What is the name of the circuit shown below? (a) 0 (b)
1+ Kp
1
(c) ∞ (d)
Kp
30. Frequency spectrum of a periodic signal
(a) continuous (b) Discrete
(c) Anything (d) no spectrum
31. The colour band on the extreme left in general
(a) Miller sweep purpose fixed resistors represents:
(b) Bootstrap sweep (a) Tolerance
(c) Schmitt trigger (b) First significant digit
(d) Triangular wave generator (c) Wattage Rating
22. The current gain of a BJT is (d) Voltage Rating
gm 32. When a unit impulse voltage is applied to an
(a) gmro (b) inductor of 1H, the energy supplied by the
ro
source is
gm (a) ∞ (b) 1 J
(c) gmrπ (d)
rπ (c) (1/2) J (d) 0
Practice Set-8 104 YCT
33. Laplacian of a scalar function V is : 42. In a parallel plate waveguide, what is the
(a) Gradient of V principal wave?
(b) Divergence of V (a) TEM wave
(c) Gradient of the gradient of V (b) TE wave
(d) Divergence of the gradient of V (c) TM wave
34. Noise figure is defined as (d) Combination of TE and TM waves having
axial components of both electric and
S / Ni S / N0
(a) F = i (b) F = 0 magnetic fields
S0 / N 0 Si / N i 43. Match List-I (Regions of bipolar transistor in
S0 / N 0 Si / Ni monolithic IC) with List-II (Physical
(c) F = (d) F = properties) and select the correct answer using
Si / N i S0 / N 0
the codes given below the lists:
35. Find overall noise figure, if two blocks are List-I List-II
cascaded having Noise Figure (F) = 10 dB, Gain A. Emitter 1. Moderate resistivity
= 10dB _____.
B. Base 2. Very high resistivity
(a) 10.9 (b) 11.1
C. Collector 3. Large size
(c) 10 (d) 20
D. Substrate 4. Very high conductivity
36. Cloud infrastructure shared by several
Codes:
organizations and supporting a specific group
A B C D
is called:
(a) 1 4 2 3
(a) Private cloud (b) Community cloud
(b) 4 1 2 3
(c) Public cloud (d) Hybrid cloud
(c) 4 1 3 2
37. The cycle required to fetch and execute an
(d) 1 4 3 2
instruction in 8085 microprocessors is which
one of the following? 44. In a MOSFET, the pinch-off voltage refers to
(a) drain-to-source voltage at which drain-to-
(a) Memory cycle (b) Clock cycle
source current is zero
(c) Instruction cycle (d) Machine cycle
(b) gate-to-source voltage at which gate-to-
38. An advantage of memory interfacing is that source current is zero
(a) A larger memory is obtained (c) drain-to-source voltage at which gate-to-
(b) Effective speed of the memory is increased source current is zero
(c) The cost of the memory is reduced (d) gate-to-source voltage at which drain-to-
(d) A non-volatile memory is obtained source current is zero
39. A Buchholz relay can be installed on 45. The class of amplifier operation characterized
by highest efficiency, high distortion is:
(a) auto-transformers
(a) Class - A (b) Class - B
(b) air-cooled transformers
(c) Class - C (d) Class - AB
(c) welding transformers
46. The unity gain bandwidth of an inverting
(d) oil cooled transformers amplifier is 10 MHz What would be the
40. A permeable substance is one bandwidth if the gain is increased to 10V/V?
(a) Which is strong magnetic (a) 100 MHz (b) 1 MHz
(b) Which is weak magnetic (c) 10 MHz (d) 1 kHz
(c) Which is a good conductor 47. Which one of the following has a magnetic
(d) Through which magnetic lines of force can brake?
pass easily (a) Thermocouple ammeter
41. A bag contains eight white and six red marbles. (b) Energy meter
The probability of drawing two marbles of (c) Frequency meter
same colour is (d) Thermocouple voltmeter
8
C2 .6 C2 8
C2 6
C2 48. A full adder can be made out of……….
(a) 14
(b) 14
+ 14
C2 C2 C2 (a) two half adders
8
(b) two half adders and a OR gate
C2 .6 C2 8
C2 6
C2
(c) 14
(d) + (c) two half adders and a NOT gate
C2 .14 C2 14
C2 12
C2 (d) three half adders
Practice Set-8 105 YCT
49. Ring, shift and Johnson Counters are : 57. How many hardware interrupts are there in
(a) Synchronous Counter 8086?
(b) Asynchronous Counter (a) 12 (b) 6
(c) True Binary Counter (c) 2 (d) 8
(d) Synchronous and true Binary Counter 58. Which of the following type of network is used
50. The use of Pl controllers : to cover small geographical area?
(a) reduces oscillations (a) LAN (b) MAN
(b) results in zero steady-state error for step input (c) VAN (d) WAN
(c) lowers peak overshoot 59. Alternators operate on the principle of
(d) improves relative stability (a) Electro-magnetic induction
51. In Routh's-Hurwitz criterion, if there are (b) Self-induction
changes of signs in the elements of the first (c) Mutual induction
column, then the number of sign changes (d) Self or mutual induction
indicates 60. The unit of mobility is
(a) The number of roots with negative real parts (a) m2V–1S–1 (b) mV–1S–1
–1
(b) The number of roots with positive real parts (c) Vsm (d) Vms–1
(c) The number of pair of roots of opposite sign 61. Given that
(d) The number of pair of roots of same sign 1 0 0 
52. The most commonly used sampling method is A = 0 2 0 
(a) Ideal or impulse sampling
0 0 3 
(b) Natural sampling using rectangular pulses
(c) Sample-and-hold method Evaluate A3 – 6A2 + 11A – 10I
(d) None of the above (a) Null matrix
53. The Y-parameter matrix (mA/V) of the two (b) Identity matrix
port network in figure is (c) –4I
(d) None of the above
62. For TM waves in a parallel plate waveguide,
the minimum attenuation arising from
imperfect conductors would occur at a
frequency of (fc is the cut -off frequency).
(a) 3 fc (b) 3f c
(c) 2 fc (d) 2f c
 2 −1  2 1 
(a)   (b)   63. For the circuit shown in figure, minimum
 −1 2   −1 2 
current required to keep zener diode in reverse
1 −2  2 1  break down region is 4 mA. The maximum
(c)   (d)  
 −2 1  1 2  value of resistance RS to keep zener diode in
reverse break when VZ = 10 V is :
54. According to divergence theorem
∫ A.dS = ?
(a) ∫ ∇.A dV (b) ∫ A dV
V V

(a) 7 kΩ (b) 5 kΩ
(c) ∫ ∇ × A dV
V
(d) ∫ curl ( A ) dV
V (c) 1 kΩ (d) 2 kΩ
55. A PLL can be used to demodulate 64. Crystals used in oscillator circuits for the
(a) PAM signals (b) PCM signals purpose of stabilizing frequency are made of
(c) FM signals (d) DSB – SC signals (a) quartz
56. Which of the following antennas exhibit (b) silicon
circular polarization? (c) germanium
(a) Small circular loop (d) some other semiconductor material
(b) Folded dipole 65. For a given op-amp, CMRR = 105 and
(c) Helical differential gain = 105. What is the common
(d) Parabolic dish mode gain of the op-amp?
Practice Set-8 106 YCT
 (a) 1010 (b) 2 × 105 75. What is the maximum number of I/O devices
5 can be interfaced with 8085 using I/O mapping
(c) 10 (d) 1
66. An aquadag is used in a Cathode Ray of I/O device technique?
Oscilloscope of collect: (a) 8 (b) 16
(a) Primary electrons (c) 128 (d) 256
(b) Secondary emission electrons 76. A material is said to have become
(c) Both primary and secondary emission superconductor when
electrons (a) Its resistance becomes negative
(d) None of the above (b) Its resistance becomes very small
67. For an SR flip-flop, S and R are made equal to (c) its resistance decreases
1. What is the value of Q? (d) Its resistance becomes zero
(a) Unchanged (b) Clear to 0
77. What is the condition to satisfying the wall of
(c) Set to 0 (d) Indeterminate waveguide
68. Choose the incorrect statement regarding FM- (a) Thickness of wall > skin depth of material
(a) It has large number of sidebands. wall
(b) Its modulation index is always less than 1. (b) Thickness of wall < skin depth of material
(c) Its BW is greater than that of AM wall
(d) None of the above (c) Thickness of wall =skin depth of material
69. A digital signal processing system is described wall
by the expression:
(d) can be any dimension
y(n) = 2x(n) + x(n–1) +2y(n–1) The system is:
78. When a sinusoidal voltage wave drives a
(a) A stable FIR filter
Schmitt Trigger, the output is a :
(b) A stable IIR filter
(a) Triangular wave (b) Rectified sine wave
(c) An unstable FIR filter
(c) Rectangular wave (d) Trapezoidal wave
(d) An unstable IIR filter
79. A strain gauge with gauge factor 4 and
70. In an electrical network, the number of nodes
is N. Then number of branches B equals resistance 250 Ω undergoes a change of 0.15Ω
during a test. The measured strain is
(a) N (b) N + 1
(c) N - 1 (d) N - 2 (a) 150 × 10–4 (b) 15 × 10–4
–4
71. The numerical value of the ratio of electric field (c) 1.5 × 10 (d) 0.15 × 10–4
intensity E and magnetic field intensity H is 80. Which of the following is non-saturating?
(a) 350 Ω (b) 377 Ω (a) TTL (b) CMOS
(c) 37.7 Ω (d) 35 Ω (c) ECL (d) Both (1) and (2)
72. When β is the modulation index, then the 81. A 10-bit A/D converter is used to digitize
bandwidth of full AM and FM signals are analog signal in the 0 to 5 V range. What is the
respectively (fc = carrier frequency, fm = approximate value of the maximum peak to
baseband frequency) peak ripple voltage that can be allowed in the
d.c. supply voltage?
(a) (fc ± fm) and (fc ± 2β fm)
(a) 100 mV (b) 50 mV
(b) (fc ± fm) and (fc ± β fm)
(c) 25 mV (d) 5.0 mV
(c) (fc ± 2fm) and (fc ± 2β fm)
82. At UHF short-circuited lossless transmission
(d) (fc ± 2fm) and (fc ± β fm) lines can be used to provide appropriate values
73. In an AM transmitter, peak antenna current is of impedance. Match List-I with List-II and
13A and the minimum current is 7A. The select the correct answer using the code given
percentage modulation is below the lists:
(a) 20% (b) 30% List - I List - II
(c) 50% (d) 100%
A. ℓ < λ/4 1. Capacitive
74. What was the first commercial geostationary
communication satellite? B. λ/4 < ℓ < λ/2 2. Inductive
(a) INTELSAT 1
(b) ECHO C. ℓ = λ/4 3. 0
(c) INSAT-TA D. ℓ = λ/2 4. ∞
(d) SPUTNIK
Practice Set-8 107 YCT
 Codes : 91. Modulating signal in sinusoidal pulse width
A B C D modulation (SPWM) is:
(a) 2 1 4 3 (a) triangular (b) saw-tooth
(b) 3 1 4 2 (c) square (d) sinusoidal
(c) 2 4 1 3 92. A PAM signal can be detected by using
(d) 3 4 1 2 (a) an ADC (b) an integrator
83. Information is (c) a band pass filter (d) a high pass filter
(a) the synonym of probability 93. A step index fibre has core diameter 40 µm
(b) not related to the probability of information with core refractive indix of 1.3 and numerical
(c) inversely proportional to the probability of aperture 0.5, then the refractive index of
information cladding is
(d) directly proportional to the probability of (a) 1.2 (b) 1.1
information (c) 0.9 (d) 0.8
84. The following image represents: 94. Neutralizing capacitors are normally used in
(a) Audio amplifiers
(b) Video amplifiers
(c) RF and IF amplifiers
(d) Operational amplifiers
95. Which of these is NOT an Operating System ?
(a) Android (b) iOS
(c) Linux (d) Power point
96. A higher value of quality factor results in
(a) Smaller Bandwidth
(b) Larger Bandwidth
(a) Wave Shaping (c) Medium Bandwidth
(b) Shannon-Hartley Effect (d) No effect on Bandwidth
(c) Gibb's Phenomena 97. The data type defined by user is :
(d) Aliasing (a) Built-in data type
85. Losses in optical fibers can be caused by (b) Abstract data type
(a) impurities (b) microbending (c) Homogeneous data type
(c) attenuation in the glass (d) all of these
(d) Real data type
86. Which of the following is not true for a counter
98. The sensitivity of a Wheatstone bridge depends
instruction in PLC?
upon
(a) Up-counters are always reset to zero
(a) galvanometer current sensitivity
(b) The counter will operate on the trailing edge
(b) galvanometer resistance
(c) A separate coil is used for reset
(c) bridge supply voltage
(d) All of these
87. Which of the following is not a negative (d) all of the above
resistance device? 99. Despite the presence of negative feedback,
(a) Gunn diode (b) Tunnel diode control system still have problems of instability
(c) IMPATT diode (d) Varactor diode because of
88. Which statement is false about micro-strip line (a) Components used have non-linearities
over strip-line? (b) Dynamic equations of the subsystems are not
(a) Less ratiative known exactly
(b) Easier for component integration (c) Mathematical analysis involves approximations
(c) One sided ground plane (d) System has large negative phase angle at high
(d) More interaction with neighboring circuit element frequencies
89. The ROM chips are mainly used to store 100. If the gain the open-loop system is doubled, the
(a) System files (b) Root directories gain margin
(c) Boot files (d) Driver files (a) is not affected
90. Mark the incorrect Boolean expression : (b) gets doubled
(a) 1 + A = A' (b) 1 + A = 1 (c) becomes half
(c) A + A = 1 (d) A + AB = A (d) becomes one fourth

Practice Set-8 108 YCT

 Answer Key
1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (b) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (d) 10. (a)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (b) 25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (b)
31. (b) 32. (c) 33. (d) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (b) 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (d)
41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (d) 45. (c) 46. (b) 47. (b) 48. (b) 49. (a) 50. (b)
51. (b) 52. (a) 53. (a) 54. (a) 55. (c) 56. (c) 57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (a)
61. (c) 62. (b) 63. (d) 64. (a) 65. (d) 66. (b) 67. (d) 68.(b) 69. (d) 70.(c)
71. (b) 72. (b) 73. (b) 74. (a) 75. (d) 76. (d) 77. (a) 78. (c) 79. (c) 80. (c)
81. (d) 82. (a) 83. (c) 84. (c) 85. (d) 86. (d) 87. (d) 88. (a) 89. (c) 90. (a)
91. (d) 92. (b) 93. (a) 94. (c) 95. (d) 96. (a) 97. (b) 98. (d) 99. (a) 100. (c)

Solution
1. (d) 4. (b) Hexadecimal Number = 3B7F
Given that, 3 = 0011
n i = 1.5 × 1010 / cm3 B = 1011
7 = 0111
ND = 1017/cm3
F = 1111
According to mass-action law-
(3B7F)16 = (0011101101111111)2
n i2 (1.5 ×10 )
10 2
2.25 × 1020 5. (b)
p= = =
ND 1017
1017 SMPS (Switch Mode Power supply) normally use ferrite
core transformers in place of Iron core because of lower
p = 2.25×103/cm3
core loss. Ferrite have high resistivity so low eddy
current loss hence, lower core loss.
2. (d) 6. (d)
For positive half cycle A power semiconductor device is a semiconductor
Vin Diode Vout device used as a switch or rectifier in power electronics.
MOSFET is a semiconductor power device but NOT a
0 − 4V ON 4V
current triggered device. In MOSFET the flow of
4V − 16V OFF 16V current from source to drain is controlled by input
voltage.
For negative half cycle
Hence it is a voltage controlled device.
Vin Diode Vout 7. (d)
0 − 16V ON 4V Closed loop control system-the closed loop system is
given below.

So, in closed loop system in which the control action

depend on the output this type of system have a
tendency to oscillate.
Ex. Speed control of one motor.
3. (d) 8. (c)
In FSK signal : We know that,
bit rate = 1200 bps f(t) * δ(t – t0) = f (t – t0)
bit rate ∴ x(t + 5) * δ(t – 7) = x(t – 2)
Baud rate =
number of bit per boud (1) 9. (d)
BPSK and PAM has same probability of error. BPSK
1200
Baud rate = = 1200 bps represent binary number while pulse modulation
1 represent in analog form.

Practice Set-8 108 YCT

10. (a) Given r = xiˆ + yjˆ + zkˆ 17. (b)
Take the limit at x = 2
i j k
∂ ∂ ∂ x 2 + 5x − 3 ( 2 )2 + 5 ( 2 ) − 3
∴ curl r = = lim = =∞
∂x ∂y ∂z x →2 x 2 − 2x 4−4
x y z 18. (a)
Rectangular waveguide TEmn mode-
∂ ∂  ∂ ∂ 
= ˆi  ( z ) − ( y )  − ˆj  ( z ) − ( x )  + TEmn Denoting the Number-
 ∂y ∂z   ∂x ∂z  Where-
∂ ∂  m = Number of half wavelength variation along the
k̂  ( y ) − ( x )  larger dimensions.
 ∂x ∂y 
n = Number of half wavelength variations along the
=0 smaller dimension.
11. (c) Where m and n are integers denoting the number of half
(S / N )input wavelengths of intensity between each pair of walls.
N.F =
( S / n ) output 19. (c)
Given,
12. (b) Vd = 75m/s = 7500 cm/s, V = 12V , d = 5cm
Linear predictive coding (LPC) is a method used mostly
V 12
in audio signal processing and speech processing for E= =
representing the spectral envelope of a digital signal of d 5
speech in compressed form, using the information of a Vd
Mobility of electrons, µ =
linear predictive model. E
13. (a) 7500 × 5
=
Stack is a temporary set of memory locations used to 12
store binary information (byte) temporarily during µ = 3125 cm 2 / V − s
execution of a program, whenever a sub-routine jump
instruction is executed. 20. (a)
14. (d) Zener breakdown voltage decreases as the temperature
increases, creating a negative temperature coefficient.
PAM (Pulse amplitude modulation) is an analog pulse
modulation scheme in which the amplitude of train 21. (a)
carrier pulse are varied according to the pulse value of
message signal.
15. (b) The unit for reluctance is H–1
mmf = NI = φS
NI AT
S= = = H −1
φ Wb
ℓ
S=
µ 0µ r A The above given circuit is a miller sweep circuit
application.
Where, ℓ = length,
Miller sweep circuits are the most commonly used
A= area, µ r = Relative permeability integrator circuit in many devices. It is a widely used
µ 0 = Air permeability saw tooth generator.
16. (c) The transistor miller time base generator circuit is the
Electronic polarisation of dipole moment is- popular miller integrator circuit that produce a sweep
wave form.
α e = 4π ∈0 R 3
22. (c)
P = αe E In π model, hfe is referred to β.
P = 4π ∈0 R 3 E ∵ Current gain of a BJT β = ri g m
Where α e = electronic polarizability of an inert gas. Where ri = rπ
β = rπ g m
αe ∝ R 3
Practice Set-8 110 YCT
23. (b) Permanent magnet moving coil (PMMC) is 30. (b)
only used for dc measurements. Frequency spectrum of a periodic signal Discrete.
Material used for magnet in PMMC is AlNiCo 31. (b)
(Al+Ni+CO) .
The colour band on the extreme left in general purpose
Operating field of PMMC instrument varies from 0.1 fixed resistors represents first significant digit.
Wb/m2 to 1Wb/m2.
Power consumption of PMMC instrument is very
low.
The accuracy of PMMC instrument is higher due to
high torque to weight ratio of the instrument.
PMMC instrument scale is linear.
θ∝I
A = First significant digit
24. (b) B = Second significant digit
Schering bridge is the AC bridge used for the C = Multiplier
measurement of unknown capacitance, dielectric loss,
D = Tolerance
loss angle, dissipation factor and power factor.
E = Temperature coefficient
formula - AB ×10C ± Tolerance
32. (c)
Given, V(t) = δ(t), L = 1H

25. (d)
s
K-map or karnaugh map with 4-variable has 24 cells Circuit in s-domain-
24 = 16 Cells
26. (b) POS form of a Boolean expression is suitable for
circuit implementation using NOR Gate. NOR Gate is
the type of Universal Gate.
27. (b)
An SCR combines the features of a rectifier and
1
transistor. It consists of two diodes connected back-to- I(s) =
s
back with a gate connection. It is widely used as a
switching device in power control applications. i(t) = u(t)
28. (d) i (t) = 1 when t > 0
Two transistor analogy of SCR combination of n-p-n 1
Energy supplied by source ( E ) = L i(t)
2
and p-n-p transistor SCR is a three terminal device 2
anode, cathode and gate terminal. 1
E = × 1× 12 joule
2
1
E= J
2
33. (d)
Lapacian of a scalar function V is divergence of the
gradient of the gradient of V.
29. (b)Steady state error for type zero system is given ∇2 V = ∇.(∇V)
1 34. (a)
by ess =
1+ kP S / Ni
Noise figure (F) = i
A = magnitude of step signal S0 / N 0
kp = lim G ( s ) H ( s ) Reciprocal of figure of merit is known as noise figure.
s →0

Practice Set-8 111 YCT

35. (a) Given that, 44. (d)
Two blocks are cascaded having Noise Figure. Pinch-off voltage-
F1 = F2 = 10 dB • In junction field effect transistor
(G) Gain = 10 dB (JFTs) pinch off voltage refers to the threshold voltage
F −1 below which the transistor turns off.
F = F1 + 2
G1 •Pinch off voltage refers to gate-to source voltage at
10 − 1 which drain to source current is zero.
F = 10 +
10 • If we increase the voltage Vd above pinch- off voltage
then ID remains constant.
F = 10 + 0.9 F = 10.9
45. (c)
36. (b)
Class-C amplifiers have high circuit efficiency of about
Cloud infrastructure shared by several organizations and 90% and highest distortion.
supporting a specific group is called community cloud.
37. (c) Power Conduction Maximum
The main job of the CPU is to execute program using amplifier angle Efficiency
the fetch-decode-execute cycle also known as Class A 360º 50%
instruction cycle. This cycle begins as soon as computer Class B 180º 78.5%
is turned on to execute a program.
Class AB 180º −360º 50 − 78.5%
38. (b)
Class C < 180º ≥ 90%
The main function of a memory interfacing circuit is to
help the micro processor in reading and writing the data 46. (b)
to the given register of a memory circuit. Memory Gain × bandwidth = Constant
interfacing increases the effective speed of memory.
So, G1×(BW)1 = G2×(BW)2
39. (d)
1×10×106 = 10×B2
Buchholz relay is a gas actuated protective device
which is mounted on some oil filled power transformers B2 = 1MHz
and it is used to give alarm in case of main fault to 47. (b)
disconnect the transformer from supply mains in case A ‘brake magnet’ produces a controlling torque on the
several internal part. disc which has no pointer as an energy meter is an
40. (d) integrating. Instrument and the disc has to rotates
A permeable substance is one which the magnetic lines continuously so long the meter remains connected in the
of force can pass through easily because its permeability circuit.
value 'µ' is very high. 48. (b)
41. (b) : Given, A full adder can be made out of a two half adder and
Since both the events are independent to each other then one OR gate.
by using addition theorem the required probability will
be-
8 6
C2 C2
P(E) = 14
+ 14
C2 C2
42. (a)
In a parallel plate waveguide the principal wave is TEM
wave.
43. (c)
Emitter is heavily doped so it has very high 49. (a)
conductivity and release charge carriers. Base is lightly
For Ring, shift and Johnson Counter all the flip flops
doped so it has moderate resistivity.
are triggered at same time. Hence they are called
Collector is moderately doped but area made larger than
synchronous counters.
emitter and base and substance has very low
conductivity hence it has very high resistivity. 50. (b)
Substrate has very low conductivity hence it has very It work to prevent this persistence of an error by
high resistivity. increasing the control signal with time.

Practice Set-8 112 YCT

This helps reduces the steady state error and in same 58. (a)
case depending on the type of system and the type of LAN is an acronym of local area network. Its range of
reference signal eliminates it. network is few kilometers. It is privately owned service
51. (b) used in office building, home, hospital etc.
In R-H criterion, Number of sign change in first column 59. (a)
provide the information about the number of roots lies Alternator operates on the principle of electro-magnetic
in right half side of s–plane or number of pair roots of induction.
same sign. A three-phase synchronous machine is a doubly excited
52. (a) ac machine because its field winding is energized from
Ideal sampling is also known as instantaneous sampling a dc source and its armature winding is connected to an
or impulse sampling. Impulse sampling can be ac source.
performed by multiplying input signal x(t) with impulse 60. (a)
∞
train ∑ δ ( t − nT ) of period T. µ= d
V
n =−∞ E
53. (a) m/S  Vd = drift velocity 
=  
In π -network. V/m  E = Electric field 
µ = m 2 V −1S−1
61. (c)
1 0 0
A = 0 2 0 
 Y + YC −YC  0 0 3
Y=  A
 − YC YB + YC 
Characteristic equation
Given network. | λI − A |= 0
λ −1 0 0
0 λ−2 0 =0
0 0 λ −3

Comparing the network ( λ − 1) ( λ − 2 )( λ − 3) = 0

YA =YB = YC = 1mA/V
( λ − 1)  ( λ 2 − 2λ − 3λ + 6 )  = 0
 2 −1
Y=  
 −1 2 
( λ − 1) ( λ 2 − 5λ + 6 ) = 0
54. (a) λ3 − 5λ2 + 6λ − λ 2 + 5λ − 6 ≃ 0
λ 3 − 6λ 2 + 11λ − 6 = 0
According to divergence theorem ∫ A.dS = ∫ ∇.AdV
v By cayley Hamilton theorem
55. (c) A3 –6A2 +11A –6I + 4I – 4I = 0
Phase-locked loop (PLL) can be used to demodulate FM A2– 6A2 +11A –10 I = – 4I
(frequency modulation) signal in Radio transmitters. 62. (b)
For a TM waves in a parallel plate waveguide the
56. (c)
minimum attenuation arising from imperfect
Helical Antenna- It is a combination of an array of
conductors would occur at a frequency of 3f c .
horizontal used vertical wires giving a polarization in
63. (d)
both direction resulting in the circularly polarized wave.
57. (c)
Hardware interrupts for 8086 :- Those interrupts
which are caused by any peripheral device by sending a
signal through a specified pin to the microprocessor. I Z( min ) = 4mA
There are two hardware interrupts in 8086 -
VZ = 10V
• NMI (Non-Maskable interrupt).
Is = I L + I Z
• INTR
Practice Set-8 113 YCT
VZ = constant = 10V 69. (d)
Is( max ) = I L + I Z ( max ) and Is( min ) = I L + I Z( min ) y(n) = 2x(n) + x(n–1) +2y (n–1)
If all poles of H (z) lie inside a unit circle then system is
Vs − VZ 10 said to be stable.
R s( max ) = , Is( min ) = + 4
Is( min ) 10 Y (z) = 2 X(z) + Z–1X(z) + 2Z–1 Y(z)
Is(min) = 5mA Y(z) 2 + Z−1
H (z) = =
20 − 10 X(z) 1 − 2Z−1
R s( max ) =
5 ∴ Unstable (∵ Z = 2 Poles lie outside |Z| =1)
R s( max ) = 2kΩ
Due to feedback, it is IIR filter
64. (a) 70. (c)
Piezo-electric quartz crystal behaves like an RLC As we know that no. of nodes are given by
circuit, composed of an inductor, capacitor and resistor, B=L+N–1
with a precise resonant frequency. where, B = number of branch
65. (d) L = loop
We know – N = number of nodes
A dm 71. (b)
CMRR =
A cm In TEM waves, we have ––
Where:- E⊥H⊥p
A dm = Differential mode gain (105) i.e. electric and magnetic fields are perpendicular to
A cm = Common mode gain each other and they both are perpendicular to the
direction of propagation. The ratio of electric field and
CMRR = (Common mode rejection ratio) (105)
magnetic field is called intrinsic impedance and may be
105 defined as –
105 =
A cm E jωµ
η= =
A cm = 1 H σ + jωε
66. (b) For free space, σ = 0
The bombarding electrons, striking the screen, release µ = µ0µr, where µr = 1
secondary emission electrons and ε = ε0εr, where εr = 1 for free space
These secondary electrons are collected by an aqueous µ0
solution of graphite called Aquadag which is connected ∴ η = η0 =
ε0
to the second anode.
67. (d) 4π × 10 −7
=
In SR flip-flop, S and R are made equal to 1. The value 8.854 × 10 −12
of Q is indeterminate. = 120 π or 377 Ω
72. (b)
B.W of full AM = fc ± fm
B.W of full FM = fc ± βfm
β = modulation index
73. (b)
S R Q n +1 State Imax = 13A
0 0 Qn Hold state Imin = 7A
0 1 0 Reset I −I
Percentage modulation m = max min × 100
1 0 1 Set I max + I min
1 1 1 Indeterminate 13 − 7
= × 100 = 30%
68. (b) 13 + 7
In FM, the modulation index is always greater than 1. 74. (a)
The bandwidth of an FM signal is given by BW = 2 The first commercial geostationary communication
(β+1) fm. satellite is INTELSAT-1.
Practice Set-8 114 YCT
75. (d) = 0.0048V
The 8085 µp supports both part-mapped and memory = 4.8 ×10–3
mapped input/output. It supports up to 256 input/output ≃ 5 mV
ports via dedicated input/output instructions, with port
addresses as operands. 82. (a)
76. (d) The Input impedance of a transmission line is given by -
A super conductor is a material that achieves super  
conductivity which is a state of matter that has no Zin = Z0  Z L + jZ0 tan(β ℓ) 
electrical resistance and does not allow magnetic field Z
 0 + jZ L tan(β ℓ ) 
to penetrate. 2π
Where β =
77. (a) λ
The condition to satisfying the wall of wave guide- λ π
Thickness of wall > Skin depth of material wall. case(i) for ℓ < ⇒ βℓ<
4 2
78. (c) ∴ tan(β ℓ ) will be +ve, and therefore Zin is inductive
When a sinusoidal voltage wave drives a Schmitt
λ λ
trigger, the output is a rectangular wave. Schmitt trigger case (ii) for <ℓ<
is also known as regenerative comparator, used to 4 2
convert waveform of any shape to rectangular/square π
< βℓ < π
wave. 2
79. (c) Thus tan(β ℓ ) will we -ve and Zin will be capacitive in
Given that, ∆R = 0.15, R = 250Ω nature
G.F = 4 λ
case (iii) for ℓ = ⇒β ℓ = π/2
∆R / R 4
G.F =
∆L / L then Zin = ∞
∆L/L = ε λ
case (iv) for ℓ =
∆R / R 2
ε =
G.F βℓ = π
0.15 1 15 1 So, Zin = 0
ε = × = ×
250 4 25000 4
83. (c)
= 0.00015
Information is inversely proportional to the probability
= 1.5×10–4 of information.
80. (c)
An emitter coupled logic has high speed integrated  1 
I(xi) = log b   where b = base
circuit bipolar transistor logic family due to high speed
 P(xi) 
it is a non-saturating device.
Parameters of ECL- 84. (c)
Fan out 25
Noise margin 250 mV
Power dissipation/gate 25 mW
Propagation delay 2 ns
Clock frequency 600 MHz
81. (d)
Vfs = 5 V, n = 10 bit
Vfs
Maximum peak to peak ripple voltage =
2n − 1
Gibbs phenomenon is an overshoot (or "ringing") of
5
= 10 fourier series and other eigen function series occurring
2 −1 at simple discontinuities. It can be reduced with the
5 lanczos sigma factor. The phenomenon is illustrated
=
1024 − 1 above in the fourier series of a square wave.
Practice Set-8 115 YCT
85. (d) 0.25 = 1.69 – n 22
Losses in optical fibers can be caused by impurities,
micro bending, attenuating in the glass, splicing light n 22 = 1.44
absorption and scattering. Different types of losses in
n 2 = 1.2
optical fiber-
Absorption loss Scattering loss Welding loss or 94. (c)
radiation loss Coupling loss. Neutralizing capacitors are normally used in RF and IF
86. (d) amplifiers.
The following is not true for a counter instruction in 95. (d)
PLC–up-counters are always reset to zero, the counter Power point or Microsoft Power point is not operating
will operate on the trailing edge, a separate coil is used system. Microsoft power point is a powerful slide show
for reset. presentation program. It is a standard component of the
87. (d) company's Microsoft office suite software and is
Varactor diode is not a negative resistance device. The bundled together with Word, Excel and other office
value of junction capacitance is inversely varied with productivity tools.
the applied voltage at the power of 1/3, which can be 96. (a)
used as a high frequency modulator.
ω0 ω0
88. (a) Q-factor (Q0) = =
BW Bandwidth
Micro-strip line and over stripline-
Hence, A higher value of quality factor results in
A micro-strip line is more radiative than strip-line.
smaller bandwidth. Q0 ↑ BW ↓
Micro-strip line is easier than over strip line for
component integration. 97. (b)
Micro-strip line as a one shaded ground plane. Abstract Data Type (ADT) is a class of objects whose
Micro-strip has more interaction with neighboring behaviour is specified by set values and operations.
circuit element. ADT specifies operations which have to be performed.
89. (c) ADTs are following types
The ROM chips are mainly used to store boot files i) List ADT ii) STACK ADT iii) Queue ADT
required for system startup. 98. (d)
Read Only Memory (ROM) is storage data, that The sensitivity of Wheatstone bridge depends on
permanently stores data in a chip built into computer.
(i) Galvanometer current sensitivity
ROM is non-volatile memory.
(ii) Galvanometer resistance
90. (a)
From the option (iii) bridge supply voltage
1+A=1 99. (a)
Despite the presence of negative feedback, control
A + A =1
system still have problems of instability because of
A + AB = A(1+B) = A
component used have nonlinearity there is always a
91. (d) variations as compared to ideal characteristic.
Modulating signal in sinusoidal pulse width modulation 100. (c)
(SPWM) is sinusoidal.
1
92. (b) G.M =
| G(Jω) H(Jω) |
The original message signal can be detected from PAM
signal by passing PAM signal through integrator or low 1 1
pass filter. G.M = =
Gain K1
93. (a) Given-
K2 = 2K1
NA = 6.5
1
n1 = 1.3 G.M =
2K1
NA = n12 − n 22
GM1
GM 2 =
0.5 = (1.3) 2 − n 22 2
Practice Set-8 116 YCT
 PRACTICE SET - 9
1. Which of the following quantities cannot be 9. MSK (Minimum Shift Keying) is an orthogonal
measured/determined using Hall effect? FSK scheme that gets its name from the fact
(a) Type of semiconductor (p or n) that
(b) Mobility of charge carriers (a) The phase shift is minimum
(c) Diffusion constant (b) The error probability is minimum
(d) Carrier concentration (c) The transmission power required is minimum
2. Gun diode is made of- (d) The transmission bandwidth required is
(a) Gallium Arsenide (b) Germanium minimum
(c) Silicon (d) Selenium 10. Given field A = 3x 2 yza x + x 3 za y + ( x 3 y − 2z ) a z ,
3. What is the process of utilizing one data link
for transmission of a group of variable known it can be said that A is -
as? (a) Conservative
(a) Encoding (b) Decoding (b) Divergenceless
(c) Demultiplexing (d) Multiplexing (c) Solenoidal
4. BCD code is (d) Rotational
(a) error correcting code 11. The autocorrelation function of white noise is
(b) error detecting code (a) A delta function
(c) both (a) & (b) (b) A constant
(d) none of the above (c) Gaussian
5. Buck-Boost converter is one of the, (d) exp (– | τ |) with usual notation
(a) AC - DC converter
12. Types of signalling systems in telephony
(b) DC - AC converter/Inverter
(c) controlled Rectifier (a) Base band signalling
(d) DC – DC converter (b) Spread spectrum
6. The gate current required to turn on an SCR is (c) Station signalling and interoffice signalling
(a) Few amperes (d) Interoffice signalling
(b) Few milliamperes
13. An I/O processor controls the flow of
(c) Almost equal to anode current
information between
(d) About 50% of anode current
7. Determine the location of poles and zeros of the (a) cache memory and I/O devices
transfer function: (b) main memory and I/O devices

Y (s) =
( s + 2 )( s + 4 ) (c) two I/O devices
s ( s + 1)( s + 3 ) (d) cache and main memories
14. The main advantage of PCM is
Poles: s = 0, − 1, −3 Poles: s = − 2, −4
(a) (b) (a) Less bandwidth
Zeros : s = −2, −4 Zeros : s = 0, −1, −3
(b) Less power
Poles: s = 2,4 Poles: s = 0, 1, 3 (c) Better performance in presence of noise
(c) (d)
Zeros : s = 0, 1, 3 Zeros : s = 2, 4 (d) Possibility of multiplexing
8. The discrete LTI system is represented by 15. The EMF equation e = Nωrφsinωrt is applicable
n
1 to
impulse response h(n) =   u(n) , then the
2 (a) AC systems with time variant field flux
system is (b) DC systems with time variant field flux
(a) Causal and stable (c) both AC and DC systems with time invariant
(b) Causal and unstable field flux
(c) Non causal and stable (d) both AC and DC systems with time variant
(d) Non causal and unstable field flux
Practice Set-9 117 YCT
16. Dielectric breakdown occurs when _____. 22. A transistor has hfe = 50, its hfc will be
(a) Dielectric physically breaks down (a) –50 (b) +50
(b) It attains high resistivity (c) –51 (d) +51
(c) It starts conducting 23. An AC current of 5 A and DC current of 5A
(d) It comes in contact with another potential flow simultaneously through a circuit. Which
dielectric of the following statements is true?
π (a) An AC ammeter will read less than 10 A but
∫
2
17. Evaluate sin xdx : more than 5A
0

(a) 0 (b) 2 (b) An AC ammeter will read only 5A

1 (c) A DC ammeter will read 10A
(c) 1 (d) (d) A DC ammeter will read zero
2
18. Which is the dominant mode in rectangular 24. Wagner's earth a.c. bridge circuit is used to
waveguides? eliminate the effect of
(a) TE10 (b) TM11 (a) stray electrostatic fields
(c) TE01 (d) TE11 (b) stray electromagnetic fields
19. What is the charge of the hole? (c) inter-component capacitances
(a) Equal to that of a proton (d) parasitic capacitance to earth
(b) Equal to that of an electron 25. K-map method of simplification can be applied
when the given function is in
(c) Equal to that of a neutron
(a) Product of sum form
(d) Equal to zero
(b) Sum of product form
20. Calculate the reverse resistance of a Si diode
when the reverse voltage is 50V and the current (c) Canonical form
is 100 nA. (d) Any form
(a) 500 MΩ (b) 100 MΩ 26. What is the Boolean expression A ⊕ B
(c) 50 MΩ (d) 600 MΩ equivalent to?
21. Match List-I with match List-II and select the (a) AB + AB (b) AB + AB
correct answer using the code given below: (c) B (d) A
List-I List-II 27. If firing angle in an SCR circuit is increased,
A. Darlington 1. The output current is the the output……….
connection same in both the (a) Remains the same (b) Is increased
devices in the circuit (c) Is decreased (d) None of the above
28. Which device is used in relaxation oscillator?
B. Cascade 2. The output current of the
(a) SCR (b) diac
connection first device becomes the (c) triac (d) UJT
input current of the 29. For a second-order system with the closed-loop
second device 9
C. Differential 3. The collector of the first transfer function T(s)= 2 the settling
s + 4s + 9
amplifier device is connected to the time for 2-percent band, in seconds is
base of the second device (a) 1.5 (b) 2.0
without using capacitor (c) 3.0 (d) 4.0
D. Direct coupled 4. Output voltage depends 30. The Laplace transform of i(t) is given by
amplifier on the relative values of I(s) = 2/[s(s + 1)]. As t → ∞, the value of i(t) →
the two input voltages (a) 0 (b) 1
Codes: (c) 2 (d) ∞
A B C D 31. A capacitor
(a) 1 2 3 4 (a) offers easy path to a.c. but blocks d.c.
(b) 3 4 1 2 (b) offers easy path to d.c. but blocks a.c.
(c) 2 1 4 3 (c) offers easy path to both a.c. and d.c.
(d) 4 3 2 1 (d) blocks a.c.
Practice Set-9 118 YCT
32. How many times constant is required to obtain 41. A coin is tossed 4 times. The probability of
the steady state response? getting heads exactly 3 times will be:
(a) 2 times (b) 3 times (a) 0.75 (b) 0.33
(c) 4 times (d) 5 times (c) 0.25 (d) 0.5
33. Solutions of Laplace’s equation, which are 42. Which one has the lowest attenuation in a
continuous through the second derivative, are circular waveguide?
called: (a) TM11 (b) TE11
(a) Bessel functions (c) TE10 (d) TE01
(b) Odd functions 43. If Cd and Cs represent the depletion and
(c) Harmonic functions diffusion capacitances of a diode respectively,
(d) Fundamental functions which one of the following statements is NOT
34. The mean-square shot-noise current in any correct?
device is given by (a) Cd varies inversely with the depletion width.
(a) I 2n = 2q Idc B (b) I 2n = q Idc B (b) Cs varies directly with the rate of change of
diode current with respect to diode voltage.
(c) I 2n = 2q 2 Idc B (d) I 2n = 2q Idc B2 (c) Cd varies directly with the transit time.
35. In a receiver, the maximum contribution to (d) Effective junction capacitance is the parallel
noise is made by combination of Cs and Cd.
(a) power supply 44. The (Id-Vgs) characteristics of a MOSFET in
(b) power amplifier the saturation region is:
(c) mixer stage (a) Quadratic
(d) oscillator (b) Exponential
36. TCP and UDP protocols are part of the (c) Logarithmic
following TCP/IP layers: (d) Hyperbolic
(a) Physical and Data link layers 45. Which power amplifier can deliver maximum
(b) Network layer load power?
(c) Transport layer (a) Class A (b) Class AB
(d) Application layer (c) Class B (d) Class C
37. Which instruction in an 8085 processor can set 46. The given circuit represents the amplifier type
a flag ? as :
(a) MOV B, C (b) JNZ 21 00 H
(c) STA 20 00 H (d) ADD B
38. A compiler is a software programme which
(a) Changes high level programming language
into low level machine language.
(b) Changes the program into binary form
(c) Assembles the program (a) voltage-series feedback
(d) Executes the program (b) voltage-shunt feedback
39. A quarter wave matching transformer is used (c) current-series feedback
to match a 30 Ω load to a line having (d) current-shunt feedback
characteristic impedance 120 Ω. The
1
characteristic impedance of the quarter wave 47. A DVM has a 4 digit display. The 1 volt
matching section is 2
range can read upto
(a) 50 Ω (b) 60 Ω
(a) 9999 (b) 9.99
(c) 120 Ω (d) 150 Ω (c) 1.9999 (d) 0.19999
40. Which one of the following is not a 48. For designing a HA required no. of NAND
ferromagnetic material? gates are ____.
(a) Cobalt (b) Iron (a) 4 (b) 5
(c) Nickel (d) Bismuth (c) 9 (d) None
Practice Set-9 119 YCT
49. Which of the following represents D Flip-Flop? (c) from memory to memory
(a) Data Flip-Flop (b) Delay Flip-Flop (d) from I/O to I/O
(c) Direct Flip-Flop (d) Decoder Flip-Flop 58. Which of the following is/are an operations
50. The system mode described by state equations performed on linked list?
0 1  0  (a) Traversal (b) Deletion
xɺ =   x +   u, y = [1 1] x is
 2 −3  1  (c) Insertion (d) All of the options
(a) controllable and observable 59. An alternator driven by a steam turbine is
known as a
(b) controllable but not observable
(c) observable but not controllable (a) Turbo-generator
(d) neither controllable nor observable (b) Hydro-generator
51. A system has its two poles on the negative real (c) Steam generator
axis and one pair of poles lies on jω axis. The (d) None of the above
system is 60. Which one of the following materials is having
(a) stable (b) unstable the highest electrical conductivity at room
(c) marginally stable (d) either (a) or (c) temperature?
52. Given an analog signal x(t) = 5cos 200πt. The (a) Silver (b) Copper
minimum sampling rate required to avoid (c) Gold (d) Platinum
aliasing is 61. The area bounded by the curves y2 = x, y = x is
(a) 100 Hz. (b) 200 Hz given by
(c) 400 Hz (d) 50 Hz (a) 2/3 (b) 1/2
53. The 2-port network of Fig A has open circuit (c) 1/6 (d) 1/3
impedance parameters given by matrix 62. Evanescent mode attenuation in a waveguide
depends upon the
(a) Conductivity of the dielectric filling the
waveguide
(b) Operating frequency
(c) Conductivity of the guide walls
R R R 0
(a)   (b)   (d) Standing waves in the guide
R R 0 R
63. Bipolar transistor satisfies the relation
∞ R  R ∞  α
(c)   (d)   (a) β=α (b) β =
R ∞  ∞ R  1− α
54. The electric field inside a metal is 1
always_______ (c) β = (d) none of these
α
(a) Unity (b) Zero
64. Match List-I (Name of the oscillator) with List-
(c) Negative (d) Infinity
II (Characteristics) and select the correct
55. In a low-level AM system, the amplifier which answer using the code given below the lists
follow the modulated stage must be the
List-I List-II
(a) Linear device (b) Harmonic device
A. Colpitts Oscillator 1. RC Oscillator
(c) Class-C amplifier (d) Non-linear device
56. The radiation field of an antenna at a distance B. Phase Shift Oscillator 2. LC Oscillator
r varies as C. Tunnel diode 3. Negative
1 1 Oscillator resistance
(a) (b) 2 Oscillator
r r
1 1 D. Relaxation Oscillator 4. Sweep circuits
(c) 3 (d) 4 A B C D
r r
57. In a DMA write operation the data is (a) 1 2 3 4
transferred (b) 2 1 3 4
(a) from I/O to memory (c) 1 2 4 3
(b) from memory to I/O (d) 2 1 4 3
Practice Set-9 120 YCT
65. The rise time of low pass RC Circuit is given by 73. For A FM receiver, maximum frequency used
(a) 2.2 RC (b) 30.2 RC _____.
(c) 10 RC (d) 20.2 RC (a) 5 kHz (b) 10 kHz
(c) 15 kHz (d) 20 kHz
66. For the given Lissajous figure Find fy, if fx is
1200Hz 74. A geostationary satellite located at about 35000
km from earth can cover
(a) Complete surface of the earth
(b) One hemisphere in one pass
(c) One side of the earth
(d) An area depending on antenna used
75. The addressing expression in 8086, "MOV
count, 100H" is an example of _____
(a) direct, immediate (b) indexed, resistor
(a) 1200Hz (b) 1800Hz
(c) direct, resistor (d) indirect, immediate
(c) 2400Hz (d) 1600Hz 76. Which one of the following materials is a
67. The number of unused states in a 4-bit Johnson ceramic material?
counter is (a) Mica (b) Zinc sulphide
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) Antimony (d) Copper
(c) 8 (d) 12 77. In cavity magnetron, strapping is used to
68. How much percentage power will be saved (a) prevent mode jumping
when the carrier and one of the sidebands are (b) prevent cathode back heating
suppressed in an AM wave modulated to a (c) ensure bunching
depth of 50% ? (d) improve the phase focusing effect
(a) 83.3% (b) 94.4% 78 In a sinusoidal oscillator, sustained oscillations
(c) 47.2% (d) None of the above will be produced only if the loop gain (at the
69. A rectangular pulse of duration T is applied to oscillation frequency) is
a filter matched to this input. The output of the (a) Less than unity but not zero
filter is a (b) Zero
(a) Rectangular pulse of duration T (c) Unity
(b) Rectangular pulse of duration 2T (d) Greater than unity
(c) Triangular pulse of duration 2T 79. Which of the following is piezo-electric
material?
(d) Triangular pulse of duration T
(a) Quartz (b) Silica Sand
70. A network has 10 nodes and 17 branches. The
(c) Corundum (d) Polystyrene
number of different node pair voltage would
80. The Boolean equation for Y in the following
be.
circuit is
(a) 7 (b) 9
(c) 45 (d) 10
71. The phase shift constant for a distortion-less
transmission line is equal to:
G
(a) ω (b) ω LC
R
C R
(c) ω (d) ω
L G (a) Y= (A(B+C)+D)’ (b) Y= A(B+C)+D
72. The current relation in an AM wave is given by (c) Y= (A+BC)D (d) Y=((A+BC)D)’
µ2 µ2 81. A 10-bit D/A converter provides an analog
(a) I t = Ic 1 + (b) I t = 1 + output which has a maximum value of 10.23
2 2
volts. The resolution is
 µ2   µ 2
 (a) 10 mV (b) 20 mV
(c) I t = Ic 1 +  (d) I t = Ic 1 +   
 2   2   (c) 15 mV (d) 25 mV

Practice Set-9 121 YCT

82. If the reflection coefficient is 1/5, what is the 94. In TV 4 : 3 represents the
corresponding VSWR? (a) interlace ratio
(a) 3/2 (b) 2/3 (b) maximum horizontal deflection
(c) 5/2 (d) 2/5 (c) aspect ratio
83. A communication channel with additive white (d) ratio of the two diagonals
Gaussian noise, has a bandwidth of 4kHz and
an SNR of 15, its channel capacity is 95. Which of the following is the most common
device that accepts letters, numbers and
(a) 1.6 kbps (b) 16 kbps command from a user?
(c) 32 kbps (d) 256 kbps (a) Sensitive screen or touch screen
84. A prefix code is _____decodable and satisfies (b) USB
_______inequality.
(c) Keyboard
(a) Always, Schwartz
(b) Always, Kraft-McMilan (d) Optical mouse
(c) Sometimes, Schwartz 96. Which of the following is true for series
resonant circuit?
(d) Sometimes, Kraft-McMilan
ω 1
85. What is the numerical aperture of an optical (a) Q = r ⋅ R and ωr =
fiber when its critical angle is 30º L 2π LC
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.704 ω 1
(c) 0.866 (d) 0.2 (b) Q = r ⋅ L and ωr =
R LC
86. What is the total external data memory that
ω 2π
can be interfaced to the 8051? (c) Q = r ⋅ L and ωr =
(a) 64 K (b) 256 K R LC
(c) 128 K (d) 32 K ωr 1
(d) Q = ⋅ R and ωr =
87. Which one of the following is a negative L LC
differential resistance diode? 97. The Ethernet protocol uses
(a) PN Junction diode (b) Zener diode (a) CSMA/CA (b) SCPC
(c) Tunnel diode (d) Schottky diode (c) CSMA/CD (d) Slotted ALOHA
88. Probe coupling is 98. At the balance condition of the a.c. bridge
(a) Electrostatic shown in the figure below, the value of Z4
(b) Magnetic would be
(c) Either electrostatic or magnetic
(d) None of these
89. A RAM chip has capacity of 1024 x 1 bits.
Number of such RAM chips required to
construct a memory of 2048 bytes are :
(a) Two (b) Four
(c) Eight (d) Sixteen
90. A lamp is controlled from two positions A and (a) 120∠70ºΩ (b) 187.5∠–10ºΩ
B (Ex. staircase circuit). The boolean (c) 187.5∠–70ºΩ (d) 333.3∠–70ºΩ
expression for the above circuit is 99. The transfer function of a tachometer is of the
(a) AB + AB (b) AB + AB form
(c) AB + AB (d) AB + AB K
(a) Ks (b)
91. Number of bits per symbol in a 16 QAM is __. s
(a) 4 (b) 16 (c) 8 (d) 32 K K
(c) (d)
92. The modulation scheme used in GSM is: s +1 s ( s + 1)
(a) frequency shift keying
(b) phase shift keying 100. System is said to be marginally stable, if:
(c) Gaussian minimum shift keying (a) Gain crossover frequency > Phase crossover
frequency
(d) amplitude shift keying
(b) Gain crossover frequency = Phase crossover
93. The working of an optical fiber is bases on frequency
(a) Dispersion of light (c) Gain crossover frequency < Phase crossover
(b) Total internal reflection frequency
(c) Polarisation of light (d) Gain crossover frequency ≠ Phase crossover
(d) Diffraction of light frequency
Practice Set-9 122 YCT
 Answer Key
1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (d) 5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (a)
11. (a) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (a)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (d) 25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (c)
31. (a) 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (b) 36. (c) 37. (d) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (d)
41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (c) 44. (a) 45. (d) 46. (b) 47. (c) 48. (b) 49. (b) 50. (a)
51. (c) 52. (b) 53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (a) 56. (a) 57. (a) 58. (d) 59. (a) 60. (a)
61. (c) 62. (b) 63. (b) 64. (b) 65. (a) 66. (b) 67. (c) 68.(b) 69. (c) 70.(c)
71. (b) 72. (a) 73. (c) 74. (c) 75. (a) 76. (b) 77. (a) 78. (c) 79. (a) 80. (a)
81. (a) 82. (a) 83. (b) 84. (b) 85. (a) 86. (a) 87. (c) 88. (c) 89. (a) 90. (b)
91. (a) 92. (c) 93. (b) 94. (c) 95. (c) 96. (b) 97. (c) 98. (c) 99. (a) 100. (b)

Solution
1. (c) 6. (b)
Hall Effect-When a current carrying specimen (metal SCR (Silicon Controlled Rectifier) is a four layer solid
or semiconductor) is placed in a transverse magnetic state current controlling device. The gate current
field then an electric field is a Introduced in the required to turn on an SCR is few milliamperes.
direction perpendicular to both, current an magnetic 7. (a)
field, this effect is known as hall effect.
Given,
• Quantities that can be measured using hall effect.
(a) Whether the given specimen in metal or Y (s) =
( s + 2 )( s + 4 )
semiconductor. s ( s + 1)( s + 3 )
(b) To measure carrier concentration.
Poles are the roots of denominator of given transfer
(c) Mobility of charge carrier.
(d) Magnetic flux density. function by making denominator = 0
(e) To design hall effect transducer. s ( s + 1)( s + 3) = 0
(f) To measure the signal power in the electromagnetic So, poles: s = 0, –1,–3
wave.
Zeros are the roots of numerator of given transfer
(g) Type of semiconductor (p-type or n-type)
function by making numerator = 0
( s + 2 )( s + 4 ) = 0
So, zeros: s =–2, –4
8. (a)
2. (a) Given that
Gun diode are fabricated from a single piece of n-type n
semiconductor, the most common material are gallium 1
Impulse response h(n) =   u(n)
Arsenide, (GaAs) and Indium Phosphide, (InP). 2
However other materials including Ge, CdTe, InAs, In 1 for n ≥ 0
Sb and others have been used. ∵ u (n) = 
0 for n < 0
3. (d)
The process of utilizing one data link for transmission So h(n) = 0 for n < 0
of a group of variable is known as multiplexing. i.e. h(n) is right sided system.
4. (d) Hence h((n) causal system.
BCD code is used to represent a decimal number to a • For stability -
binary number, in BCD code each number is expressed ∞

in 4 bit and we consider the number and their code from

0 to 9.
∑ h(n) < ∞
n =−∞
5. (d) ∞ ∞ n
1
Buck-Boost converter is a DC to DC converter. In
buck-boost converter, the output voltage may be less or
∵ ∑
n =−∞
h (n) = ∑
n =−∞
  u(n)
2
more than the input voltage, hence the name buck- ∞ n
1
boost converter. The output voltage polarity is opposite
to that of the input voltage.
= ∑
n =0
 
2

Practice Set-9 123 YCT

 2
1 1 1
3
1 16. (c)
= 1+ +   +   + .......∞ = = 2< ∞ Dielectric Breakdown Occurs when an electrically
2 2 2 1
1− insulating material. Subjected to high enough voltage
2
suddenly becomes an electrical conductor, an electric
∞
∴ ∑ h(n) = 2 < ∞
n =−∞
current flows through it.
Electrical breakdown or dielectric breakdown is long
reduction in the resistance of an electrical insulator
Hence, the given system is stable .
when the voltage applied across it exceeds the
9. (a) Minimum shift keying is sometimes also referred
breakdown voltage. This results in the insulator
as fast FSK. It is so called because frequency spacing
becoming electrically conductive.
used only half as much as that used in conventional
non-coherent frequency shift keying. 17. (c)
π
10. (a) If ∇×A = 0 then field is a conservative y = ∫ 2 sin x dx
0
aˆ x aˆ y aˆ z
 π 
= − ( cos x )0 = −  cos − cos 0  = − ( 0 − 1)
π/ 2
∂ ∂ ∂
∇×A =  2 
∂x ∂y ∂z
y =1
3x 2 yz x 3z ( x y − 2z )
3
18. (a)
 ∂ 3 ∂ 3  ∂ 3
= aˆ x 
 ∂y
(
x y − 2z −
∂z
) ( )
x z  − aˆ y 
  ∂x
x y − 2z ( ) Dominant mode is a rectangular waveguide is TE10
c
f c( TE10 ) =
2a
∂   ∂ 3 ∂ 
−
∂z
( 
)
3x 2 yz  + aˆ z 
 ∂x
x z −
∂y
( )
3x 2 yz 

( ) Mode having the lowest cut-off frequency is called
dominant mode.
= aˆ x  x 3 − x 3  − aˆ y 3x 2 y − 3x 2 y  + aˆ z 3x 2 z − 3x 2 z  19. (a)
Unlike an electron which has a negative charge, holes
=0 have a positive charge that is equal in magnitude but
∴ field A is conservative. opposite in polarity to the charge on electron.
11. (a) The charge on holes is positive. Hence, the charge on a
The auto correlation function of white noise is an hole is equal to the charge of proton.
impulse at log 0. since the power spectral density is the 20. (a) Given that,
Fourier transform of the auto correlation function, the V = 50 Id = 100 nA
PSD of white noise is a constant. The auto correlation V 50
function of white noise is a delta function. Rd = =
Id 100 × 10−9
12. (c) Types of signalling system in telephony station
signalling and interoffice signalling. In telephony 50000 × 106
Rd =
signalling is the exchange of information between 100
involved points in the network that sets up, control and R d = 500MΩ
terminate each telephone cells.
13. (b) The input/output processor is a specialized 21. (c)
processor which loads and stores data. It controls the Darlington Amplifier- Darlington amplifier is used for
flow of information between main memory and I/O buffer. In this amplifier first transistor output current
devices. second transistor input current connect.
14. (c) Pulse - Code modulation is a method used to
digitally represented sampled analog signal.
The main advantage of PCM is better performances in
presence of noise.
15. (c)
Ndφ
e = Nωrφsinωrt = cos ωr t, for time invariant field
dt
dφ
flux = 0 e= Nωr φ sin ωr t, is the general equation & Common collector configuration
dt • Cascade connection– Cascade connection is the
it is applicable to both AC and DC system. process the first device output current for the second
where, e = induced emf, N = no. of turns in coil, device input current is called cascading.
dφ = change in magnetic flux, dt = change in time. A = A1 × A 2 × A 3 ..........
Practice Set-9 124 YCT
• Differential Amplifier– Differential amplifier is a 28. (d)
type of electronic amplifier that amplifies the The UJT is a three-terminal, semiconductor devices
difference between two input voltage which exhibits negative resistance and switching
characteristics for use as a relaxation oscillator in phase
control application.
In differential amplifier output voltage depends on the 29. (b)
relative value of the two input voltage. Given second order system-
• Direct coupled Amplifier:- 9
T (s) = 2 ……………(i)
s + 4s + 9
Standard second order system-
ω2n
T (s) = …………(ii)
s 2 + 2ξωn s + ω2n
Direct coupled amplifier the collector of the first device From comparing equation (i) and (ii) we get
is connected to the base of the second device without
using capacitor. ω2n = 9 ωn = 3
22. (c) 2ξωn = 4
Given hfe = 50 4 2
ξ= =
∵ hfc = –(1+hfe) = – (1+50) = –51 6 3
23. (a) Settling time for 2% band is given as-
2 4
 5  ts =
( 5)
2
rms value of current = +  ξωn
 2
4
= 37.5 = 6.12 A ts =
( 2 / 3) × 3
So that, An AC current of 5A and DC current of 5A
flows simultaneously through a circuit. ts = 2 sec
An AC ammeter will reads less than 10A but more than 30. (c)
5A. 2
I(s) =
24. (d) s(s + 1)
Wagner's earth AC bridge circuit is used to eliminate Apply final value theorem.
the effect of all the earth capacitances from the bridge lim i ( t ) = lim s I(s)
network and inner arm capacitance. t →∞ s→0

The stray element causes the error in measurement. 2s 2

lim = =2
25. (d) s→0 s(s + 1) 1
K-map method of simplification can be applied when–– 31. (a)
–––
A capacitor offers easy path to a.c. but blocks d.c.
sum of product (SOP) form→ group of 1's
For capacitor, the capacitive reactance is given by
product of sums (POS) form→ group of 0's
1
canonical form (standard SOP and POS form) XC =
26. (b) 2πfC
EX-OR Gate - For DC f=0 XC = ∞ Block dc.
For AC f≠0 XC ≠ ∞ Allow ac.
32. (c)
= A⊕B 4 times constant is required to obtain the steady state
response.
= AB + AB
33. (c)
27. (c)
Solution of Laplace's equation having continuous
V
Vo = m (1 + cos α ) second-order partial derivatives is given by
2π
Where, α = firing angle ∂ 2 φ ∂ 2φ ∂ 2 φ
+ + = 0 and it is called a harmonic
hence, the firing angle is an SCR circuit is increased, ∂x 2 ∂y 2 ∂z 2
the output is decreased. function.
Practice Set-9 125 YCT
34. (a) 43. (c)
Shot noise current in electronic circuit consist of 1
Diffusion capacitance Cd ∝
random fluctuation of electric current. It is given by Depletion width
(I ) = σ
2
sh
2
sh
.B B = Receiver electrical bandwidth. Cd ∝ doping
1
σsh2 = 2qD dc Cd ∝
junction voltage
( D ) = 2q I
2
sh dc
B 44. (a)
35. (b) The characteristic of MOSFET (Id – Vgs )in saturation
In a receiver maximum contribution to noise is made by region is quadratic.
power amplifier.
36. (c)
The TCP and UDP protocols is part of the transport
TCP/IP layer.
37. (d)
ADD instruction in an 8085 microprocessor can sat a
flag. 45. (d)
ADD B A ← A+ B The efficiency of class C amplifier is high. So by using
38. (a) class-C amplifier we can deliver the maximum load
A compiler in computer software translates source code power.
written in a high level language into a set of machine 46. (b)
language instructions that can be understood by digital
From output, we take V0 as feedback which it makes
computer's CPU.
shunt at input. Hence it is voltage shunt feedback.
39. (b)
For quarter wave transformer 47. (c)
Z2 1
Zin = 0 4 Digit display have five digits with 1 half digit (0 or
ZL 2
1) and 4 full digits the range of display from 0 to 19999.
Z0 = Zin ZL
= 120 × 30 = 60Ω
40. (d) The 1volt range can read up to 1.9999.
Ferromagnetic materials are those substance which
exhibit strong magnetism in the same direction of the 48. (b)
field when magnetic field is applied to it. For designing a Half Adder circuit. We required 5
E.g. – cobalt, nickel, gadolinium & iron. NAND gates. Half Adder is a logic circuit for the
addition of two one-bit numbers.
→ Symbol of HA -

41. (c)
• Total number of NAND gates required to construct
Total events, n(s) = 16
Successive events, n(A) = 4 half adder ⇒ 5
probability of getting three times head, Truth table of Half adder -
n(A) 4 Inputs Outputs
P= =
n(S) 16 A B Sum ( S ) Carry ( C )
P = 0.25 0 0 0 0
42. (b) 0 1 1 0
Circular waveguide is a circular cross section. The
lowest order propagation mode is TE11 for minimum 1 0 1 0
degradation of signals. 1 1 0 1

Practice Set-9 126 YCT

49. (b) 55. (a)
D (or Delay) flip-flop is a digital circuit used to delay In a low-level AM system, the amplifier which follow
the change of the state of its output signal (Qn) until the the modulated stage must be the linear device.
next rising edge of a clock timing input signal occurs. 56. (a)
50. (a) Radiation field of an Antenna is given-as-
0 1  0 
A =   , B =   , C = [1 1] E=
60πIdℓ
sin θ
 2 −3  1  λr
 0 1  0  1  1
AB =     , AB =   E∝
 2 −3 1   −3  r
0 1  57. (a)
QC = [B AB] ⇒ QC =  
1 −3 In a DMA, write operation data is transferred from I/O
|QC| = – 1 , |QC| ≠ 0 to memory. This process is managed by the chip known
Hence system is controllable. as DMA controller.
0 2  1  2  Type of DMA transfer using a DMA controller
AT CT =    =   Burst or Block Transfer DMA
1 −3 1  −2
Single-Byte Transfer DMA
1 2
[Q0] = [CT (A T C T)] =   Transparent or Hidden or Cycle stealing or demand
1 − 2  mode DMA Transfer
| Q 0 | = −4 , |Q0| ≠ 0 58. (d)
Hence system is observable. Linked list operations : Traverse, Insert and delete
51. (c) • Traversal - Access each element of the linked list.
When the two poles lies on negative real axis and one • Insertion - Adds a new element to the linked list.
pair on imaginary axis, then system will be marginally • Deletion - Removes the existing elements.
stable. • Search - Find a node in the linked list.
52. (b)
• Sort - Sort the nodes of the linked list.
x(t) = 5 cos 200πt
The Nyquist rate of sampling represents the minimum 59. (a)
rate sampling so that the original signal can be Cylindrical Rotor
recovered from its sampled version. • It can be driven at high speed so it is also known as
Fs(min) = fs (Nyquist) = 2fm high speed alternator or turbo generator.
= 2×100 • Cylindrical rotor has smaller diameter and larger
= 200Hz. axial length.
53. (a) 60. (a)
According to question from given option silver has
highest conductivity at room temperature. Conductivity
can be given as
1
Conductivity ( σ ) =
resistivity ( ρ )
V1 = R(I1 + I2) Conductivity is inverse relation with resistivity.
V 1 = I 1R + I 2R ...(i) 61. (c)
V2 = R(I1 + I2)
V 2 = I 1R + I 2R ...(ii)
From equation (i) & (ii)
 V1   R R   I1 
  =   
 V2   R R   I2 
R R 
So, open circuit impedance =  
R R 
54. (b)
( )
1
The electric field inside a metal is always zero. I=∫ x − x dx
0

Practice Set-9 127 YCT

  
1 66. (b) Given, fy = ?, fx = 1200 Hz
 (x)3 / 2 x 2  fy 3
=  −  =
 3 2 fx 2
 2 0 fy 3
2 1 =
= ×1 − 1200 2
3 2 fy = 1800 Hz
4−3 1 67. (c)
= =
6 6 For n bit Johnson counter no. of state is 2n.
62. (b) So the , for 4 bit no. of used state = 2 × 4
Evanescent mode attenuation in a waveguide depends =8
upon the operating frequency. If the frequency is less And total no. of unused state in Johnson is = 2n –2n
than the cut-on frequency, the wave is evanescent and = 24 – 2 × 4
will not propagate. = 16 – 8
63. (b) =8
In common emitter configuration Unused state in a 4-bit Johnson counter is 8.
I 68. (b)
β = C ...........(i)
IB Modulating index (µ) = 50% = 0.5
and common base configuration, 4 + µ2
Power saving = ×100%
I 2(2 + µ 2 )
α= C
IE 4 + (0.5) 2
= × 100%
I C = αI E ....(ii) 2(2 + (0.5)2
From equation (i) and (ii), = 94.44%
αI 69. (c)
β= E For matched filter output the input x(t) is
IB
y(t) = x(t)* h(t)
αI E
= (∵ IB = IE − IC )
I E − IC
*
αI E
=
( α ) IE
1 −

α
β=
1− α
Other form, =
β
α=
1+ β
γ = 1+ β Hence output will be triangular pulse of duration 2T .
64. (b) 70. (c)
Colpitts oscillator- LC oscillator colpitt’s oscillator n(n − 1)
Number of node pair voltage =
uses two capacitors C1 and C2 placed across a common 2
inductor L and the centre of the two capacitors is 10 × 9
= = 45
tapped. 2
Phase shift oscillator- RC oscillator a RC phase shift ω 1
oscillator gives 180º phase shift at output. 71. (b) VP = =
β LC
Tunnel diode oscillator-Negative resistance
oscillator. β = ω LC
Relaxation oscillator - sweep circuits. 72. (a)
65. (a) Total power required for transmission of AM-
The rise time of Low pass RC circuit is given by  
Pt = PC  1 + µ 
2

τ = 2.2 RC 2
 
Practice Set-9 128 YCT
If antenna resistance is R. We will get -
Pt = I 2t R Y = (A(B + C) + D)
2
PC = I R
C
Note - For NMOS parallel →OR
Series → AND
 µ2 
I 2t R = IC2 R  1 +  and PMOS vice-versa.
 2 
81. (a)
 µ2  Given, Number of bits (n) = 10
I t = IC 1 +  Vfs = 10.23 V
 2 
V
73. (c) Resolution = n fs
2 −1
For a FM receiver, maximum frequency used 15kHz.
10.23
74. (c) = 10
2 −1
A Geostationary satellite located at about 35000 km
10.23
from earth so that it can cover one side of the earth =
because 3 satellite cover whole earth and 360º of the 1023
earth. = 10 mV
75. (a) 82. (a)
1
MOV count 100H; Given Γ =
It is a 16-bit instruction i.e. immediate move to 5
memory, so it is an immediate addressing mode. 1+ Γ
∵ VSWR =
Direct addressing mode is said that the data is given as 1− Γ
operand. 1
1+
Example - MOV A, 24H, whatever data is stored in ∴ VSWR = 5
24H is moved to accumulator. 1
1−
So, it is an example of direct, immediate addressing 5
mode. 6 3
= =
76. (b) 4 2
Zinc sulphide is a ceramic material. 83. (b)
77. (a) Given that-
The cavity magnetron is a high-power vacuum tube that BW = 4kHz
generates microwave. In cavity magnetron, strapping is SNR = 15
used to prevent mode jumping.
 S
78. (c) Channel capacity (C) = BW log2 1 + 
 N
In a sinusoidal oscillator, sustained oscillations will be
(C) = 4 ×103 log2 (1+15)
produced only if the loop gain (at the oscillation
frequency) is unity. (C) = 4×103 log2(2)4
(C) = 16 ×103 ×1
Barkhausen criteria for oscillation
(C) = 16 kbps
i) Aβ = 1
84. (b)
ii) ∠Aβ = 0º or 360º Prefix code are always decodable.
79. (a) Prefix codes are also known as prefix-free code,
Quartz is a piezo-electric material. It is a hard prefix condition codes and instantaneous codes.
crystalline mineral composed of silica. Kraft inequality it characterize the set of code word
lengths that are possible in a uniquely decodable
The atoms are linked in a continuous framework of
code.
SiO2. All prefix codes follow kraft’s inequality.
80. (a) 85. (a)
From the above circuit:- Given -
B and C are OR input so output = (B + C) Critical angle (θc) = 30º
together Numerical aperture (NA) = sinθc
(B + C) is AND with A = sin 30º
A (B+ C) is OR with D 1
So, N MOS Act as invertor, = = 0.5
2
Practice Set-9 129 YCT
86. (a) 64 K bytes is an external memory chip that 94. (c)
interfaces with 8051 as 8051 uses 16-bit address for In TV 4 : 3 represent the aspect ratio. The aspect ratio is
memory access. The 8051 has a maximum of 256 bytes the ratio between the width and the height of display, it
of internal data memory, this memory consists of four defines it's overall shape.
register banks 16-bytes of bit- addressable memory, 95. (c)
stack and variable memory. A computer keyboard is an input device that allows a
87. (c) person to enter letters, numbers and other symbols
A tunnel diode (also known as a Esaki diode) is a type (These are called characters in a key board) into a
of semiconductor diode that has effectively "negative computer.
resistance" due to the quantum mechanical effect called 96. (b)
tunneling. Tunnel diodes have a heavily doped pn- Series resonant circuit
junction that is about 10 nm wide. 1
ωr =
LC
ωL
Quality factor (Q) = r
R
97. (c)
The Ethernet protocol uses CSMA/CD. Carrier-sense
multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is
a media access control (MAC) method used most
88. (c)
notably in early Ethernet technology for local area
A probe projecting into wave guide or cavity resonator.
networking. It uses carrier-sensing to defer
Designed to transfer energy from an external circuit.
transmissions until no other stations are transmitting.
89. (a)
98. (c) Given that -
RAM to construct
Number of chip = Z1 = 200∠30°Ω
RAM capacity
Z2 = 250∠–40°Ω
2048 Z3 = 150∠0°Ω
n=
1024 Z4 = ?
n=2 At balance condition -
90. (b) In case of staircase, when both switch are Z1Z4 = Z2Z3
different position, then bulb will ON. And it is the Z Z 250∠ − 40°× 150∠0°
Z4 = 2 3 =
example of EX-OR Gate, Y = A ⊕ B Z1 200∠30°
Y = AB + AB Z4 = 187.5∠ − 70°Ω
91. (a)
Number of bits per symbol = log 2 M 99. (a)
For tachometer y(t) = e (t) and x (t) = θ (t)
= log216
dθ ( t )
= log2 24 e(t) ∝
=4 dt
92. (c) Gaussian minimum shift keying [GMSK]- E (s) = K ⋅ s θ(s)
• The technology behind the global system for mobile E (s )
communication (GSM) uses Gaussian minimum shift = K ⋅s
keying (GMSK) modulation a variant of phase shift θ (s )
keying (PSK) with time division multiple T (s ) = K ⋅ s
Access(TDMA) signaling over frequency division
100. (b) A system is said to be marginally stable if the
duplex (FDD) carriers.
gain cross over frequency is equal to phase cross over
• GMSK is a form of modulation based on frequency frequency.
shift keying that has no phase discontinuities and
provides efficient use of spectrum as well as enabling ωgc = ωpc
high-efficiency radio power amplifiers.
93. (b)
( )
Gain cross over frequency ωgc is the frequency where
The working of an optical fiber is bases on total internal gain of the system is 1.
reflection. Use of optical fiber light signals can be Phase cross over frequency ( ωpc ) is the frequency
transmitted from one place to another place without loss
where phase of the system is –180º.
of energy.

Practice Set-9 130 YCT

 PRACTICE SET - 10
1. Match List-I (material) with List-II (Energy 4. Which of the following is error correcting
Level) and select the correct answer using the code?
codes given below the lists: (a) EBCDIC (b) GRAY
List-I List-II (c) Hamming (d) ASCII
A. p-type semiconductor 1. Donor energy 5. When the pnpn diode is biased such that the p
at 0K temperature level is close to side is more positive than the n side, the
the conduction the conduction junction J1 and J3 are:
band (a) Forward biased (b) Reverse biased
(c) Control biased (d) Feedback biased
B. Intrinsic semiconductor 2. Acceptor
6. Which semiconductor device acts like a diode
at 0K temperature energy level is
and two resistors?
close to the (a) SCR (b) triac
valence band (c) diac (d) UJT
C. n-type semiconductor 3. Fermi-level is 7. Signal flow graph is used to find-
at room temperature very close to (a) Stability of the system
valence band (b) Controllability of the system
D. p-type semiconductor 4. Fermi-level is (c) Transfer function of the system
at room temperature half way (d) Poles of the system
between the 8. The output of a system with impulse response
valence band
δ [n - 2] to an input signal, u [n + 2] is:
the conduction
band (a) u [ n + 2] (b) u [ n ]
Codes: (c) u [ n − 2] (d) u [ n ] − u [ n − 2]
A B C D
(a) 1 2 3 4 9. The most useful feature of MSK is
(b) 3 4 1 2 (a) Phase continuity
(c) 1 4 3 2 (b) Frequency continuity
(d) 3 2 1 4 (c) Amplitude continuity
2. Assume D1 and D2 to be ideal diodes (d) Pulse continuity
10. The divergence of vector
A = yz aˆ x + zx aˆ y + xy aˆ z is
(a) rotational (b) irrotational
(c) solenoidal (d) both b & c
11. A random process X(t) is called 'white noise' if
the power spectral density is equal to
N0 N0
(a) (b)
8 2
3N 0
(c) (d) N0
4
Which one of the following statements is true? 12. In telegraphy relay, the polarising flux
increases the
(a) Both D1 and D2 are ON
(a) sensitivity of the relay
(b) Both D1 and D2 are OFF
(b) speed of operation
(c) D1 is ON and D2 is OFF (c) capacity of relay
(d) D2 is ON and D1 is OFF (d) all of these
3. Non uniform quantization is used for ____. 13. The 8085 Microprocessor has
(a) Improvement is SNR (a) 8-bit data bus 16-bit address bus
(b) Reduce quantization noise (b) 8-bit data bus 8-bit address bus
(c) Both (c) 16-bit data bus 8-bit address bus
(d) None (d) 16-bit data bus 16-bit address bus
Practice Set-10 131 YCT
14. The coding system typically used in digital 25. Karnaugh map is used to
telemetry is (a) minimize the number of flip-flops in a digital
(a) PPM (Pulse Position Modulation) circuit
(b) PAM ( Pulse Amplitude Modulation) (b) minimize the number of gates only in a digital
(c) PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) circuit
(d) PDM (Pulse Duration Modulation) (c) minimize the number of gates and fan in of a
15. The direction of statically induced EMF can be digital circuit
obtained with the help of− (d) design gates
(a) Lorentz law (b) Lenz law 26. The circuit shown in the given figure
(c) Kirchhoff's current law (d) Laplace law
16. The main constituent of glass is
(a) SiO2 (b) B2O3
(c) Al2O3 (d) none of these
17. For what value of 'x' will the function y = x2–4x (a) is an oscillating circuit and its output is a
have the maximum or minimum value? square wave
(a) 4 (b) 1 (b) is one whose output remains stable in '1' state
1 (c) is one whose output remains stable in '0' state
(c) 2 (d) (d) gives a single pulse of 3 times propagation
2
delay
18. The cavity magnetron uses strapping to
(a) prevent mode jumping 27. How many SCR are to be connected in series
(b) prevent cathode back-beating with 800 V rating to be used for 3 kV circuit
(c) ensure bunching using derating factor of 15%?
(d) improve the phase focusing effect (a) 3 (b) 4
19. Drift current is : (c) 5 (d) 6
(a) Directed movement of charged particles 28. In dc chopper if Ton is the on-time and f is the
under the application of electric field. chopping frequency, then output voltage in
(b) directed movement of charged particles due terms on input voltage, Vs is given by
to concentration gradient. (a) Vs*Ton/f (b) Vs.* f / Ton
(c) random movement of charged particles due to (c) Vs/f*Ton (d) Vs*f*Ton
thermal energy. 29. When damping ratio is equal to zero, the
(d) None of the above damping frequency of a system is:
20. The maximum power dissipated by a diode is (a) Equal to natural frequency
(a) VDID (b) VrIr (b) Zero
(c) VDID +VrIr (d) zero (c) More than natural frequency
21. The main use of an emitter follower is as: (d) Less than natural frequency
(a) Amplifier 30. Wavelength of the visible light extends from
(b) Low input impedance circuit (a) 0.8 to 1.0 nm (b) 400 to 750 nm
(c) Buffer stage (c) 200 to 350 nm (d) 25 nm to 75 nm
(d) Follower of base signal 31. If the initial conditions in a system are zero, it
22. A CMOS amplifier when compared to an N means that system is
channel MOSFET has the advantage of (a) working with zero reference input
(a) Higher cutoff frequency (b) working but does not store energy
(b) Higher voltage gain (c) at rest and has no energy stored in any of its
parts
(c) Higher current gain
(d) at rest but stores energy
(d) Lower power dissipation
32. Two coils having equal resistances but different
23. Torque/weight ratio of an instrument indicates inductances are connected in series. The time
(a) selectivity (b) accuracy constant of the series combination is the
(c) sensitivity (d) fidelity (a) sum of the time constants of the individual
24. Which of the following instruments can be used coils
for measurement of very high value resistances (b) average of the time constants of the individual
such as insulation resistance in industries? coils
(a) Wheatstone bridge (c) geometric mean of the time constants of the
(b) Megger individual coils.
(c) Ohm-meter (d) Product of the time constants of the individual
(d) Resistive potentiometer coils
Practice Set-10 132 YCT
33. A vector P is given by Codes:
A B C
P = x 3 ya x – x 2 y 2a y – x 2 yza z Which of the
(a) 1 2 4
following statements is TRUE ? (b) 4 3 2
(a) P is solenoidal, but not irrotational (c) 3 4 1
(d) 4 1 2
(b) P is irrotational, but not solenoidal
41. The Fourier series assists in finding the steady
(c) P is neither solenoidal nor irrotational state response by transferring the analysis from
(d) P is both solenoidal and irrotational the:
34. Noise figure of a two stage amplifier depends (a) frequency domain to time domain
on the gain of (b) frequency domain to amplitude domain
(a) first stage (b) second stage (c) amplitude domain to phase domain
(c) both the stages (d) none of the stages (d) time domain to frequency domain
35. Probability density function of random 42. TEM wave cannot propagate in which one of
variable x is : the following?
∞ (a) Two wire transmission line
(a) ∫ f ( x ) dx = 1
−∞
x
(b) Coaxial cable
(c) Rectangular wave guide
df x (d) Micro-strip line
(b) ( x ) = Fx ( x ) 43. In common emitter configuration, the phase
dx
difference between input and output voltage of
(c) 0 ≤ ∫ ( x ) ≤ 1 a transistor is ______.
x
∞ (a) 0º (b) 90º
(d) ∫x
(x) = ∫ F ( x ) dx
x
(c) 180º (d) 270º
−∞ 44. For trigger voltage less than 1/3 Vcc, the output
36. The type of access used in GSM technology is of IC 555 is:
(a) FDMA (b) TDMA (a) –1 (b) infinite
(c) low (d) high
(c) FDMA/TDMA (d) CDMA
37. Which flag does not change by the execution of 45. Match the following:
the instruction DCR B in 8085 List-I List-II
microprocessor? (efficiency) (class of amplifier)
(a) Parity (b) Carry A. < 50% (1) A
(c) Zero (d) Sign B. > 50% (2) AB
38. A programmable device (PROM) is C. 78.5% (3) B
(a) Programmable OR and fixed AND array D. 100% (4) C
(b) Programmable AND and fixed OR array Codes:
A B C D
(c) Programmable AND and programmable OR
array (a) 2 1 4 3
(b) 1 3 4 2
(d) None
(c) 1 2 3 4
39. The desirable properties of transformer core
(d) 4 1 2 3
material are
(a) Low permeability and low hysteresis loss 46. Half power frequency represent below gain of
(b) High permeability and high hysteresis loss (a) 0dB (b) 3dB
(c) High permeability and low hysteresis loss (c) 2dB (d) 1dB
(d) Low permeability and high hysteresis loss 47. Tachymeter (or Tacheometer) is an instrument
40. Match List-I (Material) with List-II for measuring -
(Application) and select the correct answer (a) rpm
using the code given below lists: (b) Torque
List-I List-II (c) Rotational kinetic energy
A. Silicon steel 1. High frequency (d) Distances
transformers 48. A 4 : 1 multiplexer requires _____data
B. Ferrites 2. Permanent magnets selection line.
C. Alnico 3. Current transformers (a) 4 (b) 2
4. Power transformers (c) 1 (d) 16

Practice Set-10 133 YCT

49. An R-S latch is 59. The starting winding of a single-phase motor is
(a) combinational circuit place in
(b) synchronous sequential circuit. (a) Rotor (b) Stator
(c) one bit memory element (c) Armature (d) Field
(d) one clock delay element 60. The 'residual resistivity' of a metal is
50. The state transition matrix φ(t) of a system (a) due to lattice vibrations at high temperature
(b) due to photon scattering at high temperature
 xɺ 1  0 1   x1  (c) temperature-dependent
 xɺ  = 0 0   x  is
 2   2 (d) temperature-independent
 t 1 1 0 y+e y+..... dy
(a)  (b)  61. If x = e y+e then is
  dx
1 0  t 1
(a) (1–x) (b) (1–x)/x
0 1 1 t  (c) 1/x (d) x/(1–x)
(c)   (d)  
1 t  0 1 62. Guide wavelength (λg) of a waveguide
51. The characteristic equation of a system is given 1 1 1 1 1 1
(a) 2 = 2 − 2 (b) 2 = 2 − 2
by s3 + 5s2 + (6 + K)s + 20K = 0. Find the range λg λ0 λc λ0 λg λc
of K for stability.
1 1 1 1 1 1
(a) 0<K<2 (b) K<2 (c) = − (d) = −
(c) K<3 (d) 0<K<3 λc λ0 λg
2
λg λ0 λc
52. In a DSP system: 63. The current ICBO flows in the
(a) Nyquist frequency is same as the sampling (a) Emitter and base leads
frequency (b) Collector and base leads
(b) Nyquist frequency is same as the folding (c) Emitter and collector leads
frequency (d) None of these
(c) Nyquist frequency is double the folding 64. In an RC phase shift oscillator using FET, for
frequency sustained oscillations, the minimum voltage
(d) Nyquist frequency is half of oversampling gain of the FET should be
rate
(a) 29 (b) 64
53. Ideal transformer cannot be described by
(c) 51 (d) 56
(a) h-parameters (b) ABCD parameters
(c) g-parameters (d) Z-parameters 65.
54. The electric field lines and equipotential lines
(a) are parallel to each other
(b) are one and the same
(c) cut each other orthogonally The given circuit represents a/an :
(d) can be inclined to each other at any angle. (a) inverting amplifier
55. An FM signal with modulation index mf is (b) non inverting amplifier
passed through a frequency trippler. The
(c) voltage follower
modulation index of the output signal will be
(d) difference amplifier
(a) mf (b) 3 mf
66. The Lissajous patterns on a CRO screen is
(c) 9 mf (d) 27 mf
shown in the figure. The frequency ratio of the
56. The efficiency of an antenna having a vertical signal to the horizontal one is
resistance of 30Ω and radiation resistance of
60Ω is
(a) 33.3% (b) 50% (a) 3 : 2 (b) 5 : 1
(c) 66.6% (d) 75% (c) 1 : 5 (d) 2 : 3
57. Which DMA technique employs cycle stealing 67. Which one of the following can be used to
in true sense? change data from spatial code to temporal
(a) Transparent DMA (b) Multiplexed DMA code?
(c) Inter leaved DMA (d) Daisy Chain MDA (a) Shift registers
58. E-mail address is made up of- (b) Counters
(a) Four parts (b) Three parts (c) A/D converters
(c) Two parts (d) Single part (d) Combinational circuits
Practice Set-10 134 YCT
68. Pre-emphasis in FM systems involves 76. Which of the following materials are used for
(a) Compression of the modulating signal high-technology applications?
(b) Expansion of the modulating signal 1. Semi conductors
(c) Amplification of lower frequency 2. Bio materials
components of the modulating signal 3. Smart materials
(d) Amplification of higher frequency (a) 1 and 2 only
components of the modulating signal (b) 1 and 3 only
69. Digital filters have ______ and are best suited (c) 2 and 3 only
for ____phase (d) 1, 2 and 3
(a) Less accuracy, linear 77. The main disadvantage of the two hole
(b) High accuracy, linear directional coupler is
(c) High accuracy, non linear (a) Low directional coupling
(d) High accuracy, no linear (b) Poor directivity
70. The maximum number of trees of the graph in (c) High VSWR
figure is (d) Narrow bandwidth
78. When positive feedback amplifiers are used as
oscillators, the condition Aβ=1 is known as
(a) Barkhausen criterion of oscillation
(b) Pakinson criterion of oscillation
(c) Positive criterion of oscillation
(d) None of the above
(a) 16 (b) 25 79. Telephone traffic is measured
(c) 100 (d) 125 (a) In terms of grade of service
71 The characteristics impedance of a two-wire (b) In Erlangs
lossy transmission line is equal to: (c) With echo cancellers
L R + jωC (d) None of these
(a) (b) 80. Schottky clamping is resorted in TTL gates
C L
(a) to reduce propagation delay
R + j ωL R + j ωL (b) to increase noise margins
(c) (d)
G + j ωC G (c) to increase packing density
72. Modulation system used for video modulation (d) to increase fan-out
in television broadcast is 81. D/A converters are generally
(a) DSB AM with carrier (a) Weighted resistor network
(b) SSB AM with carrier (b) Binary ladder network
(c) SSB with suppressed carrier (c) Either (a) or (b)
(d) Vestigial sideband (d) Neither (a) nor (b)
73. The primary colour used in colour television 82. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct
is− answer using the code given below the lists :
(a) Green, yellow, red List - I List - II
(b) Red, yellow, blue (Medium Type) (Frequency Range)
(c) Red, green, blue A. Open wire 1. 100 kHz
(d) Blue, yellow, green
B. Twisted pair 2. 100 kHz
74. There is (are) _______ orbit(s) for a GEO
C. Coaxial-cable 3. 100 GHz
satellite.
(a) 3 (b) 5 D. Waveguide 4. 5.0 kHz
(c) 7 (d) 2 Codes :
75. The number of pins in microprocessor 8086 is A B C D
(a) 30 (a) 4 3 2 1
(b) 40 (b) 2 1 4 3
(c) 50 (c) 2 3 4 1
(d) 60 (d) 4 1 2 3
Practice Set-10 135 YCT
83. A memoryless source emits n symbols each (c) RC time constant
with a probability p. The entropy of the source (d) All of the above
as a function of n 94. In television pictures an effective rate of ______
(a) increases as log n
vertical scans per second is utilized to reduce
(b) decreases as log (1/n)
flicker.
(c) increases as n
(a) 500 (b) 5
(d) increases as n logn
84. The rate at which information can be passed (c) 50 (d) 5000
through a tele-communication channel depends 95. 'C' is a __________________
on the (a) Low-level programming language
(a) carrier frequency (b) bandwidth (b) High- level programming language
(c) transmission time (d) transmitter power (c) Assembly language
85. A single-mode optical fiber has a beat length of (d) Machine language
8 cm at 1300 nm. The value of birefringence Bf
will be nearly 96. A wire of resistor 10 Ω is drawn out so that its
(a) 1.6 × 10–5 (b) 2.7 × 10–5 length is increased to twice its original length.
(c) 3.2 × 10 –5
(d) 4.9 × 10–5 Then, the new resistance is
86. Hand held programmers are used for (a) 20 Ω (b) 5 Ω
programming (c) 30 Ω (d) 40 Ω
(a) small PLCs (b) medium PLCs 97. Difference between a switch and Hub
(c) large PLCs (d) none of these (a) Both are same
87. The transferred electron mechanism is found (b) Switch avoids flooding
in: (c) Hub avoids broadcast
(a) Tunnel diode (b) Gunn diode
(c) IMPATT diode (d) MESFET (d) None of the above
88. Electric Field and Magnetic Field are 98. The bridge circuit shown in figure
perpendicular to each other in :
(a) Klystron (b) Magnetron
(c) TWT (d) All of the above
89. Virtual memory is a _________________
(a) Volatile memory of unlimited capacity
(b) Non-volatile memory of unlimited capacity
(c) A technique to execute smaller program into
larger memory
(d) A technique to execute larger programs into
(a) cannot be balanced
smaller memory
90. Considering X and Y as binary variables, the (b) can be balanced but the frequency of
equivalent Boolean expression for Y(X + Y) is excitation must be known
(a) X (b) Y (c) can be balanced for only one frequency
(c) XY (d) X + Y (d) can be balanced at any frequency
91. Which of the following has the least noise 99. In position control systems, Tachogenerator
immunity? feedback is used to :
(a) QAM (b) ASK
(a) Increase the effective damping in the system
(c) FSK (d) PSK
(b) Decrease the effective damping in the system
92. In communicating systems, noise due to
quantization error is (c) Decrease the steady state error
(a) Linear and signal dependent (d) Increase the steady state error
(b) Nonlinear and signal dependent 100. For a stable system, what are the restrictions
(c) Linear and signal independent at low on the gain margin and phase margin?
frequencies only (a) Both gain margin and phase margin are
(d) Nonlinear and signal dependent at low negative
frequencies only (b) Gain margin is negative and phase margin is
93. The response time of photodiode depends on positive
(a) Diffusion time of photo carriers outside the (c) Gain margin is positive and phase margin is
depletion region negative
(b) Diffusion time of photo carriers within the (d) Both gain margin and phase margin are
depletion region positive
Practice Set-10 136 YCT
 Answer Key
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (a) 13. (a) 14.(c) 15. (b) 16. (a) 17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (a)
21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (c) 24. (b) 25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (c) 28. (d) 29. (a) 30.(b)
31. (c) 32. (b) 33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (c) 37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40.(d)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (c) 44. (d) 45. (c) 46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (b) 49. (c) 50. (d)
51. (a) 52. (b) 53. (d) 54. (c) 55. (b) 56. (c) 57. (a) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (d)
61. (b) 62. (a) 63. (b) 64. (a) 65. (b) 66. (b) 67. (a) 68. (d) 69. (b) 70. (d)
71. (c) 72. (d) 73. (c) 74. (d) 75. (b) 76. (d) 77. (d) 78. (a) 79. (b) 80. (a)
81. (b) 82. (d) 83. (a) 84. (b) 85. (a) 86. (a) 87. (b) 88. (b) 89. (d) 90. (b)
91. (b) 92. (b) 93. (d) 94. (c) 95. (b) 96.(d) 97. (b) 98. (b) 99. (a) 100. (d)

Solution
1. (b) At T = 300K, donor energy level is closed to the
For p-type semiconductor. conduction band.
N 
E C − E fn = kT ℓn  C 
 ND 
p

(d) P-type semiconductor at room temperature

ND
N 
E fP − Ev = kTℓn  V 
 NA  NA

• At T = 0ºk
EfP – EV = 0 • For P-type semiconductor at room temperature,
E fP = E V Acceptor energy level is close to the valence band.
2. (d)
So, fermi level is very closed to valence band.
As D2 anode has more potential, it will ON first and D1
(b) Intrinsic semiconductor-
the become OFF.
E C + E V kT  N C 
Ef = − ℓn   3. (a)
2 2  NV  Non uniform quantization-
at T = 0ºk → The maximum Quantization error is given by
E + EV ∆
Efi = C
2
−0 [ Qe ]max = , ∆ = Stepsize
2
EC + EV Vmax − Vmin
Ef i = Step size (∆) =
2 2n
Here → n is the number of bits per sample.
• Non uniform quantization is used for improvement is
fi
signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and reduce quantization noise.
4. (c)
Hamming code is useful for both detection and
• Fermi level is half way between the valence band and correction of error present in the received data .
the conduction band. This code uses multiple parity bits and we have to place
(c) n-type semiconductor at room temperature these parity bit in the position of powers of 2.
5. (a)
ND

Practice Set-10 136 YCT

 SCR is a four layer pnpn semiconductor The inverse Fourier transform of the power spectrum of
device. Its three terminal are anodes, cathode and gate, white noise will be an impulse as shown.
when anode is made positive than cathode, then N
junction J1 and J3 are in forword bias and junction J2 is R x (τ) = δ (τ)
2
in reverse bias and leakage current flows in the SCR.
This time SCR forward blocking occurs in state of off 12. (a)
state. In telegraphy relay, the polarising flux increases the
6. (d) sensitivity of the relay. A telegraph relay amplified
A UJT is a three terminal semiconductor switching electrical signal in a telegraph line.
device. It is like a two resistor and a diode circuit. 13. (a)
7. (c) A 8085 is an 8-bit microprocessor.
Signal flow graph can be used to represent linear system The 8085 uses a total of 246 bit pattern to form its
only. Signal flow graph (SFG) is a graph which instruction set. It has 16-bit address bus and 8 bit data
represents a set of equations. It consists of nodes and bus.
branches such that each branch of signal flow graph 14.(c)
having an arrow which represents the flow of signal. It Pulse code modulation (PCM) system is typically used
used for transfer function of the system. in digital telemetry.
8. (b) 15. (b)
x1 ( n ) = u [ n + 2 ] The direction of statically induced emf can be obtained
with the help of Lenz’s law. Lenz's law, in
x 2 [ n ] = δ [ n − 2] electromagnetism statement that an induced electric
From convolution property current flows in a direction such that the current
opposes the change that induced in it. Lenz's law is
y ( n ) = x1 ( n ) * x 2 ( n )
based on the law of conservation of energy.
y ( n ) = u ( n + 2) * δ ( n − 2) 16. (a)
Silicon oxide (SiO2) is a common fundamental
y ( n ) = u ( n + 2 − 2)
constituent of glass . Fused quartz is a glass made from
y ( n ) = u [n ] chemically-pure silica.
17. (c)
9. (a)
y = x2 – 4x
The most useful feature of MSK is phase continuity.
Integrating on both sides-
Minimum Shift Keying modulation is the most widely
dy
used digital modulation technology. = 2x − 4
10. (d) dx
Given vector is -  dy 
  = 0 for maximum or minimum
∴ A = yz aˆ x + zx aˆ y + xy aˆ z  dx 
0 = 2x – 4
∂ (yz) ∂ ( zx ) ∂ ( xy )
∴ ∇.A = aˆ x + aˆ y + aˆ z x=2
∂x ∂y ∂z
18. (a)
∇.A = 0 The cavity magnetron is acts like a microwave
oscillator and generates microwaves and in order to
Then, ( ∇.A ) = 0 → (Solenoidal) avoid made jumping strapping technique is used.
Strapping consists of two rings of heavy gauge wire
∇ × A = 0 → (irrotational)
connecting alternate anode poles.
11. (b) 19. (a)
The power spectral density of white noise is- Drift current is the electric current caused by particles
N gating by an electric field.
s x (f ) = 0 for all frequency 'f'
2 J = σE
20. (a)
The maximum power dissipation in diode is given by
forward voltage drop and current flowing through it
Pm = VD × ID

Practice Set-10 138 YCT

21. (c) string efficiency = 1 – 0.15
Emitter follower is a negative current feedback circuit. = 0.85
Emitter follower configuration, also known as common 3000
hence, 0.85 =
collector, provides high input impedance and low output n × 800
impedance. 3000
So they are used for the purpose of impedance n= = 4.41 ~ 5
0.85 × 800
matching. The main use of an emitter follower is as
28. (d)
buffer stage.
V0 = α ⋅ Vs
22. (d)
T
The two important characteristics of CMOS device are V0 = on × Vs
high noise immunity and low power dissipation. T
V0 = Ton ⋅ f ⋅ Vs
29. (a)
Given that,
damping ratio (ξ) = 0
We know that,
Damping frequency ωd = ωn 1 − ξ 2
ωd = ωn 1 − 0 (∵ξ = 0)

CMOS devices dissipate less power than NMOS ωd = ωn

devices because the CMOS dissipates power only when
Where ωn = Natural frequency.
switching, whereas N-channel MOSFET dissipates
power whenever the transistor is on because there is a 30. (b)
current path from VDD to Vss. Typically human eye can defect wave lengths from 400
to 750 nm. The visible light spectrum is the segment of
23. (c)
electromagnetic spectrum that human eye can view.
Torque/weight ratio of an instrument decides the
sensitivity of an indicating instrument it should be high. 31. (c)
If the initial condition in a systems are zero, it means
24. (b)
that system is at rest and has no energy stored in any
Megger instruments can be used for measurement of
parts.
very high value resistances such as insulation resistance
in industries. Megger is also called as moving coil type 32. (b)
instrument here controlling is done by coil and air
friction damping is used.
Req = R+R=2R
25. (b)
Leq = L1 +L2
Karnaugh map is used to minimize the number of gates
in a digital expressions and is referred to as the L eq L1 + L 2 1  L1 L 2 
τ= = =  +
graphical technique of simplifying Boolean expression. R eq 2R 2  R R 
26. (a) τ1 + τ2
τ=
2
33. (a)
Given

A square wave is generated when a circuit output P = x 3 ya x − x 2 y 2 a y − x 2 yza z

alternates between 0 and 1 for the given circuit output For solenoidal, ∇.P = 0
keeps changing from 0 to 1 and 1 to 0.
 ∂ ∂ ∂ 
Hence, given circuit will generate a square wave. ∇.P =  a x + a y + a z  .
27. (c)  ∂ x ∂y ∂ z 

String efficiency =
Total string voltage / current rating ( x ya 3
x − x 2 y 2 a y − x 2 yza z )
 individual voltage / current 
n ×  ∂ 3 ∂ ∂
 rating of one SCR  = x y − x 2 y 2 − x 2 yz
∂x ∂y ∂z
where, n No. of SCR
Derating factor = 1 – string efficiency = 3x 2 y − 2x 2 y − x 2 y = 0

Practice Set-10 139 YCT

So vector P is solenoidal 41. (d)
The Fourier series assists in finding the steady state
for irrotational, ∇ × P = 0
response from time domain to frequency domain. It
ax ay az gives frequency spectrum of the system.
∂ ∂ ∂ 42. (c)
∇×P = TEM wave propagation work only two wire
∂x ∂y ∂z
transmission line, co-axial cable, micro-strip line and it
x 3 y −x 2 y2 − x 2 yz is quasi in nature.
∂ ∂  • Rectangular waveguide works upon TM and TE
= a x  ( − x 2 yz ) − ( − x 2 y 2 )  modes and TEM wave cannot propagate in rectangular
 ∂y ∂z 
waveguide.
∂ ∂ 
−a y  ( − x 2 yz ) − ( x 3 y )  43. (c)
 ∂x ∂z  In common emitter configuration, the phase difference
between input and output voltage of transistor is 180º.
∂ ∂ 
+a z  ( −x 2 y2 ) − x3 y In common base and common collector configuration
 ∂x ∂y  the phase difference between input and output voltage
aˆ x ( − x 2 z ) + aˆ y ( 2xyz ) + aˆ z ( −2xy 2 − x 3 ) of transistor is 0º.
= 44. (d)
∇×P ≠ 0 A low voltage (less than 1/3 the supply voltage) applied
momentarily to trigger input causes the output pin (3)
So vector P is not irrotational.
go to high.
34. (c)
For two stage amplifier-
A V = A V1 × A V 2
Hence depend on both amplifier.
35. (a)
Probability density function is given by 45. (c)
∞
Class of Amplifier Efficiency
∫ f ( x ) dx = 1
−∞
x
Class-A 50% (Maximum)
36. (c) Class-B 78.5%
FDMA/TDMA used in GSM technology. Class-AB 50% - 78.5%
37. (b) Class-C >90%
DCR B: B – 01 H → B (It means the content of the 46. (b)
register is decrement by one.) Gain of half power frequency
DCR B: requires → 1Byte, 1MC (F) and 4T states for Input power = Pi
execution. Output power = P0
38. (a)
For half power frequency Pi = P0 2
A programmable device (PROM) is Programmable OR
and Fixed AND array. Power gain = 10log ( P0 Pi )
39. (c)  P 
The desirable properties of transformer core material = 10log  0 
are high permeability and low hysterias loss.  P0 2 
40. (d) 2
= 10log  
● Silicon steel is soft magnetic material that is used in 1
power transformers, motors and generators. = 3.010
● Ferrites core are used for high frequency transformer
because they carry low coercivity and offer low eddy Power gain = 3dB
current losses. 47. (a)
● Both coercivity as well as retentivity of Alnico is Tachymeter (or tacheometer) is an instrument
known to be high and thereby making it ideal for measuring the rotation speed of a shaft or disc in rpm it
being is used in making permanent magnets. is used to measure rpm of motor or other machines.

Practice Set-10 140 YCT

48. (b) For 2n :1 mux requires n data select so 4:1 mux, Here I1= I2 (for ideal transformer)
22: 1, n = 2 data selection line required. For Z- port network ( V1 , V2 ) = f ( I1 ,I 2 )
49. (c) i.e. there must be no any relationship between
• R - S latch is a one bit memory element. It is an independent variables I1 and I2 respectively.
Asynchronous which means that output of a latch Hence Z- port network can not be defined for an ideal
depends on its input. A latch is a bi-stable multi- transformer.
vibrator. 54. (c)
• It has two states these states are high output and low Equipotential lines are imaginary lines that trace equal
output. Latches are very similar to flip-flop, but are not electric potential or voltage in a plane. Equipotential
a synchronous device. lines are always perpendicular to the electric field.
50. (d) Given that, 55. (b) In frequency modulation-
0 1 ∆f
A=   Modulation index (mf) =
0 0 fm
−1
State transition matrix φ(t) = L–1 [sI − A ] Where-
−1
∆f = frequency deviation
 s −1 fm = message signal frequency
φ(t) = L
–1
0 s 
  When fm signal passed through frequency Tripler. New
frequency deviation will be
 s 1 1
φ(t) = L–1  × 2 ( ∆f ) ' = 3∆f
0 s  s
modulation index of output signal-
1/ s 1/ s 2 
φ(t) = L –1
  ( ∆f ) '
 0 1/ s  (m f ) ' =
fm
1 t 
φ(t) =   3∆ f
0 1 (m f ) ' =
fm
51. (a)
R-H tabulation (m f ) ' = 3m f
s3 1 6+K 56. (c) Given-
s2 5 20K Rrad = 60Ω
s1 6 − 3K 0 Rloss = 30Ω
0 60 60
s 20K η= =
60 + 30 90
For stable system
20K > 0 60
η= × 100
K>0 90
And 6 − 3K > 0 η = 66.66%
6 > 3K 57. (a)
K<2 Transparent mode takes the most time to transfer a
Range of K → 0<K<2. block data, yet is also most efficient mode in term of
52. (b) overall system performance. In transparent overall
If a signal is sampled at fs sampled per sec, then fN = system performance. In transparent mode, the DMA
fs controlled transfers data only when the CPU is
frequency called the Nyquist frequency (also called
2 performing operations that do not use the system bus.
as a folding frequency). 58. (c)
53. (d) E-mail address is made-up of two parts. A valid email
The equivalent circuit diagram for an ideal transformer address is an address composed of two parts, a
can be expressed as- username and a domain name.
59. (b)
Starting winding of a single-phase motor is placed in
the stator by 90º apart from the running winding. It will
rotate in the direction of the magnetic rotation provided
by starting or auxiliary winding and capacitor.
Practice Set-10 141 YCT
60. (d) 64. (a) : In an RC phase shift oscillator using FET, for
The nonlinear region at very low temperature where sustained oscillations, the minimum voltage gain of the
resistivity reaches a finite value known as residual FET should be 29.
resistivity. 65. (b)
 R 
Since Vo = Vi 1 + 2  → ( + ve)
 R1 
A non inverting amplifier is an operational amplifier
circuit with an output voltage that is in phase with the
ρ = ρo (1 + ∆T) input Voltage. Inverting op-amp which produces an
Residual Resistivity (ρo) of a metal is temperature output signal that is 180º out of phase.
independent 66. (b)
61. (b) Given,
Given,
y +..........+∞
X = x = ey+e
Which can be written as-
x = ey +x
fy Horizontalsignal 5
Taking ℓn on both side = = = 5 :1
fx verticalsignal 1
ℓn x = y + x
67. (a)
Differentiating w.r.to x on both side- • Data can be changed from spatial code to temporal
1 dy code by shift register.
= +1
x dx (PISO) shift register convert spatial code to temporal
dy 1 1− x code.
= −1 =
dx x x • SIPO shift register convert temporal code to spatial
62. (a) code.
Relation between cut off wavelength and guide 68. (d)
wavelength Pre-emphasis-
1 1 1 • It is the process of boosting high frequency of an
= +
λ 02 λ g2 λ c2 audio signal, such that the signal to noise ratio is
greater than one.
Where, λ 0 is the free space wavelength.
• Pre-emphasis is done in the transmitter before
63. (b) frequency modulation.
The current ICBO is the leakage current which flow 69. (b)
through the collector to base. Digital filters have high accuracy and are best suited for
linear phase. Digital filter are more portable and more
flexible than analog filter and the performance of digital
filter does not vary with environmental parameter.
70. (d)
Given number of node = 5
So, total number of trees = nn–2 = 55–2
Note- = 125
1. IC = α IE + ICB0 71. (c)
2. IC = βI B + ICEO R + j ωL
Z0 =
I G + jωC
3. ICEO = CBO
1− α 72. (d)
4. ICEO = (1 + β) ICBO Vestigial side band modulation (VSB) is used for video
α β modulation in TV transmission.
5. β = , α= 73. (c)
1− α 1+ β
The primary colour used in colour television is Red,
1 Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan are called
6. γ = 1 + β =
1− α secondary colours.

Practice Set-10 142 YCT

74. (d) 85. (a)
There are 2 orbits for a GEO satellites. Given,
(a) High earth orbit Beat length (LB) = 8 cm
(b) Low earth orbit = 8 ×10–2m
75. (b) λ = 1300 × 10–9m
40 No. of pins are present in 8086 micro -processor. λ
• That uses MOS technology. Birefringence (Bf) =
LB
• 8086 works two mode operation.
(1) Maximum mode, (2) Minimum mode 1300 ×10−9
=
76. (d) 8 × 10−2
Material that are used in high technology applications = 162.5 ×10–7
are known as advance materials. These materials
Bf = 1.625 ×10−5
include semiconductors, Bio materials and smart
materials. These materials are used for LASERS, ICs, 86. (a)
magnetic information storage, LCDs and fiber optics Hand held programmers are used for programming
etc. There are metals, ceramics and polymers type small PLCs.
materials. 87. (b)
77. (d) A Gunn diode is a type of diode it does not contain any
The main disadvantage of two hole directional coupler typical PN junction but it consists of two electrodes. It
is narrow bandwidth. is also called as a transferred electronic device.
78. (a) 88. (b)
An oscillator is naming but an amplifier with positive Electric field and magnetic field are perpendicular to each
feedback is given by Af = A/1–Aβ other in Magnetron. Magnetron are the cross field tubes in
which the electric and magnetic fields cross i.e. run
If Aβ = 1 then it becomes infinite and this implies that
perpendicular to each other.
amplifier is capable of producing an output even when
no input is applied. 89. (d)
Virtual memory is a technique to execute larger
This is called Barkhausen criterion for oscillation.
programs into smaller memory.
79. (b)
Virtual memory is a space where large programs can
Telephone traffic is measured in terms of in Erlangs.
store themselves in form of pages while their execution,
80. (a) and only the required pages or portions of processes are
Schottky clamping is resorted in TTL gate to reduce located into main memory.
propagation delay. A schottky transistor is a 90. (b)
combination of a transistor and a schottky diode that Y (X+Y)
prevents the transistor from saturating by diverting the = YX + YY = YX + Y
excessive input current. It is also called a schottky = Y (X+1)
clamped transistor. =Y
81. (b) 91. (b)
• D/A converters often convert finite precision time ASK has the least noise immunity.
series data to a continually varying physical signal. 92. (b)
• A D/A converter is a binary ladder network. • Quantization Noise is introduced by the quantizer.
82. (d) • In PCM the quantization noise in terms of power is
Open wire – 5kHz given by the relation.
Twisted pair – 100kHz ∆2
Coaxial cable – 100MHz Quantization noise power ( Pn ) =
12
Waveguide – 100GHz
Here,
83. (a)
2Vmax
A memoryless source emits n symbols each with a ∆ is the step size =
probability P. The entropy of the source as a function n L
increases as log n. • It is a rounding error between the analog input voltage
84. (b) to the analog digital converter (ADC) and the output
The rate of which information can be passed through a digitized value. The noise is non-linear and signal
tele-communication channel depends on the band width dependent.

Practice Set-10 143 YCT

93. (d) The response time of a photo detector with its 99. (a) A tachogenerator can be found in various kinds
output circuit depends mainly on the three factor- of machine tool and other equipment where the
The transit time measurement of speed and direction is essential.
W Let standard 2nd order system representing the position
td = control system and employing a tachogenerator
Vd feedback is given as.
depends on the carrier drift velocity and the depletion
layer width W,
Diffusion time of photo carriers outside depletion
region.
RC time constant of the circuit
1
B= The characteristic equation is given by-
2πR T CT
1 + G (s) H (s) = 0
94. (c) In Television pictures an effective rate of 50
vertical scans per second is utilized to reduced flicker. ω2n
1+ × (1 + sK b ) = 0
This is accomplished by increasing the downward rate s ( s + 2ξωn )
of travel of the scanning electron beam, so that every
alternate line gate scanned instead of every successive s 2 + 2ξωn s + ωn2 K bs + ωn2 = 0
line. s 2 + ( 2ξωn + ωn2 K b ) s + ωn2 = 0
95. (b) 'C' is a high level programming language.
On the comparison with standard 2nd order
96.(d) Given that R1 = 10 Ω
characteristic equation-
When length is increased to double of original length by
wire drawn out. s 2 + 2ξ'ω'n s + ω'2n = 0
ℓ ω'2n = ωn2 ; ωn' = ωn
R1 = ρ 1 -------------(i)
a1 2ξω n = 2ξωn + ωn K b
' ' 2

∴ According to question ℓ 2= 2ℓ1 2ξωn + ω2n K b ωK

ξ' = = ξ+ n b
∴ Volume of wire will be constant 2ω'n 2
So, V1 = V2
 ωK 
ℓ1 a 1 = ℓ2 a 2 Damping value become  ξ + n b  which is greater
 2 
a1 than ξ . Hence, tachogenerator feedback is used to
a2 =
2
increase the effective damping of the system.
  100. (d) A system is said to be stable if and only if the
ℓ2  2ℓ1   ρℓ1 
∴ R2 = ρ = ρ  = 4  gain margin and phase margin both are positive. If any
a2  a1   a1  one from GM and PM is negative then system become
 2  unstable.
R2 = 4R1 [Put equation (i) ] Gain margin (G.M):- It is the " allowable gain ".
R2 = 4×10 G ( jω) H ( jω) ω=ω = X
R2 = 40 Ω gc

97. (b) Switch avoids flooding. A switch is used to 1

G.M =
connect various network segments. A network switch is X
a small hardware device that joins multiple computers 1
G.M(dB)=20log
together within one local area network. A Hub connects X
multiple Ethernet devices together making them act as a Phase margin (PM) :- It is the "allowable phase lag"
single segment.
∠ G ( jω) H ( jω) ω=ω = φ
98. (b) At balance condition gc

Z1Z3 = Z2Z4 P.M = 180° + φ

1 for stability
R1×R2 = jωL× G.M & P.M = +ve ⇒ ωgc<ωpc
jωC
for unstable
L G.M &P.M = –ve ⇒ ωgc > ωpc
R1×R2 =
C Marginally stable
So it can be balanced at any frequency. G.M &P.M = 0 ⇒ ωgc = ωpc.
Practice Set-10 144 YCT